LINCOLN NAVIGATOR Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of release. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or
equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2024
All rights reserved.
Part Number: -202406-20240624120411
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Contacting Us
Contacting Us ..................................................17
Introduction
About This Publication ..................................19
Using This Publication ..................................20
Symbols Glossary
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle ...................21
Symbols Used On Your Instrument Cluster
.........................................................................23
Data Privacy
Data Privacy ....................................................27
Service Data ....................................................28
Event Data .......................................................29
Settings Data ..................................................29
Connected Vehicle Data ..............................30
Mobile Device Data ......................................30
Emergency Call System Data ......................31
Environment
Protecting the Environment ........................32
Visual Search
Interior Overview ...........................................33
Exterior Overview ..........................................35
Child Safety
Child Safety Precautions ..............................37
Child Restraint Anchor Points .....................38
Child Restraints ..............................................39
Installing Child Restraints ............................42
Booster Seats .................................................46
Child Safety Locks .........................................49
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Precautions ....................................50
Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts
..........................................................................51
Sensitive Locking Mode ..............................52
Automatic Locking Mode ............................52
Adjusting the Seatbelts During Pregnancy
.........................................................................53
Adjusting the Seatbelt Height ....................54
Seatbelt Reminder .........................................54
Checking the Seatbelts ...............................56
Seatbelt Extensions ......................................56
Personal Safety System™
What Is the Personal Safety System .........58
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work ..............................................................58
Personal Safety System Components
........................................................................58
Airbags
How Do the Front Airbags Work ...............59
How Do the Side Airbags Work .................59
How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work .......60
Airbag Precautions .........................................61
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats ........................................62
Children and Airbags ....................................63
Front Passenger Sensing System .............63
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .........67
Disposing of Airbags ....................................68
911 Assist - Vehicles With:
Emergency Assistance
What Is 911 Assist ...........................................69
1
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
How Does 911 Assist Work ..........................69
Emergency Call Requirements ..................69
Emergency Call Limitations .........................70
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Control Limitations ..........................71
Using the Remote Control ............................71
Removing the Key Blade ..............................72
Sounding the Panic Alarm ...........................72
Locating Your Vehicle ...................................72
Changing the Remote Control Battery
.........................................................................73
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
.........................................................................74
Programming the Remote Control ............74
Keys and Remote Controls Audible
Warnings ......................................................75
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting .........................................75
Phone as a Key
What Is Phone as a Key ................................76
Phone as a Key Limitations .........................76
Programming Your Phone ...........................76
Using the Valet Mode ...................................76
Using the Backup Start Passcode .............77
Phone as a Key – Troubleshooting ...........78
Doors and Locks
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle .........................................................80
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle .........................................................80
Autounlock .......................................................81
Autolock ............................................................81
Mislock ..............................................................81
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings .........82
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting ........82
Keyless Entry
What Is Keyless Entry ...................................84
Keyless Entry Limitations .............................84
Keyless Entry Settings ..................................84
Using Keyless Entry ......................................84
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting ...............85
Keyless Entry Keypad
What Is the Keyless Entry Keypad .............86
Keyless Entry Keypad Limitations .............86
Locating the Keyless Entry Keypad ..........86
Keyless Entry Keypad Master Access Code
........................................................................86
Keyless Entry Keypad Personal Access
Codes ...........................................................87
Using the Keyless Entry Keypad ................88
Keyless Entry Keypad – Troubleshooting
.........................................................................88
Easy Entry and Exit
How Does Easy Entry and Exit Work ........89
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and Off
........................................................................89
Splitgate
Opening and Closing the Splitgate ..........90
Opening the Open on Approach Splitgate
........................................................................92
Open on Approach Settings .......................92
Splitgate Settings ..........................................92
Opening and Closing the Liftgate .............92
2
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Liftgate Settings .............................................95
Opening and Closing the Tailgate ............95
Splitgate – Troubleshooting .......................96
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ...........................98
Anti-Theft Alarm System ..............................98
Security – Troubleshooting .........................99
Power Running Boards
Power Running Board Precautions ..........101
Power Running Board Settings .................101
Power Running Boards – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................102
Steering Wheel
Using the Controls on the Steering Wheel
.......................................................................104
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................105
Resetting the Stopping Position ...............105
Horn .................................................................106
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On
and Off - Vehicles With: Heated Steering
Wheel ..........................................................106
Adjustable Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ...................................107
Wipers and Washers
Wipers .............................................................108
Autowipers .....................................................108
Switching the Rear Window Wiper On and
Off ................................................................109
Reverse Wipe ................................................109
Checking the Wiper Blades ......................109
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ............110
Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades .............110
Washers ............................................................111
Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting
........................................................................113
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lighting Control .............................114
Headlamps ......................................................114
Headlamps – Troubleshooting ..................115
Autolamps .......................................................115
Exterior Lamps ...............................................116
Automatic High Beam Control ...................118
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting ........................................121
Adaptive Front Lighting ...............................121
Interior Lighting
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On and
Off ................................................................123
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and
Off ................................................................123
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and
Off ................................................................123
Interior Lamp Function ................................123
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness ..................................................123
Ambient Lighting ..........................................124
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting .........124
Windows
Opening and Closing the Windows ........125
Global Opening and Closing ....................126
Window Bounce-Back ................................126
Locking the Rear Window Controls .........127
3
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Interior Mirror
Interior Mirror Precautions .........................128
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror ....................128
Exterior Mirrors
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors ...................129
Folding the Exterior Mirrors .......................129
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror ...................130
Glass Roof
Opening and Closing the Sunshade ........131
Opening and Closing the Glass Roof .......131
Venting the Glass Roof ...............................132
Glass Roof Bounce-Back ............................132
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Overview ....................134
Tachometer ....................................................135
Speedometer ................................................135
Fuel Gauge ....................................................135
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ......135
Trip Computer
Accessing the Trip Computer ...................136
Resetting the Trip Computer .....................136
Remote Start
Using Remote Start ......................................137
Remote Start Settings ..................................137
Climate Control
Identifying the Climate Control Unit ........138
Switching Climate Control On and Off
.......................................................................138
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.......................................................................138
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.......................................................................138
Switching Defrost On and Off ...................138
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.......................................................................138
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.......................................................................139
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ........................................................139
Setting the Blower Motor Speed .............139
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.......................................................................139
Setting the Temperature ............................139
Directing the Flow of Air ............................140
Locking the Rear Passenger Climate
Controls .......................................................141
Auto Mode ......................................................141
Climate Control Hints ..................................142
Air Conditioning System Refrigerant .......143
Rear Passenger Climate Control
Identifying the Rear Passenger Climate
Control Unit ...............................................145
Switching the Rear Passenger Climate
Controls On and Off ................................145
Setting the Blower Motor Speed .............145
Setting the Temperature ............................146
Directing the Flow of Air ............................146
Rear Auto Mode ...........................................146
Rear Passenger Climate Control Indicators
.......................................................................146
4
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Interior Air Quality
What Is the Cabin Air Filter ........................147
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ...................147
Auto Air Refresh ............................................147
Digital Scent ..................................................149
Interior Air Quality – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................150
Rejuvenate
Using Rejuvenate ..........................................151
Front Seats
Front Seat Precautions ...............................153
Sitting in the Correct Position ...................153
Power Seats ...................................................154
Massage Seats .............................................158
Heated Seats ................................................158
Ventilated Seats ...........................................159
Rear Seats
Manual Seats ..................................................161
Power Seats ..................................................166
Massage Seats ..............................................172
Heated Seats .................................................173
Ventilated Seats ............................................174
Rear Occupant Alert System
What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.......................................................................175
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert System
Work ............................................................175
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.......................................................................175
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
.......................................................................175
Rear Occupant Alert System Settings
.......................................................................176
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
.......................................................................176
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings .....................................................177
Garage Door Opener
Garage Door Opener Introduction ..........178
Garage Door Opener Precautions and
Frequencies ...............................................178
Programming the Garage Door Opener
.......................................................................179
USB Ports
Locating the USB Ports ...............................183
Playing Media Using the USB Port ..........183
Charging a Device .......................................184
Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
120V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ...........................185
Power Outlet Precautions ..........................185
Power Outlet Limitations ............................185
Locating the Power Outlets .......................185
Power Outlet Indicators ..............................186
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V
Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet ...........................187
Power Outlet Precautions ..........................187
Locating the Power Outlets .......................187
Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
.......................................................................188
5
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
.......................................................................188
Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger
.......................................................................188
Charging a Wireless Device ......................189
Storage
Overhead Storage .......................................190
Glove Compartment ....................................190
Center Console ............................................190
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Precautions ................................................191
Push Button Ignition Switch .......................191
Starting the Engine ......................................192
Engine Block Heater ...................................192
Stopping the Engine ....................................194
Automatic Engine Stop ...............................194
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position .......................................................195
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting .......................................196
Auto-Start-Stop
What Is Auto-Start-Stop .............................200
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions ....................200
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off
......................................................................200
Stopping the Engine ..................................200
Restarting the Engine ................................200
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators ........................200
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting .........201
Fuel and Refueling
Fuel and Refueling Precautions ..............203
Fuel Quality ..................................................204
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel ................204
Running Out of Fuel ...................................205
Refueling .......................................................206
Fuel Tank Capacity .....................................208
Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting
......................................................................209
Catalytic Converter
What Is the Catalytic Converter ...............210
Catalytic Converter Precautions ..............210
Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting
........................................................................211
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission Positions ...........212
Manually Shifting Gears ..............................213
Temporary Neutral Mode ...........................214
Automatic Return to Park (P) .....................215
Shifting Your Immobile Vehicle Out of Park
(P) .................................................................216
Automatic Transmission Audible Warnings
.......................................................................217
Using Progressive Range Selection ........217
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
and Specification .....................................217
Four-Wheel Drive
How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work .........219
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions .................219
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations ..................220
Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode .......221
Four-Wheel Drive Modes ...........................221
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators ....................222
6
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification .............................................223
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting .....224
Front Axle
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and Specification
......................................................................226
Rear Axle
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Specification
......................................................................227
Brakes
Brake Precautions ......................................228
Anti-Lock Braking System .........................228
Brake Over Accelerator ............................228
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir ........228
Checking the Brake Fluid .........................228
Brake Fluid Specification ..........................229
Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................230
Electric Parking Brake
What Is the Electric Parking Brake .........232
Applying the Electric Parking Brake .......232
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency ...............................................232
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake ..........................................................232
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake ..........................................233
Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning
......................................................................233
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of Charge
......................................................................233
Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting
......................................................................233
Reverse Brake Assist
What Is Reverse Brake Assist ..................235
How Does Reverse Brake Assist Work
......................................................................235
Reverse Brake Assist Precautions ..........235
Switching Reverse Brake Assist On and
Off ...............................................................236
Overriding Reverse Brake Assist ............236
Reverse Brake Assist Indicators ..............236
Reverse Brake Assist – Troubleshooting
......................................................................237
Hill Start Assist
What Is Hill Start Assist ..............................239
How Does Hill Start Assist Work .............239
Hill Start Assist Precautions .....................239
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting .........239
Auto Hold
How Does Auto Hold Work ......................240
Switching Auto Hold On and Off ............240
Using Auto Hold ..........................................240
Auto Hold Indicators ...................................241
Traction Control
What Is Traction Control ............................242
How Does Traction Control Work ...........242
Switching Traction Control On and Off
......................................................................242
Traction Control Indicator .........................242
Traction Control – Troubleshooting .......242
Stability Control
How Does Stability Control Work ...........243
7
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Switching Stability Control On and Off
......................................................................244
Stability Control Indicator ..........................245
Hill Descent Control
What Is Hill Descent Control ....................246
How Does Hill Descent Control Work
......................................................................246
Hill Descent Control Precautions ............246
Switching Hill Descent Control On and Off
......................................................................246
Setting the Hill Descent Speed ...............246
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..................247
Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting
......................................................................247
Steering
Electric Power Steering .............................248
Steering – Troubleshooting ......................249
Parking Aids
Parking Aid Precautions .............................251
Switching Parking Aid On and Off ..........252
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................252
Front Parking Aid ........................................253
Parking Aid Indicators ................................254
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting ..............255
Rear View Camera
What Is the Rear View Camera ...............256
Rear View Camera Precautions ..............256
Locating the Rear View Camera .............256
Rear View Camera Guide Lines ..............257
Rear View Camera Settings ......................257
360 Degree Camera
What Is the 360 Degree Camera ............259
How Does the 360 Degree Camera Work
......................................................................259
360 Degree Camera Precautions ..........259
360 Degree Camera Limitations ............260
Locating the 360 Degree Cameras .......260
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines ..........260
360 Degree Camera Settings ..................261
Adaptive Cruise Control
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work ..................................264
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions .....264
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations ......265
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and
Off ...............................................................267
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic
Cancellation .............................................268
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed
......................................................................268
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
......................................................................269
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................270
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................270
Overriding the Set Speed .........................272
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators ........273
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control .....................................273
Lane Centering ............................................273
Lane Centering – Troubleshooting ........276
Predictive Speed Assist .............................278
Predictive Speed Assist – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................281
8
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Adaptive Cruise Control – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................281
Lincoln BlueCruise
What Is BlueCruise .....................................283
How Does BlueCruise Work .....................283
BlueCruise Precautions .............................284
BlueCruise Requirements .........................285
BlueCruise Limitations ...............................286
BlueCruise Settings ....................................286
Switching BlueCruise On and Off ...........286
BlueCruise Alerts .........................................287
BlueCruise Automatic Cancellation ........287
BlueCruise Indicators .................................288
Lane Change Assist ...................................289
Lane Change Assist – Troubleshooting
......................................................................290
In-Lane Repositioning .................................291
BlueCruise – Troubleshooting .................292
Drive Mode Control
What Is Drive Mode Control .....................294
How Does Drive Mode Control Work .....294
Selecting a Drive Mode .............................294
Drive Modes .................................................294
Drive Mode Control – Troubleshooting
......................................................................296
Lane Keeping System
What Is the Lane Keeping System ..........299
How Does the Lane Keeping System Work
......................................................................299
Lane Keeping System Precautions ........299
Lane Keeping System Limitations ..........300
Switching the Lane Keeping System On
and Off .......................................................300
Switching the Lane Keeping System Mode
.......................................................................301
Lane Keeping System Settings .................301
Alert Mode .....................................................301
Aid Mode ........................................................301
Alert and Aid Mode ....................................302
Lane Keeping System Indicators ............302
Blind Spot Assist .........................................303
Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Coverage
......................................................................304
Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting
......................................................................308
Blind Spot Information System
What Is Blind Spot Information System
.......................................................................310
How Does Blind Spot Information System
Work ............................................................310
Blind Spot Information System Precautions
.......................................................................310
Blind Spot Information System Limitations
.......................................................................310
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements .............................................311
Switching Blind Spot Information System
On and Off ..................................................311
Locating the Blind Spot Information System
Sensors ........................................................311
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage ...................................................312
Blind Spot Information System Indicators
.......................................................................313
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting .......................................314
9
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Exit Warning
What is Exit Warning ....................................316
How Does Exit Warning Work ...................316
Exit Warning Precautions ...........................316
Exit Warning Limitations .............................317
Exit Warning Indicators ...............................317
Switching Exit Warning On and Off .........318
Locating the Exit Warning Sensors ..........318
Exit Warning – Troubleshooting ...............318
Cross Traffic Alert
What Is Cross Traffic Alert ........................320
How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work ........320
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions ................320
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations ..................322
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off
......................................................................322
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors
......................................................................322
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators ....................323
Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting
......................................................................324
Pre-Collision Assist
What Is Pre-Collision Assist ......................325
How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work ......325
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions .............325
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations ................327
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and Off
......................................................................328
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors
......................................................................329
Forward Collision Warning .......................329
Automatic Emergency Braking ................330
Evasive Steering Assist .............................330
Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................331
Speed Sign Recognition
What Is Speed Sign Recognition .............333
How Does Speed Sign Recognition Work
......................................................................333
Speed Sign Recognition Precautions .....333
Speed Sign Recognition Limitations ......333
Speed Sign Recognition Indicators ........334
Speed Sign Recognition Settings ...........334
Speed Sign Recognition – Troubleshooting
......................................................................335
Driver Alert
What Is Driver Alert .....................................337
How Does Driver Alert Work ....................337
Driver Alert Precautions .............................337
Driver Alert Limitations ..............................338
Switching Driver Alert On and Off ..........338
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting ................338
Load Carrying
Load Carrying Precautions .......................339
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels .................................340
What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating
......................................................................340
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
......................................................................340
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating .........................................................340
Calculating Payload .....................................341
Calculating the Load Limit .........................341
Roof Rack ......................................................342
10
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Luggage Compartment
Luggage Compartment Precautions ......344
Installing and Removing the Luggage
Compartment Cargo Net ......................344
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment Load
Floor ...........................................................345
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Divider ........................................................346
Luggage Compartment Anchor Points
......................................................................347
Connecting a Trailer
Connecting a Trailer Precautions ............348
Hitches ...........................................................348
Connecting a Trailer ...................................350
Trailer Lighting Check .................................351
Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting
......................................................................352
Towing a Trailer
Towing a Trailer Precautions ....................354
Trailer Brake Precautions ..........................354
Towing a Trailer Limitations ......................355
Loading Your Trailer ....................................355
Trailer Towing Hints ....................................355
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft .................................................356
Auto Tow/Haul ..............................................357
Towing Weights and Dimensions ............358
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting ........360
Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller
What Is the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller ..................................................362
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
Precautions ..............................................362
Using the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller ..................................................362
Adjusting the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller Mode ......................................364
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting ......................................365
Trailer Sway Control
How Does Trailer Sway Control Work
......................................................................367
Trailer Sway Control Precautions ............367
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and Off
......................................................................367
Trailer Hitching Assistance
What Is Trailer Hitching Assistance ........368
How Does Trailer Hitching Assistance
Work ...........................................................368
Trailer Hitching Assistance Precautions
......................................................................368
Trailer Hitching Assistance Limitations
......................................................................369
Switching Trailer Hitching Assistance On
and Off .......................................................370
Using Trailer Hitching Assistance ...........370
Trailer Hitching Assistance Indicators
.......................................................................371
Trailer Backup Assistance
What is Trailer Backup Assistance ..........372
How Does Trailer Backup Assistance Work
......................................................................372
Trailer Backup Assistance Precautions
......................................................................372
Setting Up the Trailer Backup Assistance
for a Conventional Trailer ......................373
11
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Switching Trailer Backup Assistance On
and Off .......................................................375
Using the Trailer Backup Assistance
Controller ..................................................376
Using the Trailer Backup Assistance Views
.......................................................................377
Trailer Backup Assistance –
Troubleshooting ......................................379
Trailer Reverse Guidance
What Is Trailer Reverse Guidance ...........385
How Does Trailer Reverse Guidance Work
......................................................................385
Trailer Reverse Guidance Precautions
......................................................................385
Setting Up Trailer Reverse Guidance for a
Conventional Trailer ...............................385
Switching Trailer Reverse Guidance On
and Off .......................................................388
Using Trailer Reverse Guidance Views
......................................................................388
Trailer Reverse Guidance –
Troubleshooting ......................................390
Driving Hints
Breaking-In ....................................................394
Driving Economically ..................................394
Driving in Cold Weather ............................394
Driving Through Mud and Water ............395
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain ..........395
Driving In Sand ............................................396
Driving Through Shallow Water ..............396
Floor Mats ......................................................397
Crash and Breakdown
Information
Roadside Assistance ..................................398
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Off
......................................................................399
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................400
Post-Crash Alert System ...........................402
Post-Collision Braking ................................403
Automatic Crash Shutoff ...........................403
Recovery Towing .........................................404
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................405
Fail-Safe Cooling .........................................406
Towing Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions ...........408
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle .......408
Emergency Towing ......................................410
Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................410
Fuses
Fuse Precautions ...........................................411
Under Hood Fuse Box .................................411
Interior Fuse Box ..........................................417
Identifying Fuse Types ...............................422
Fuses – Troubleshooting ..........................422
Maintenance
Maintenance Precautions .........................423
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............423
Under Hood Overview ...............................424
Engine Oil ......................................................426
Engine Air Filter ...........................................430
Coolant ............................................................431
Changing the Fuel Filter ............................436
Drive Belt Routing Overview ....................436
12
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
12V Battery ....................................................436
12V Battery – Troubleshooting ................439
Adjusting the Headlamps ...........................441
Exterior Bulbs ...............................................443
Interior Bulbs ................................................443
Vehicle Specifications
Engine Specifications .................................444
Motorcraft Parts ...........................................445
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Products .......................................446
Cleaning the Exterior ..................................447
Cleaning the Interior ...................................449
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .................451
Waxing Your Vehicle ....................................451
Storing Your Vehicle
Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage ........452
Removing Your Vehicle From Storage
......................................................................453
Wheel and Tire Information
Locating the Tire label ...............................454
Department of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades .........................................454
Information on the Tire Sidewall .............455
Glossary of Tire Terminology ...................460
Tire Replacement Requirements .............461
Using Snow Chains .....................................463
Tire Care
Checking the Tire Pressures ....................466
Inflating the Tires ........................................466
Inspecting the Tire for Wear .....................467
Inspecting the Tire for Damage ...............467
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems ..........471
Tire Rotation ..................................................471
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .......................................................473
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Overview
......................................................................473
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Precautions ...............................................474
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Limitations .................................................475
Viewing the Tire Pressures .......................475
Resetting Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................................................475
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting ......................................476
Changing a Road Wheel
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................479
Wheel Nuts ...................................................485
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number ..................487
Connected Vehicle
What Is a Connected Vehicle ...................488
Connected Vehicle Requirements ..........488
Connected Vehicle Limitations ................488
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................488
13
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network
......................................................................488
Connected Vehicle Settings .....................489
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting
......................................................................489
Vehicle Hotspot
Setting Up a Vehicle Hotspot ..................492
Vehicle Hotspot Settings ..........................492
Vehicle Hotspot – Troubleshooting .......493
Audio System
Audio System Precautions ........................494
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off .....494
Selecting the Audio Source .....................494
Media Control Buttons ...............................494
Adjusting the Volume .................................495
Setting a Memory Preset ..........................495
Locking the Rear Passenger Audio
Controls .....................................................495
Adjusting the Sound Settings ..................495
Setting the Clock and Date ......................495
AM/FM Radio ................................................496
Digital Radio .................................................496
Satellite Radio ..............................................498
Audio System – Troubleshooting ...........500
Rear Passenger Audio Controls
Identifying the Rear Passenger Audio
Controls .....................................................504
Switching the Rear Passenger Audio
Controls On and Off ...............................504
Selecting the Audio Source .....................504
Playing and Pausing the Audio Source
......................................................................504
Adjusting the Volume ................................504
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off ......504
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off ......504
Changing the Radio Station .....................504
Center Display
Center Display Overview ..........................505
Status Bar ......................................................505
Apps ...............................................................506
Controls .........................................................506
Customizing the Instrument Panel Display
......................................................................507
Settings ..........................................................507
Rebooting the Displays .............................507
Voice Interaction
What is Voice Interaction ..........................508
Setting Your Default Assistant .................508
Alexa Built-In ................................................508
Google Assistant .........................................509
Phone
Phone Precautions .......................................511
Connecting Your Phone ..............................511
Phone Menu ...................................................511
Making and Receiving a Phone Call .......513
Sending and Receiving a Text Message
.......................................................................515
Switching Text Message Notification On
and Off ........................................................516
Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off ......516
Switching Android Auto™ On and Off ......516
Bluetooth®
Connecting a Bluetooth® Device .............518
14
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
Playing Media Using Bluetooth® ..............518
Personal Profiles
How Do Personal Profiles Work ...............519
Enabling or Disabling Personal Profiles
.......................................................................519
Creating a Personal Profile ........................519
Using the Memory Function ......................519
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Remote Control ...................................520
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Device ....................................................520
Navigation
Connected Navigation ................................521
Vehicle Software Updates
Vehicle Software Updates ........................522
Software Update Settings ........................522
Software Update Indicators .....................523
Vehicle System Reset
Performing a System Reset ......................524
Accessories
Accessories ..................................................525
Lincoln Protect
What Is Lincoln Protect ..............................527
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance ...........................530
General Maintenance Information ..........534
Customer Information
Rollover Warning .........................................539
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program - United States of America
......................................................................539
The Mediation and Arbitration Program -
Canada ......................................................540
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States ..........................................................541
Reporting Safety Defects in Canada .......541
Radio Frequency Certification Labels
......................................................................542
Perchlorate ...................................................609
Replacement Parts Recommendation
......................................................................609
Mobile Communications Equipment .......610
Federal Highway Administration
Regulation .................................................610
Emission Law - United States of America
........................................................................611
Export Unique Options ...............................612
Warranty Information ...................................612
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .................615
15
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Table of Contents
16
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
If you require assistance or clarification on
policies or procedures, please contact the
customer relationship center.
United States
Lincoln
Lincoln Concierge
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone
service provider)
www.owner.lincoln.com
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
- US Only
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
For assistance call 1-888-498-8801, or for
more information about Lincoln Automotive
Financial Services and access to an account
manager, visit www.lincoln.com/finance.
Canada
Lincoln
Customer Relationship Centre
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
1-800-387-9333
TDD for the hearing impaired:
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone
service provider)
www.lincolncanada.com
Australia
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
Private Mail Bag 5
Fairlane Business Park #3
Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061
Telephone: 13 3673 (FORD)
E-mail: [email protected]
New Zealand
Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
Private Bag 76912
Manukau City 2241
Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ)
E-mail: [email protected]
China
Customer Relationship Center
Telephone: 400-988-6789
Email: [email protected]
Wechat Account: Lincoln_in_China
Weibo Account: Lincoln China
Asia Pacific
E-mail: [email protected]
17
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Contacting Us
Caribbean, Central America and Israel
Ford Motor Company
Ford Export Operations
Attention: Owner Relations
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, MI 48101
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
E-mail: [email protected]
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico
Ford Motor Company
Ford Export Operations
Attention: Owner Relations
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, MI 48101
Telephone: (800) 841-3673
E-mail: [email protected]
Chile
Ford Customer Service
Telephone: 800-470-408
Argentina
Telephone: 0800-888-3673
Brazil
www.ford.com.br
North Africa
E-mail: [email protected]
Sub-Saharan Africa
E-mail: [email protected]
Puerto Rico
Ford International Business Development,
Inc.
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, PR 00922-1957
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
Fax: (313) 390-0804
E-mail: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
Middle East
Ford Middle East Customer Relationship
Center
P.O. Box 21740
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: 80004441066
Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
Arabia: 800850078
Kuwait: 22280384
Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965 1
898900
Fax: +971 4 3327266
E-mail: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
South Korea
Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003
E-mail: [email protected]
18
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Contacting Us
ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: You risk death, fire, or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol.
Thank you for choosing. We recommend
that you take some time to get to know your
vehicle in order to benefit from greater safety
and pleasure from driving it. Use this
publication, whether in-vehicle, print, in
Lincoln mobile app or online, to familiarize
yourself with the features on your vehicle.
Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line
with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on all printed owner’ s information
when selling this vehicle.
Features and Options
This publication describes product features
and options available throughout the range
of available models, sometimes even before
they are generally available. It may describe
options that are not available on the vehicle
you have bought.
Providing Feedback
If you would like to provide feedback to the
Owner's Manual team, please email us at
OWNERMANU[email protected].
You will not receive a direct email response.
Your submission will be investigated and
necessary changes will be made to the
Owner's Manual content.
To help investigate your submission, please
include the following information:
• Your vehicle model
• The country in which your vehicle was
purchased
• The Owner's Manual section needing
investigation
Illustrations
Some of the illustrations in this manual could
show features as used in different models,
some can appear different to you on your
vehicle.
Location of Components
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
19
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Introduction
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
Accessing the Digital Owner's Manual
Landscape Center Display Screen
Depending on your vehicle, the Owner's
Manual application is located in either the
Apps list or the Features list.
1. Press Apps or Features on the
touchscreen.
Note: Some vehicles have the Apps or
Features buttons on the home screen. Not
all vehicles have a Features button.
2. Select the Owner's Manual application.
Accessing the Online and Printed
Owner's Manual
Online Owner's Manual
• Through your device's app store, you can
download the Lincoln mobile app.
• You can visit the local Ford Website.
Note: To find the local Ford website, visit
https://corporate.ford.com/operations/
locations/global-links.html.
Note: We strongly recommend downloading
a copy of the Owner's Manual and having it
with you whenever you drive, and to view
the information if you are unable to be inside
the vehicle.
Printed Owner's Manual
In U.S. and Canada, visit www.helminc.com
or see an authorized dealer.
In Europe, visit www.z-order.de or see an
authorized dealer.
For all other Countries, see your authorized
dealer.
USING THIS PUBLICATION
To quickly locate information about your
vehicle, use the word search within the
Owner's Manual application.
20
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Introduction
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR
VEHICLE
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
E67017
Airbag
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
E67020
Anti-lock braking system
E139220
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
E67021
Battery
E139227
Battery acid
Blower motor
E139209
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
E67024
Brake system
E270480
Brake system
E139223
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
E139211
Child seat lower anchor
E141128
Child seat tether anchor
E332905
Cruise control
E139219
Do not open when hot
E139212
Electric Parking brake
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
E103308
Engine coolant temperature
E67022
Engine oil
E139221
Explosive gas
E139228
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
Front fog lamps
21
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Symbols Glossary
Fuel pump reset
E139214
Fuse compartment
E75790
Hazard flashers
E67019
Headlamp high beams
E270968
Headlamps on
Heated rear window
E163171
Hill descent control
E270945
Horn control
Interior luggage compartment
release
E139231
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low fuel level
E139232
Low tire pressure warning
E139229
Maintain correct fluid level
E67028
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
E72343
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
E71341
Parking lamps
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Power steering fluid
E139216
Power windows front/rear
E139225
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
E65963
Safety alert
E72021
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Side airbag
22
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Symbols Glossary
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E130458
Stability control off
E332910
Trail control
E67018
Turn Signal
E73953
Windshield defrosting system
E270969
Windshield wiping system
E270967
Windshield wash and wipe
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Depending on your vehicle options, market,
and instrument cluster type, not all symbols
shown are available.
Lighting and Signaling
E67019
High beams. See Headlamp
Indicators (page 115).
E389529
Auto high beams. See Switching
Automatic High Beam Control On
and Off (page 120).
E67040
Rear fog lamps - China.
Turn signal - right. See Using the
Turn Signal Lamps (page 116).
Turn signal - left. See Using the
Turn Signal Lamps (page 116).
E71341
Positioning/side lights. See
Headlamp Indicators (page 115).
E181350
Exterior bulb failure. See Exterior
Bulb Specification Chart (page
443).
Brakes
E67024
Brake failure. See Brakes –
Warning Lamps (page 230). See
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps (page 233).
E270480
Brake failure. See Brakes –
Warning Lamps (page 230). See
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps (page 233).
E146190
Electric parking brake fault. See
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps (page 233).
E67020
Anti-lock brake system
malfunction. See Brakes –
Warning Lamps (page 230).
E323448
Automatic brake hold. See Auto
Hold Indicators (page 241).
23
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Symbols Glossary
E323449
Automatic brake hold off or
unavailable. See Auto Hold
Indicators (page 241).
Visibility
E132353
Windshield washer fluid level. See
Wipers and Washers – Warning
Lamps (page 113).
Climate and Comfort
Engine
E67028
Check engine. See Catalytic
Converter – Warning Lamps (page
211). See Starting and Stopping
the Engine – Warning Lamps (page 196).
See Coolant – Warning Lamps (page 435).
See Emission Law (page 611).
E67022
Engine oil pressure.
E103308
Engine coolant temperature. See
Catalytic Converter – Warning
Lamps (page 211). See Coolant –
Warning Lamps (page 435).
E121377
Auto Start/Stop. See
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators (page
200).
E146361
Auto Start/Stop off or unavailable.
See Auto-Start-Stop Indicators
(page 200).
Fuel
E422624
Fuel. See Fuel and Refueling –
Warning Lamps (page 209).
Transmission
E415072
Non-emission powertrain fault. See
Starting and Stopping the Engine
– Warning Lamps (page 196). See
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning Lamps (page
224).
Vehicle Handling
E225310
Selectable drive mode - normal.
See Normal (page 295). See
Normal 4A (page 295).
E295413
Selectable drive mode - conserve.
See Conserve (page 294).
E295414
Selectable drive mode - slippery.
See Slippery (page 296).
E295420
Selectable drive mode - deep
conditions. See Deep Conditions
(page 295).
E392863
Selectable drive mode - excite.
See Excite (page 295).
E422970
Selectable drive mode - slow climb.
See Slow Climb (page 296).
E415073
Steering system fault. See Steering
– Warning Lamps (page 249).
E181778
Two-wheel drive high. See
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (page
222).
E181781
Four-wheel drive auto. See
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (page
222).
E181779
Four-wheel drive high. See
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (page
222).
24
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Symbols Glossary
E181780
Four-wheel drive low. See
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (page
222).
Driver Assistance
E402396
Cruise control. See Switching
From Adaptive Cruise Control to
Cruise Control (page 273).
E402315
Adaptive cruise control. See
Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicators (page 273). See
Switching BlueCruise On and Off (page 286).
E415120
Hill descent control. See Hill
Descent Control Indicator (page
247).
E308131
Lane keeping assist. See
Switching BlueCruise On and Off
(page 286).
E297977
Lane centering assist. See Lane
Centering Indicators (page 276).
See BlueCruise Indicators (page
288).
Safety
E71880
Seatbelt. See Seatbelt Reminder
Indicators (page 54). See
Seatbelt Precautions (page 50).
E67017
Airbag. See How Does the Safety
Canopy™ Work (page 60). See
How Does the Front Passenger
Sensing System Work (page 63). See
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
67). See Seatbelt Precautions (page 50).
E411393
Stability control system active or
not available. See Traction Control
– Warning Lamps (page 242). See
Stability Control Indicator (page 245). See
Post-Collision Braking (page 403).
E411501
Stability control system off. See
Traction Control – Warning
Lamps (page 242). See Drive
Mode Control – Warning Lamps (page 296).
E139232
Tire failure/Low tire pressure. See
What Is the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 473).
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Warning Lamps (page 476).
E415138
Forward collision warning system.
See How Does Pre-Collision
Assist Work (page 325).
E414546
Blind spot information system off
or unavailable. See Blind Spot
Information System Indicators
(page 313).
E335612
Forward collision warning system
off or unavailable. See
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning
Lamps (page 331).
E249859
Door(s) ajar. See Doors and Locks
– Warning Lamps (page 82).
Security
E246598
Hood release/ajar. See Opening
and Closing the Hood (page 423).
E415173
Liftglass release/ajar. See
Splitgate – Warning Lamps (page
96).
E397136
Liftgate release/ajar. See Splitgate
– Warning Lamps (page 96).
25
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Symbols Glossary
E416263
Liftgate and tailgate release. See
Splitgate – Warning Lamps (page
96).
Electrical Systems
E67021
Battery charge level. See Catalytic
Converter – Warning Lamps (page
211). See 12V Battery – Warning
Lamps (page 439).
26
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Symbols Glossary
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
We respect your privacy and are committed
to protecting it. The information contained
in this publication was correct at the time of
release, but as technology rapidly changes,
we recommend that you visit the local
Lincoln website for the latest information.
Your vehicle has electronic control units that
have data recording functionality and the
ability to permanently or temporarily store
data. This data could include information on
the condition and status of your vehicle,
vehicle maintenance requirements, events
and malfunctions. The types of data that can
be recorded are described in this section.
Some of the data recorded is stored in event
logs or error logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or through
a legal process. Such information could be
used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system components,
for example fuel level, tire pressure and
battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt status.
• Events or errors in essential systems, for
example headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in combination
with other information, for example an
accident report, damage to a vehicle or
eyewitness statements, could be associated
with a specific person.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this data
through a dedicated, protected connection.
We only collect and use data to enable your
use of our services to which you have
subscribed, with your consent or where
permitted by law. For additional information,
see the terms and conditions of the services
to which you have subscribed.
For additional information about our privacy
policy, refer to the local Lincoln website.
27
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Data Privacy
Services That Third Parties Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy information
for any services equipped with your vehicle
or to which you subscribe. We take no
responsibility for services that third parties
provide.
Where equipped, SiriusXM with 360L may
use the modem. To disable, turn off the
SiriusXM with 360L or Vehicle Connectivity
setting. See Enabling and Disabling the
Modem (page 488).
Note: Consistent with your data and
connectivity settings, data may be accessed
by third parties.
SERVICE DATA
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada in Canada), and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted
by law, use vehicle diagnostic information
for vehicle improvement or with other
information we may have about you, for
example, your contact information, to offer
you products or services that may interest
you. Data may be provided to our service
providers such as part suppliers that may
help diagnose malfunctions, and who are
similarly obligated to protect data. We retain
this data only as long as necessary to
perform these functions or to comply with
law. We may provide information where
required in response to official requests to
law enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with lawful
authority or court order, and such information
may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S.
only (if equipped), if you choose to use
connected apps and services, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used to provide services to you,
personalizing your experience, troubleshoot,
and to improve products and services and
offer you products and services that may
interest you, where permitted by law. For
Canada only, for more information, please
review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage
and use of service providers in other
jurisdictions who may be subject to legal
requirements in Canada, the United States
and other countries applicable to them, for
example, lawful requirements to disclose
personal information to governmental
authorities in those countries.
28
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Data Privacy
EVENT DATA
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event data
recorder is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this
data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The event data
recorder is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for
a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
seatbelts were buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (for example name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder.
BlueCruise Data (If Equipped)
If BlueCruise is active in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, the
system may record driver attentiveness,
based on the direction of eyes and duration,
and photographs of the driver seat area.
Note: No data is recorded under normal
driving conditions.
SETTINGS DATA
Your vehicle has electronic control units that
have the ability to store data based on your
personalized settings. The data is stored
locally in the vehicle or on devices that you
connect to it, for example, a USB drive or
mobile device. You can delete some of this
data and also choose whether to share it
through the services to which you subscribe.
See Settings (page 507).
29
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Data Privacy
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
The modem has a SIM. The modem was
enabled when your vehicle was built and
periodically sends messages to stay
connected to the cell phone network, receive
automatic software updates and send
vehicle-related information to us, for example
diagnostic information. These messages
could include information that identifies your
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
additional information, for example cell
phone network tower identification. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.ConnectedLincoln.com or
refer to your local Lincoln website.
Note: The modem may continue to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle data
by changing the connectivity settings. See
Connected Vehicle (page 488).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has
connectivity technology, visit
www.ConnectedLincoln.com.
MOBILE DEVICE DATA
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can grant apps
permission to access your connected vehicle
information with mobile apps on your device
through the system.
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes, for example, the vehicle
identification number of your vehicle, the
operating system module serial number,
odometer, enabled apps, usage statistics
and debugging information. We retain it only
as long as necessary to provide the service,
to troubleshoot, for continuous improvement
and to offer you products and services that
may be of interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
30
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Data Privacy
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to that
cell phone. The cell phone profile enables
more mobile features and efficient operation.
The profile contains, for example data from
your phonebook, read and unread text
messages and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device. If
you no longer plan to use the system or your
vehicle, we recommend you use the
applicable reset function to erase the stored
information. See Performing a System
Reset (page 524).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our privacy
policy, refer to the local Lincoln website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has
connectivity technology, visit
www.ConnectedLincoln.com.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to the emergency call system may
also be capable of electronically or verbally
disclosing to emergency services operators
your vehicle location or other details about
your vehicle or crash to assist emergency
services operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the emergency call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency call
systems that are required by law.
31
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Data Privacy
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
Sustainability is a priority at Ford. We are
constantly looking for ways to reduce our
impact on the planet while providing
customers with great products and delivering
a strong business. You should play your part
in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal
of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials
are significant steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
32
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Environment
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
E416709
A B C D E F
G
HK IJ
33
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Visual Search
See Folding the Exterior Mirrors (page 129).A
See Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and Off (page 267).B
See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 134).C
See Using the Controls on the Steering Wheel (page 104).D
See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 153).E
See Opening the Glove Compartment (page 190).F
G
See Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Off (page 399).H
See Manually Shifting Gears (page 213).I
See Opening and Closing the Sunshade (page 131).J
See Opening and Closing the Splitgate (page 90).K
34
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Visual Search
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
E416710
A
H
G
F
E
B
C
D
35
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Visual Search
See Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Remote Control (page 80).A
See Changing a Flat Tire (page 479).B
See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 260).C
See Locating the Rear Parking Aid Sensors (page 252).D
See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 423).E
See Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors (page 329).F
See Folding the Exterior Mirrors (page 129).G
See Using the High Beam Headlamps (page 114).H
36
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Visual Search
CHILD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or animals
to these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
37
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books
or towels to boost your child's height.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When installing a child restraint with
seatbelts:
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the child restraint, with
the tongue between the child restraint
and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode.
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR POINTS
WHAT ARE THE CHILD RESTRAINT
ANCHOR POINTS
Anchor points allow you to quickly and safely
install a child restraint.
LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT
LOWER ANCHOR POINTS
Second Row Bench Seat
38
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
E347175
Second Row Bucket Seats
E347230
LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT
TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINTS
Second Row Bench Seat
E347177
Second Row Bucket Seats
E347235
CHILD RESTRAINTS
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITION
INFORMATION
Install the child restraint tightly against the
vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint.
39
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
Rear Facing Child Restraints
Seatbelt OnlyLATCH (Lower Anchors Only)Combined Weight of Child and Child Restraint
XXUp to 65 lb (29 kg)
XOver 65 lb (29 kg)
Forward Facing Child Restraints
Seatbelt and LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Top Tether Anchor)
Seatbelt and Top Tether AnchorLATCH (Lower Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
Combined Weight of Child and Child
Restraint
XXXUp to 65 lb (29 kg)
XXOver 65 lb (29 kg)
40
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
CHILD RESTRAINTS RECOMMENDATION
Recommended Restraint TypeChild Size, Height, Weight, or Age
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an infant carrier,
convertible seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger).
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt snug and low
across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the
shoulder and chest, and seat backrest upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
You are required by law to properly use child
restraints for infants and toddlers in the
United States, Canada and Mexico.
Many states and provinces require that small
children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children in
your vehicle.
When possible, properly restrain children 12
years of age and under in a rear seating
position of your vehicle. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than
in a front seating position.
When installing a rear facing child restraint,
adjust the vehicle seats to avoid interference
between the child restraint and the vehicle
seat in front of the child restraint.
41
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
USING SEATBELTS
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated
is a forward facing child restraint, the steps
are the same for installing a rear facing child
restraint.
Perform the following steps when installing
a child restraint with seatbelts.
1. Position the child restraint in a seat with
a seatbelt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you did not twist
the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for that seating position until the
latch engages. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
42
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until you
pull all of the seatbelt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The seatbelt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should not
be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that exists once you add the extra weight
of the child to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness of
the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle helps to remove remaining slack
from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place.
43
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
USING LOWER ANCHORS AND
TETHERS FOR CHILDREN
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) system has three vehicle anchor
points:
• Two lower anchors where the vehicle
seat backrest and seat cushion meet,
called the seat bight.
• One top tether anchor behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have two
rigid or webbing mounted attachments.
These attachments connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need to
use seatbelts to attach the child restraint.
However, you can still use the seatbelt to
attach the child restraint if the lower anchors
are not used. For forward-facing child
restraints, you must also attach the top tether
strap to the proper top tether anchor if a top
tether strap has been provided with your
child restraint.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child restraints with tether
straps.
44
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
INSTALLING A CHILD RESTRAINT IN
A CENTER SEAT
WARNING: The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH lower
anchors for the center seating position
unless the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using
anchors spaced at least as far apart as
those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second-row rear seat are spaced 11 in
(280 mm) apart. The lower anchors at the
center of the third-row rear seats are spaced
19 in (488 mm) apart. The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center.
You cannot install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments at the third-row center
seating position. You can only use LATCH
compatible child restraints with attachments
on belt webbing at this seating position
provided that the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child restraint to any lower anchor if another
child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child restraint from side to side and
forward and back where it is secured to the
vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in
(2.5 cm).
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
COMBINING THE SEATBELT AND
LOWER ANCHORS FOR ATTACHING
CHILD RESTRAINTS
When used in combination, you may attach
either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if it is included with the child restraint.
USING TETHER STRAPS
Many forward-facing child restraints include
a tether strap which extends from the back
of the child restraint and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether anchor.
Tether straps are available as an accessory
for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap
if the tether strap on your child restraint does
not reach the appropriate top tether anchor
in the vehicle.
45
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor. The tether strap
may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether
anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH
attachments, do not tighten the tether strap
enough to lift the child restraint off the
vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated
in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping
the child restraint just touching the vehicle
seat gives the best protection in a severe
crash.
Once you have installed the child restraint
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
BOOSTER SEATS
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint and meet the
following criteria.
• Generally children who are less than
57 in (1.45 m) tall.
• Are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12).
• Are between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg).
Many state and provincial laws require that
children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight, a height of 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer yes to all of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat backrest with knees
bent comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
46
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head, as
measured at the tops of the ears, above the
top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position
with a higher seat backrest or head restraint
and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using
a high-back booster seat.
E70710
• High-back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high-back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder.
The following drawings compare the ideal
fit to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip
off the shoulder. The drawings also show
how the lap belt should be low and snug
across the child's hips.
47
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
48
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not use any item thicker than
this under the booster seat. Check with the
booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING: You cannot open the rear
doors from inside if you have put the child
safety locks on.
E249891
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of
each rear door and must be set separately
for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn it clockwise to switch the child lock on
and counterclockwise to switch it off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn it counterclockwise to switch the child
lock on and clockwise to switch it off.
Note: To make sure the child safety lock is
on, pull the inside door handle twice to verify
the door does not open.
Note: To open the rear doors from inside the
vehicle when the child lock is engaged, roll
down the rear window and use the outside
door handle. Or have someone outside the
vehicle open the door.
49
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Child Safety
SEATBELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be
properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may
be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine.
The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle should
properly wear their seatbelts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided.
50
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• A shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, except driver seatbelt.
• Height adjusters at the front outermost
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front row
and second row outermost seating
positions.
E71880
A seatbelt warning light and chime.
E67017
Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to
tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be activated
when the Safety Canopy is activated.
FASTENING AND UNFASTENING
THE SEATBELTS
All seatbelts in your vehicle are a three-point
combination lap and shoulder seatbelt.
E338014
B
A
Seatbelt tongue.A
Seatbelt buckle.B
1. Pull the seatbelt out steadily.
Note: It may lock if you pull it sharply or if
the vehicle is on a slope.
2. Insert the tongue into the buckle.
3. Pull the seatbelt tight to remove any
slack.
Unfastening the Seatbelts
1. Press the red button on the buckle to
release the seatbelt.
2. Hold the seatbelt tongue and let it retract
completely and smoothly to its stowed
position.
E275033
51
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
The retractor for the third row center seatbelt
is in the roof.
To fasten the seatbelt:
1. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if
you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on
a slope.
2. Insert the smaller tongue into the smaller
buckle to the left of the center seat.
3. Pull the larger tongue across the lap and
insert it into the buckle to the right of the
center seat.
Note: If in constant use, you can leave the
belt buckled in the smaller buckle. When it
is not in use, or when you fold or move the
rear seats, you should release the belt from
the smaller buckle. Using the tongue of the
adjacent seatbelt, press the red button on
the smaller buckle.
SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE
WHAT IS SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE
Sensitive locking mode is a seatbelt retractor
feature that allows shoulder belt length
adjustment according to your movements
and locking in response to vehicle
movement.
HOW DOES SENSITIVE LOCKING
MODE WORK
If the driver suddenly brakes, turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the seatbelts
lock to help reduce forward movement of
the driver and passengers.
In addition, the seatbelt retractor locks if you
pull the seatbelt webbing out too quickly. If
the retractor locks, slowly lower the height
adjuster to allow the seatbelt to retract.
If the retractor does not unlock, pull the
seatbelt out slowly then feed a small length
of webbing back toward the stowed position.
For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat
backrest or push the seat backrest cushion
away from the seatbelt. Feed a small length
of webbing back toward the stowed position.
AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC LOCKING
MODE
This feature keeps the seatbelts pre-locked.
The belt still retracts to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
WHEN TO USE AUTOMATIC LOCKING
MODE
Use this mode any time you install a child
restraint in the front passenger seating
position or any rear seating position. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in a
rear seat whenever possible.
Note: Automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
52
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
ENGAGING AUTOMATIC LOCKING
MODE
E142591
1. Fasten the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
DISENGAGING AUTOMATIC LOCKING
MODE
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive locking mode.
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELTS
DURING PREGNANCY
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low across
the hips below the belly and worn as tight
as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt
to cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
53
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
ADJUSTING THE SEATBELT
HEIGHT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the seatbelt correctly could
reduce its effectiveness and increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
E200161
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked
in place.
SEATBELT REMINDER
HOW DOES THE SEATBELT REMINDER
WORK
WARNING: The system will only
provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This feature provides an audible or visual
alert when you or an occupant unfastens a
seatbelt.
The alert remains on until:
• You open and close a door.
• You fasten the seatbelt for any seat that
is occupied.
• You switch the vehicle off and then on.
SEATBELT REMINDER INDICATORS
E71880
This lamp illuminates if you do not
fasten your seatbelt when you
switch the ignition on. The lamp
switches off when you fasten your seatbelt
or about one minute has elapsed.
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front passenger. This lamp
illuminates if you or your front passenger do
not fasten the seatbelt buckle and the
vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do not
place large objects on the front passenger
seat.
54
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
E421733
This warning displays if an occupant
unfastens the rear seatbelt buckle or it
becomes unfastened.
E419361
Seatbelt fastened.A
Seatbelt not fastened.B
Fault.C
Seatbelt recently unfastened.D
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display for
that seating position.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
SEATBELT REMINDER AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
A warning tone sounds if you do not fasten
your seatbelt when you switch the ignition
on. The tone switches off when you fasten
your seatbelt or about one minute elapses.
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front passenger. This warning tone
sounds if you or your front passenger do not
fasten the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle
speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
This tone also sounds if an occupant
unfastens the rear seatbelt buckle or it
becomes unfastened.
SWITCHING THE SEATBELT
REMINDER ON AND OFF
WARNING: While the system allows
you to deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch off independently. When
you perform this procedure for one seating
position and the other seat is occupied,
fasten the other seat.
Read Steps 1-4 before proceeding with the
programming procedure.
Make sure that:
• You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
55
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unfasten the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Start the engine.
2. Wait a short period of time until the
seatbelt warning light switches off. After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once you
start Step 3, complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, fasten then unfasten the seatbelt four
times at a moderate speed, ending in the
unfastened state. After each unfasten,
the seatbelt warning light switches on
and off with each fasten.
4. The seatbelt warning light flashes for
confirmation.
This switches the feature off for that seating
position if it is currently on.
This switches the feature on for that seating
position if it is currently off.
CHECKING THE SEATBELTS
Check the seatbelts and child restraints
periodically to make sure they work properly
and are not damaged. Make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
Check the following seatbelt assemblies after
a crash.
• Retractors.
• Buckles.
• Front seatbelt buckle assemblies.
• Shoulder belt height adjusters.
• Shoulder belt guide on seat backrest.
• Child restraint LATCH and tether anchors.
• Attaching hardware.
Read the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for additional inspection and
maintenance information specific to the child
restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies
in use in vehicles involved in a crash be
replaced. However, if the crash was minor
and an authorized dealer finds that the belts
do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use
during a crash should also be checked and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning
Seatbelts (page 451).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
56
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle, model
year and seating position. The use of an
extension intended for another vehicle,
model year or seating position may not
offer you the full protection of your
vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits across
the torso, over the lap or to make the
seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from our
dealers. Only use our seatbelt extensions
made by the original equipment seatbelt
manufacturer with our seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your vehicle restraint system.
57
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Seatbelts
WHAT IS THE PERSONAL SAFETY
SYSTEM
An advanced safety system that protects
occupants in frontal crashes.
HOW DOES THE PERSONAL
SAFETY SYSTEM WORK
This system provides an improved level of
frontal crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to reduce the risk
of airbag-related injuries. The system
analyzes occupant conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate
safety devices. During a crash, the restraints
control module may deploy the seatbelt
pretensioners, and one or both stages of the
dual-stage airbags based on crash severity
and occupant conditions.
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front
seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
58
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Personal Safety System™
HOW DO THE FRONT AIRBAGS
WORK
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 67).
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and right
front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
Contact with a deploying airbag may cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing
loss is also a possibility as a result of the
noise associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with
considerable force, there is the risk of death
or serious injuries such as fractures, facial
and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that occupants
be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
HOW DO THE SIDE AIRBAGS
WORK
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the front seat
backrests, or in areas that may come into
contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
59
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
airbags and the seatbelt from retracting
correctly which could increase the risk of
injuries in a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the front seat backrests. In certain
sideways crashes or rollovers, the airbags
inflate. The airbag was designed to inflate
between the door panel and occupant to
further enhance the protection provided to
occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that the vehicle has side
airbags.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with a readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 67).
HOW DOES THE SAFETY CANOPY™
WORK
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
The Safety Canopy deploys during significant
side crashes or when a certain likelihood of
a rollover event is detected by the rollover
sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to
the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. In certain
sideways crashes or rollover events, the
60
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless
of which seats are occupied. The Safety
Canopy inflates between the side window
area and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 67).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
AIRBAG PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
61
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
PROPERLY ADJUSTING THE
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER
SEATS
WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two
degrees from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat
backrest, and center themselves on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
62
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
CHILDREN AND AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a vehicle
without rear seats, properly restrain the child
in the center front seat unless doing so
would interfere with driving your vehicle. This
provides lap and shoulder belt protection for
all occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should have a
reduced risk to serious injury from the
airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WHAT IS THE FRONT PASSENGER
SENSING SYSTEM
This system detects a properly seated
occupant and determines if the front
passenger airbag should be enabled.
HOW DOES THE FRONT PASSENGER
SENSING SYSTEM WORK
The system uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which illuminates indicating that the
front passenger frontal airbag is either
enabled or disabled.
Note: When you first switch the ignition on,
the passenger airbag status indicator off and
on lamps illuminate for a short period to
confirm they are functional.
E181984
The indicator lamps are in the overhead
console.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable the front passenger
frontal airbag under these conditions:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
63
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
• A passenger takes their weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
Note: Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the off lamp.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp, switch your
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from your vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly seated occupant and determine if
the front passenger frontal airbag should be
enabled.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the on lamp.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator off lamp is illuminated, it is
possible that the person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to detect
that person and enable the passenger
frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains
illuminated even after this, you should
advise the person to ride in the rear seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit upright, leaning against
the seat backrest, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if an
occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest map
pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
64
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The listed conditions could cause the weight
of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat could appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions listed.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 67).
If the airbag readiness light is on, do the
following:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Switch your vehicle off.
• Check for any objects lodged underneath
the front passenger seat or cargo
interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction if found.
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that
the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
there may be a problem due to the front
passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle in for service
immediately.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact your Customer
Relationship Center. See Contacting Us
(page 17).
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place objects
under the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console. Failure to
follow this instruction may interfere with
the front passenger seat sensing system
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
65
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
WARNING: Check the passenger
airbag indicator lamp for proper airbag
status. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM INDICATORS
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status IndicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: IlluminatedEmpty
ON: Not Illuminated
DisabledOFF: IlluminatedChild
ON: Not Illuminated
EnabledOFF: Not IlluminatedAdult
ON: Illuminated
66
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front of your vehicle
could affect the performance of the airbag
system, increasing the risk of injury. This
includes the hood, bumper system, frame,
front body structure, tow hooks, hood pins,
push bar and snowplows.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors. These sensors provide
information to the restraints control module
which activates the following:
• Front seatbelt pretensioners.
• Adaptive steering column.
• Driver airbag.
• Passenger airbag.
• Seat mounted side airbags.
• Safety Canopy.
Based on the type of crash, the restraints
control module deploys the appropriate
safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or stays
on.
• You hear a series of five tones. The tone
pattern repeats periodically until the
problem, the light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced immediately.
Unless serviced, the system may not function
properly in the event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, seatbelt usage) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• The front airbags activate only in frontal
and near-frontal crashes. Front airbags
may activate in rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts if the crash causes sufficient
frontal deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners activate in
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and
in rollovers.
67
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
• The side airbags inflate in certain side
impact crashes or rollover events. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The Safety Canopy inflates in certain side
impact crashes or rollover events. The
Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
DISPOSING OF AIRBAGS
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
68
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Airbags
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST
911 Assist is a feature that can call for help.
For more information, refer to the regional
Lincoln website.
HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your vehicle
may be able to contact emergency services
by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth® enabled phone.
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off. If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to the operating system during
a crash, the system searches for and tries to
connect to a previously paired cell phone.
The 911 Assist feature attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• 911 Assist feature provides about 10
seconds to cancel the call. If you fail to
cancel the call, the system attempts to
dial 911.
• 911 Assist says the following, or a similar
message: the system will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel.
If you do not cancel the call, 911 Assist makes
a successful call a pre-recorded message
plays for the 911 operator. The occupants in
your vehicle are able to talk with the
operator. Be prepared to provide your name,
phone number and location immediately
because not all 911 systems are capable of
receiving this information electronically.
During an emergency call the system
transmits vehicle data to the emergency
service.
EMERGENCY CALL
REQUIREMENTS
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do
it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
69
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
911 Assist - Vehicles With: Emergency Assistance
• The operating system must be powered
and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature
activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth®
enabled and compatible cell phone to
the operating system.
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to the operating system, an icon
displays on the status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While 911 Assist works with most cellular
phones, some may have trouble using this
feature.
EMERGENCY CALL LIMITATIONS
The 911 Assist feature only operates in the
U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.
This feature does not operate properly if:
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the operating
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
70
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
911 Assist - Vehicles With: Emergency Assistance
REMOTE CONTROL LIMITATIONS
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Make sure a valid remote control is within
3 ft (1 m) from the front door handles and rear
of vehicle.
The system may not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no
charge.
• There is interference causing issues with
the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to metal
objects or electronic devices, for example
keys or a cell phone.
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
remote control unattended in the vehicle.
Children or pets could operate the power
windows, moonroof or other controls.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
Use your remote control to access various
vehicle systems.
Note: The buttons on your remote may vary
depending on the vehicle region or options.
Unlock
E138629
Press the button to unlock all
doors. See Unlocking and
Locking the Doors Using the
Remote Control (page 80).
Lock
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
See Unlocking and Locking the
Doors Using the Remote Control
(page 80).
Remote Start
E138625
Press the button twice within three
seconds to remote start. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
192).
71
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keys and Remote Controls
Opening and Closing the Splitgate
E416264
Press the button twice within three
seconds to open and close the
splitgate. See Opening and
Closing the Splitgate (page 90).
Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. See Sounding the
Panic Alarm (page 72).
REMOVING THE KEY BLADE
E322866
Push the release button on your passive key
and pull the key blade out.
SOUNDING THE PANIC ALARM
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
LOCATING YOUR VEHICLE
E138623
Press the lock button twice within
three seconds. The turn signal
lamps flash. We recommend you
use this method to locate your vehicle.
72
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keys and Remote Controls
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY
WARNING: Keep batteries away from
children to prevent ingestion. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death. If ingested,
immediately seek medical attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close, stop
using the remote control and replace it as
soon as possible. In the meantime, keep
the remote control away from children.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
The remote control uses one coin-type 3-volt
lithium battery CR2450 or equivalent.
E322866
1. Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
73
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keys and Remote Controls
E218402
3. Insert a screwdriver, and carefully remove
the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto
the transmitter and install the key blade.
E107998
Dispose of old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control should operate normally.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
Note: You can program a maximum of four
remote controls to your vehicle.
Note: If your programmed remote controls
are lost or stolen and you do not have an
extra coded remote, you need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Store
an extra programmed remote away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconvenience. Contact an authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement remotes.
You must have two previously programmed
remote controls inside your vehicle and the
new unprogrammed remote controls readily
accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to
have the spare remote control programmed
if two previously programmed remotes are
not available. Make sure that your vehicle
is off before beginning this procedure. Make
sure that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Perform all steps
within 30 seconds of starting the sequence.
Stop and wait for at least one minute before
starting again if you perform any steps out
of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
74
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keys and Remote Controls
1. Place the first programmed remote in the
backup slot inside the center console,
with your foot off the brake pedal press
and release the push button ignition
switch. See Accessing the Passive Key
Backup Position (page 195).
2. Wait five seconds and then press and
release the push button ignition switch
again.
3. Remove the remote control.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed remote control in the
backup slot. Press and release the push
button ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press and
release the push button ignition switch
again. Keep the ignition on for at least
three seconds, but no more than 10
seconds.
6. Remove the remote control.
7. Place the unprogrammed remote control
in the backup slot and press and release
the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. With your
foot on the brake pedal, press the push
button ignition switch to verify the remote
control functions operate and your vehicle
starts with the new remote control.
If programming was not successful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you
are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Key In Reminder
Sounds when the following conditions are
met:
• Vehicle is out of park (P).
• You switch the vehicle off.
• You open the driver's door.
• You have left the key inside the vehicle.
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – TROUBLESHOOTING
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
Replace remote control battery.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
75
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keys and Remote Controls
WHAT IS PHONE AS A KEY
Phone as a Key allows you to use your phone
in place of a passive key.
You can use your phone for the following
functions:
• Remote locking and unlocking.
• Passive entry and exit.
• Passive start and drive the vehicle.
• Remote start.
• Memory function recall.
PHONE AS A KEY LIMITATIONS
Limitations can vary based on the make and
model of your phone, phone location and
physical obstructions.
The following items could impact Phone as
a Key performance or prevent functionality
in some cases:
• The typical operating range for Phone as
a Key is 131 ft (40 m).
• Your Bluetooth® connection is not
enabled, is disrupted, or out of range.
• Phone as a Key is not active or enabled
on at least one phone.
• Your vehicle battery has depleted.
• Your phone battery has depleted.
• Interference from other devices using
radio frequencies or physical
obstructions.
• Your phone is too close to metal objects
or other electronic devices.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
phone and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle.
PROGRAMMING YOUR PHONE
To program your device as Phone as a Key:
1. Visit your device's app store to download
the Lincoln mobile app.
2. Create a new account or sign in to an
existing account on the Lincoln mobile
app.
3. Add the vehicle identification number to
your account and follow the prompts in
the Lincoln mobile app to complete the
authorization process.
4. After the authorization is complete, you
can set up Phone as a Key following the
prompts in the Lincoln mobile app.
5. After Phone as a Key is set up, you can
set up the backup start passcode by
following the prompts on your
touchscreen.
Note: Keep your new backup start passcode
with you in case of an emergency.
Resetting Phone as a Key
To reset Phone as a Key from your vehicle
See Performing a System Reset (page 524).
USING THE VALET MODE
Classic Valet Mode
Enabling Valet Mode
Make sure the remote control is in your
vehicle.
76
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone as a Key
1. From the controls menu, press Valet
Mode.
2. Enter a four digit code to lock the
touchscreen.
3. Reenter the same four digit code to
complete enabling valet mode.
Disabling Valet Mode
1. Press Exit Valet Mode.
2. Enter your four digit code to disable valet
mode and unlock your touchscreen.
Enhanced Valet Mode
Enabling Valet Mode
Have your backup start passcode completely
set up before using valet mode. See
Programming Your Phone (page 76).
Note: If your vehicle detects a remote
control, the system defaults to classic valet
mode.
1. From the controls menu, press Valet
Mode.
Note: If the system detects a valid Phone as
a Key, a valet passcode displays on both the
touchscreen and mobile app.
Note: If the system does not detect a valid
Phone as a Key, it prompts you to enter your
backup start passcode on the touchscreen.
Once validated, a valet passcode displays
on the touchscreen.
2. Provide the valet the first five digits of the
valet passcode to enter on the keyless
entry keypad to unlock your vehicle.
3. Provide the valet the eight-digit valet
passcode to enter on the touchscreen to
start and drive your vehicle.
Disabling Valet Mode
1. Press Exit Valet Mode.
Note: If the system detects a valid Phone as
a Key, valet mode disables.
Note: If the system does not detect a valid
Phone as a Key, it prompts you to enter your
backup start passcode. Once validated, valet
mode disables.
USING THE BACKUP START
PASSCODE
Make sure you have Phone as a Key active
on at least one phone to use the previously
created backup start passcode. See
Programming Your Phone (page 76).
1. Press the brake pedal and the push
button ignition switch. If the system does
not detect a valid Phone as a Key or
remote control, a message appears on
the touchscreen and the system prompts
you for your backup start passcode.
Note: The touchscreen times out after 30
seconds with no interaction.
Note: If the backup start passcode screen
does not appear, press the brake pedal and
push button ignition switch again.
2. Use the touchscreen to enter your
backup start passcode.
3. After entering your backup start
passcode, press return within 30
seconds.
77
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone as a Key
4. Once the system validates the backup
start passcode, a message alerts you to
start your vehicle.
5. Press the brake pedal and the push
button ignition switch within 20 seconds
to start the vehicle.
6. If your vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1-5.
System Lockout
The system locks after five combined
incorrect attempts of the following:
• Entering a backup start passcode.
• Resetting a current passcode.
• Entering a valet mode passcode.
Note: The system remains locked for a short
period of time. After that the system allows
passcodes to be entered again.
PHONE AS A KEY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
PHONE AS A KEY – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
How can I tell if my vehicle has Phone
as a Key?
• The vehicle's touchscreen shows the
Phone as a Key reset option.
• Additional control buttons appear on the
home screen of the Lincoln mobile app
if you have already set up Phone as a
Key on your vehicle through the Lincoln
mobile app.
What happens if I cannot unlock the
vehicle with Phone as a Key?
• Attempt to move your phone closer to
the vehicle.
• Check that the Lincoln mobile app is still
running and that the Phone as a Key
control screen shows Bluetooth® is
connected. If the phone is connected,
attempt to press the remote unlock
button in the Lincoln mobile app. If the
phone is not connected or the remote
unlock button does not work in the
Lincoln mobile app, attempt to force
close and restart the app.
78
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone as a Key
Why do I get a No Key Detected
message in the instrument cluster
display when I am using Phone as a
Key and my phone is in the car?
• Your phone’s Bluetooth® connection has
been disrupted or is not connected. Try
reconnecting your phone's Bluetooth®
connection.
• Move the phone closer to the center of
the vehicle near the cup holder or center
console.
• Verify Phone as a Key is still active,
enabled and has not been revoked.
What do I do if my phone is lost,
damaged or the battery has depleted?
• Use the backup start passcode that you
created. See Using the Backup Start
Passcode (page 77).
How many phones can I use for Phone
as a Key?
• You can program and activate up to four
phones with Phone as a Key to control
your vehicle.
How does a valet drive my car if I only
use Phone as a Key?
• Have the valet use the temporary valet
passcode that you created. See Using
the Valet Mode (page 76).
I uninstalled my Lincoln mobile app
and reinstalled it. Why am I not able to
set up Phone as a Key again?
• Using the key list in the Lincoln mobile
app remove the key that was previously
associated with your phone.
• Reset Phone as a Key from your vehicle,
and then set up Phone as a Key again.
See Programming Your Phone (page
76).
Why can I not remotely start the
vehicle with Phone as a Key?
• Using the Lincoln mobile app, verify your
Phone as a Key setup is complete and
Bluetooth® is connected on at least one
phone. If Phone as a Key setup is not
complete, complete the setup as
prompted from the Lincoln mobile app.
See Programming Your Phone (page
76).
79
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone as a Key
OPERATING THE DOORS FROM
OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE
DOORS USING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
You can only use the remote control when
your vehicle is stationary.
Unlocking the Doors
E267112
Press the button to unlock all
doors. One long flash of the turn
signal lamps confirms that your
vehicle has unlocked.
Locking the Doors
E267111
Press the button to lock all doors.
One short flash of the turn signal
lamps confirms that your vehicle
has locked.
UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE
DOORS USING THE KEY BLADE
If there is a power door lock fault you can
use the key blade to lock and unlock the
doors.
E251885
Turn clockwise to lock.
Turn counterclockwise to unlock.
OPERATING THE DOORS FROM
INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE
DOORS USING THE CENTRAL
LOCKING
The power door lock control is on the front
doors.
E267112
Press the button to unlock all
doors.
E267111
Press the button to lock all doors.
Note: The central locking only operates if
the front doors are fully closed.
OPENING THE DOORS FROM INSIDE
YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
80
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Doors and Locks
AUTOUNLOCK
WHAT IS AUTOUNLOCK
Autounlock is a feature that centrally unlocks
the vehicle doors when your vehicle comes
to a stop and you open the driver door.
AUTOUNLOCK REQUIREMENTS
Autounlock unlocks all the doors after:
1. The vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h).
2. Your vehicle comes to a stop.
3. You open the driver door.
Note: Autounlock operates for only 10
minutes after the ignition is switched off.
SWITCHING AUTOUNLOCK ON AND
OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Locks.
3. Switch Autounlock on or off.
AUTOLOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
WHAT IS AUTOLOCK
Autolock is a locking feature that centrally
locks your vehicle doors when driving.
AUTOLOCK REQUIREMENTS
Autolock locks all the doors after:
1. All doors are closed and the ignition is
on.
2. Your vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Autolock repeats if:
1. Your vehicle is stopped.
2. Any door is opened and closed again.
3. Your vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h).
SWITCHING AUTOLOCK ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Locks.
3. Switch Autolock on or off.
MISLOCK
WHAT IS MISLOCK
Mislock is a locking feature that warns you
if your vehicle has not locked.
MISLOCK LIMITATIONS
When you press the lock button once, the
turn signals do not flash if:
• Any door or the tailgate is open.
• The hood is open.
If you switch mislock off, the horn does not
sound if you press the lock button on the
remote control when a door is open.
SWITCHING MISLOCK ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Locks.
3. Switch Mislock chirp on or off.
81
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
Door Ajar Audible Warning
Sounds when any front door is not fully
closed and your vehicle is moving.
DOORS AND LOCKS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
DOORS AND LOCKS – WARNING
LAMPS
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
E249859
Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on and remains on if any
door or the hood is open.
DOORS AND LOCKS – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
Displays if a door is open. Fully close the door.Driver Door Ajar
Passenger Door Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar
Rear Right Door Ajar
Displays if a hood is open. Fully close the hood.Hood Ajar
82
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Doors and Locks
DOORS AND LOCKS – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
Can accessories such as steps or
handles be used with the latch
assembly?
• Do not use the door latch assembly to
attach any accessory, such as handles
or steps, as this can cause damage to
your vehicle.
83
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Doors and Locks
WHAT IS KEYLESS ENTRY
The system allows you to lock and unlock
your vehicle without taking the passive key
out of your pocket or purse.
KEYLESS ENTRY LIMITATIONS
Make sure your remote control is within 3 ft
(1 m) from the front door handles and the
splitgate.
The system could not function if:
• The remote control remains stationary
for about a minute.
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
• The remote control battery has no
charge.
• There is interference causing issues with
the remote control frequencies.
• The remote control is too close to metal
objects or electronic devices, for example
keys or a cell phone.
KEYLESS ENTRY SETTINGS
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function (If Equipped)
You can enable the two-stage unlocking
function allowing you to unlock only the
driver door when you touch the unlock
sensor.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking.
If you program the unlocking function so that
only the driver door unlocks, you can unlock
all of the other doors from inside your vehicle
using the power door lock control. You can
unlock individual doors by pulling the interior
door handles on those doors.
Key Detection Alert
Displays a message in the instrument cluster
if no valid key is detected, when you exit
your vehicle with a key, after the last front
door is closed and your keyless vehicle is in
run, indicating your vehicle is still on. An
audible alert sounds if you have driven the
vehicle and reached a speed of 16 mph
(25 km/h) and the above mentioned
conditions are met.
You can switch the audible alert on or off.
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Switch Key Detection Alert On or Off.
USING KEYLESS ENTRY
Unlocking the Doors
E248553
84
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keyless Entry
With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of your
vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back
of the door handle for a brief period and then
pull on the door handle to unlock, being
careful not to touch the lock sensor at the
same time or pull on the door handle too
quickly. The intelligent access system
requires a brief delay to authenticate your
intelligent access key.
Using the Power Splitgate with Passive Key
With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of your
vehicle, press the exterior liftgate release
button to unlocks and open liftgate. Then
press the tailgate control button to open the
tailgate. See Opening and Closing the
Splitgate (page 90).
Locking the Doors
E248554
With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of your
vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock
sensor for approximately one second to lock,
being careful not to touch the unlock sensor
on the back of the door handle at the same
time. After locking, you can immediately pull
on the door handle to confirm locking
occurred without inadvertently unlocking.
KEYLESS ENTRY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
KEYLESS ENTRY – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
Why does the keyless entry system not
function?
If the system does not function it may
be limited. See Keyless Entry
Limitations (page 84). If the system still
does not function use the remote
control or the key blade to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
Why can I not lock my vehicle?
If you electronically lock your vehicle
with a rear door or the liftgate open, the
system searches for a passive key inside
your vehicle after you close the last
door. If the system detects a key, all
doors unlock indicating that a key is
inside. Your vehicle locks if another
passive key is within the detection range
after you close the last door.
85
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keyless Entry
WHAT IS THE KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keyless entry keypad allows you to lock
and unlock your vehicle using the keypad
on the window trim.
Note: The keypad uses either a five-digit or
a seven-digit access code. You can view the
master access code in the instrument cluster
display to find the type of the code in your
vehicle. See Keyless Entry Keypad Master
Access Code (page 86).
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
LIMITATIONS
The system may not function if:
• The vehicle battery has no charge.
LOCATING THE KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is near the driver window and
illuminates when you touch it.
E138637
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD MASTER
ACCESS CODE
What is the Master Access Code
The master access code is a factory-set entry
code. You can operate the keypad with the
master access code at any time. The master
access code can be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Displaying the Master Access Code in
the Instrument Cluster Display
Read and understand the following before
you begin the process.
• You must have two keys inside your
vehicle.
• Make sure that you close all the doors
and that they remain closed throughout
the procedure.
• Do not place the device on the wireless
accessory charging area during the
procedure.
Note: Perform all steps within 30 seconds
of starting the sequence. If you perform any
of the steps out of sequence, stop and wait
for at least one minute before starting again.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Place the first key into the backup slot.
3. Turn on the vehicle, without pressing the
brake pedal, and wait for a few seconds.
4. Turn off the vehicle and replace the first
key with the second key.
5. Turn on the vehicle, without pressing the
brake pedal.
86
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keyless Entry Keypad
The master access code appears in the
instrument cluster display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
other warning messages display.
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
PERSONAL ACCESS CODES
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter your master access code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal access code. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
Note: The personal access code must have
the same number of digits as your master
access code. See Keyless Entry Keypad
Master Access Code (page 86).
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1 through 3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
If your vehicle comes with the operating
system, you can also program the system
with one personal entry code.
Note: Programming a code using the
operating system overwrites any code that
was already saved on the position 9·0 of the
keypad.
Hints:
• Do not use the same number for all the
digits in the code.
• Do not use the numbers in sequential
order.
• The master access code works even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the master access code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the master
access code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times. This
mode turns off the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition on.
• You unlock your vehicle using keyless
entry.
87
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keyless Entry Keypad
USING THE KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
Unlocking the Driver Door
E138637
Enter the master access code or your
personal access code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Keyless
Entry Settings (page 84).
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3-4 within five seconds.
Locking the Doors
E138637
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
with the driver door closed.
Note: You do not need to enter the code
first.
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD –
TROUBLESHOOTING
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why does the keypad not accept the
access code?
• If you enter the access code too fast on
the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Slowly re-enter the access code.
Why does the keypad not function?
• The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter a wrong code seven times.
The anti-scan mode disables the keypad
for one minute and the red light flashes.
88
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Keyless Entry Keypad
HOW DOES EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT WORK
Easy entry and exit moves the driver seat
rearward and the steering column up when
you switch the ignition off. The driver seat
and steering column return to their previous
positions when you switch the ignition on.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column
may move up and in.
SWITCHING EASY ENTRY AND
EXIT ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Easy Entry/Exit.
If you press any adjustment button when in
easy exit mode, the system cancels the
operation.
89
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Easy Entry and Exit
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SPLITGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the splitgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the splitgate, open
the air vents or the windows to allow fresh
air to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Keep keys or remote
control out of reach of children. Do not
allow children to operate or play near an
open or moving power splitgate. You
should supervise the operation of the
power splitgate at all times.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the splitgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the splitgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or splitgate. This
could damage the splitgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the splitgate open while
driving. This could damage the splitgate and
its components.
Opening the Splitgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power splitgate area before
opening or closing the splitgate.
Opening the Splitgate from Inside Your
Vehicle
Opening the splitgate using the instrument
panel button
E416263
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel to open both liftgate and
tailgate.
Opening the splitgate using the
touchscreen
1. Press to open the controls screen.
2.
E416263
Press the button to open both
liftgate and tailgate.
90
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
Opening the Splitgate From Outside Your
Vehicle
E417773
Press the liftgate button to access the
tailgate control button.
E417774
Press the control button to open the tailgate.
Opening the Splitgate Using the Remote
Control
E416264
Press the button twice within three
seconds to open both the liftgate
and tailgate.
Closing the Splitgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power splitgate area before
opening or closing the splitgate.
Note: Make sure that you fully close the
splitgate to prevent cargo from falling out.
Note: The splitgate does not close if the
vehicle speed is at or above 2.5 mph
(4 km/h).
Closing the Splitgate from Inside Your
Vehicle
Closing the splitgate using the instrument
panel button
E416263
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel to close both the liftgate and
tailgate.
Closing the splitgate using the touchscreen
1. Press to open the controls screen.
2.
E416263
Press the button to close both
the liftgate and tailgate.
Closing the Splitgate Using the Remote
Control
E416264
Press the button twice within three
seconds to close both the liftgate
and tailgate.
91
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
OPENING THE OPEN ON
APPROACH SPLITGATE
You can open both the liftgate and tailgate
using your passive key if the following
conditions are met
E419935
Dwell ZoneA
• The passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) behind
the vehicle for approximately 4 seconds.
• The vehicle is turned off or remotely
started or in park (P) and locked.
• The vehicle is not in towing, valet or
transport modes.
Note: Before the splitgate opens, the hazard
warning lamps flash and a tone sounds.
Note: Do not leave the splitgate open while
driving. This could damage the splitgate and
its components.
OPEN ON APPROACH SETTINGS
Switching Open On Approach on and
off
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Splitgate.
3. Press Power Splitgate
4. You can switch the Open On Approach
on or off on your touchscreen.
Keyfob and Open on Approach
Configuration
You can set the remote control to open
either the liftgate only or the liftgate and
tailgate, through the touchscreen.
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Splitgate.
3. Press Power Splitgate
4. Press Keyfob and Open on Approach.
SPLITGATE SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press vehicle.
2. Press Splitgate.
3. You can switch the power splitgate on or
off on your touchscreen.
Note: When switched off, the splitgate only
unlatches and does not power open or close.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
92
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Opening the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
opening or closing the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate from Inside your
Vehicle
Opening the liftgate using the instrument
panel button
E138633
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel.
Opening the liftgate using the touchscreen
1. Press to open the controls screen.
2.
E138633
Press the button to open the
liftgate.
Opening the Liftgate From Outside Your
Vehicle
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when you
press the liftgate release button.
E417773
2. Press and release the liftgate control
button.
93
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate could activate the system’ s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Opening the Liftgate Using the Remote
Control
E416264
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
opening or closing the liftgate.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Closing the Liftgate From Inside Your
Vehicle
Closing the liftgate using the instrument
panel button
E138633
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel.
Closing the liftgate using the touchscreen
1. Press to open the controls screen.
2.
E138633
Press the button to open the
liftgate.
Closing the Liftgate From Outside Your
Vehicle
E417775
Press the liftgate button.
Closing the Liftgate Using the Remote
Control
E416264
Press the button twice within three
seconds. A tone sounds when the
liftgate begins to close.
Note: The tailgate also closes along with the
liftgate if the tailgate is ajar.
94
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
LIFTGATE SETTINGS
Switching the Power Liftgate On or Off
1. From the settings menu, press vehicle.
2. Press liftgate.
3. You can switch the power liftgate on or
off on your touchscreen.
Note: When switched off, the liftgate only
unlatches and does not power open or close.
Setting the Liftgate Opening Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when it
reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate stops moving, you
can manually move it to the desired height.
3. Press and hold the control button on the
liftgate until a tone sounds, indicating
programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
4. The power liftgate now opens at the
programmed height. To change the
programmed height, repeat the steps.
Note: You can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position if it opens in a lower position.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.
Liftgate Obstacle Detection
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
The system stops and a tone sounds when
the liftgate detects an obstacle. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
Note: To prevent accidental obstacle
detection, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
TAILGATE
Opening the Tailgate from Outside
Your Vehicle
E417774
1. Press the liftgate button to access the
tailgate control button.
2. Press the control button to open the
tailgate.
Note: You may need to unlock the liftgate
first.
95
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
Note: Allow the power system to open the
tailgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
tailgate could activate the system’ s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Closing the Tailgate from Outside Your
Vehicle
You can close the tailgate by pressing the
control button.
SPLITGATE – TROUBLESHOOTING
SPLITGATE – WARNING LAMPS
E397136
Illuminates when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
E415173
Illuminates when the liftgate glass
is not completely closed.
E416263
Illuminates when the splitgate is
not completely closed.
SPLITGATE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
The liftgate is not completely closed. Close the liftgate.Liftgate Ajar
The liftgate and tailgate are not completely closed.Liftgate and Tailgate Ajar
96
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
SPLITGATE – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
Why won't my power splitgate open?
Make sure the splitgate is in power
mode. Make sure the transmission is in
park (P), make sure nothing is
obstructing the splitgate path or causing
resistance (tonneau cover or other
aftermarket accessory, freezing
conditions or being parked downhill). If
you have continued issues, the battery
voltage may be low or other system
issues. See an authorized dealer.
Why won't my power splitgate close?
Make sure the splitgate is in power
mode. Your vehicle speed is at or above
2.5 mph (4 km/h), the splitgate
encountered an obstacle or freezing
conditions. After removing the
obstacles, manually close the tailgate
to resume normal operation. If you have
continued issues, the battery voltage
may be low or other system issues. See
an authorized dealer.
Why won't my power liftgate function?
It can happen in freezing conditions or
when parking on downhill slopes. Make
sure the power liftgate is enabled. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P), make
sure nothing is obstructing the liftgate
path and there is not excessive weight
on the liftgate. If there are continued
issues, the battery voltage may be low
or there may be other system issues.
See an authorized dealer.
97
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Splitgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
WHAT IS THE PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
The passive anti-theft system prevents
someone from starting your vehicle with an
incorrectly coded key.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take the keys and
lock all the doors when leaving your vehicle.
HOW DOES THE PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM WORK
The passive anti-theft system arms when you
switch your vehicle off.
It disarms when you switch your vehicle on
with a correctly coded key.
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take the keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM SYSTEM
WHAT IS THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM
SYSTEM
The anti-theft alarm system warns you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
HOW DOES THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM
SYSTEM WORK
When armed, the anti-theft alarm is triggered
in any of the following ways:
• Opening a door, the tailgate or hood
without a correctly coded key or remote
control.
• If you turn the power on without a
correctly coded key.
• Disconnecting the battery.
• Disconnecting the trailer. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 348).
Any further attempts to carry out one of the
above, sounds the alarm again.
If the anti-theft alarm is triggered, the alarm
horn sounds for 30 seconds and the turn
signals flash for five minutes.
WHAT IS THE PERIMETER ALARM
The perimeter alarm is designed to detect
unauthorized access to your vehicle.
ARMING THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM
SYSTEM
The alarm is ready to arm when you switch
your vehicle off.
Lock your vehicle with your remote control
to arm the alarm.
DISARMING THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM
SYSTEM
Disarm the alarm by performing any of the
following actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
98
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Security
SECURITY – TROUBLESHOOTING
SECURITY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The system has not detected a correctly coded key.No Key Detected
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.Starting System Fault
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry.Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start
Vehicle.
Alarm
99
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Security
SECURITY – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
What should I do if there is a potential
alarm problem with my vehicle?
• Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is a potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
What should I do if my vehicle is unable
to start with a correctly coded key?
• Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
100
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Security
POWER RUNNING BOARD
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not step on a running
board that is moving or not fully deployed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury or
property damage.
WARNING: Never place your hands
or feet near a moving running board.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause
personal injury.
Note: The power running boards could be
exposed to factors such as ice, mud, or
rocks, causing the running boards to not
deploy or stow properly. The power running
boards resume normal operation once the
mechanical device that allows movement of
the running boards is cleaned and lubricated
following the maintenance instructions.
POWER RUNNING BOARD
SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Power Running Board.
3. Press a setting.
Running Boards (Modes)
Note: When the vehicle speed is more than
3 mph (5 km/h), the option to select the
modes disables, to avoid unintended
operation.
Note: The power running boards reverse
direction and move to the end of travel if
they encounter an object when moving.
Keep the power running boards and
brackets clean for optimum performance.
Off
The power running boards remain stowed,
regardless of door position.
Auto
The power running boards deploy when you
approach your vehicle with a remote control,
unlock the door or open the door.
The power running boards stow:
• After a few seconds when you close the
doors.
• Instantly after you close and lock the
doors.
• If you unlock the door but do not open
it, after the timeout.
101
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Power Running Boards
• If you have switched Approach detection
on and do not open a door before the
Auto Timer setting expires.
• When the vehicle speed is more than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: When you select this mode, an option
displays that allows you to select how long
the running boards stay deployed without
opening the door.
Out
The power running boards remain deployed,
regardless of door position. The power
running boards stow when the vehicle speed
is more than 3 mph (5 km/h), and the mode
changes to Auto. You need to select Out
mode again if you want the power running
boards to stay deployed at the end of each
trip.
POWER RUNNING BOARDS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
POWER RUNNING BOARDS –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why are my power running boards not
deploying and/or stowing as expected?
• The power running boards may produce
unwanted noises, move in and out
randomly, move slowly, or get stuck
mid-travel when the power running
boards mechanism has trapped debris
such as mud, dirt, snow, ice, and/or salt.
If this happens, follow the maintenance
procedure below.
What maintenance should my power
running boards have?
• Set the running boards to the deployed
position by selecting the out mode. Wash
the system, in particular the front and rear
hinge arms, with a high-pressure car
wash wand. Avoid using a wand that is
not designed for car wash use, as
excessive water pressure could damage
nearby components.
• Apply Motorcraft penetrating and lock
lubricant to clean the bushing locations
on both running board hinges. This
removes any embedded rust or debris
that pressure washing may not have
removed. If any leftover debris or rust is
present after using the penetrating
lubricant, use a pressure washer to
remove it.
• To help prevent power running board
deployment issues, use lithium grease to
help keep debris away from the moving
parts of the running board. Apply
Motorcraft® multi-purpose grease on
each bushing location and the motor
output shaft.
102
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Power Running Boards
• Remember to properly clean the power
running boards every time you notice
slow movement or improper behavior.
Apply multi-purpose grease to the
mechanism every 6 months.
103
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Power Running Boards
USING THE CONTROLS ON THE
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The steering wheel control has nine possible
locations. When activated, a control mirror
in the instrument cluster display reflects the
available controls.
E416856
Instrument Cluster Display Control Mirror
E421696
104
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Steering Wheel
1. Press any area on the control to activate
the control mirror in the instrument
cluster display. The control mirror
highlights the locations you press. Any
applicable text of the active location
appears below the control mirror in the
instrument cluster display.
Note: Applicable text displays in the
instrument cluster for right-hand controls
only.
2. Using the control mirror, press the
corresponding location on the steering
wheel control to select the option you
prefer.
Note: The instrument cluster display control
mirror times out after a few seconds.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering
wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 153).
The control is on the right-hand side of the
steering wheel. See Using the Controls on
the Steering Wheel (page 104).
1.
E418213
Using the controls on the
steering wheel, press the driver
adjustment menu.
Note: The available controls appear in the
instrument cluster display.
2.
E421695
Press the button to access the
steering wheel adjust option.
3.
E418184
Press the directional arrows to
adjust the steering wheel.
You can save and recall the steering wheel
position with the memory function. See
Using the Memory Function (page 519).
RESETTING THE STOPPING
POSITION
Note: The steering wheel stops when it
detects an obstruction. This sets a new
stopping position.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
Note: The steering column may start to move
again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction, as necessary.
105
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Steering Wheel
HORN
E270945
Press the horn icon to activate the
horn.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF -
VEHICLES WITH: HEATED
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated steering wheel if you are
unable to feel pain to your skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, exhaustion
or other physical conditions. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, especially if the heated
steering wheel is used for long periods of
time.
E256621
To activate the heated steering
wheel, press the button on the
touchscreen. An indicator
illuminates when the heated steering wheel
is on. To turn it off, press the heated steering
wheel button again.
Note: The engine must be running to use
the heated steering wheel.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature
of the steering wheel.
Note: The heated steering wheel may
remain on after remote starting your vehicle,
depending on the remote start settings. It
may also turn on when you start your vehicle
if it was on the last time the engine was
switched off.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
106
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Do not use the pedal
adjustment controls when the vehicle is
moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
The controls are on the right-hand side of
the steering wheel. See Using the Controls
on the Steering Wheel (page 104).
1.
E418213
Using the controls on the
steering wheel, press the driver
adjustment menu.
Note: The available controls appear in the
instrument cluster display.
2.
E418655
Press the button to access the
adjustable pedal option.
3.
E266187
Press the area on the steering
wheel controls to move the pedals
toward you as shown in the instrument
cluster display.
4.
E266186
Press the area on the steering
wheel controls to move the pedals away
from you as shown in the instrument
cluster display.
E418187
Press the button to go back to the
previous menu.
Memory Foot Pedals
You can save and recall the pedal positions
through the memory function. See Using the
Memory Function (page 519).
107
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adjustable Pedals
WIPERS
WIPER PRECAUTIONS
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This could scratch the glass or
damage the wiper blades. Use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Switch the windshield wipers off before
entering a car wash.
SWITCHING WINDSHIELD WIPERS ON
AND OFF
E269410
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe/Auto wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
E270969
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wipers.
AUTOWIPERS
WHAT ARE AUTOWIPERS
Autowipers turns on and controls the speed
and frequency of the windshield wipers.
AUTOWIPERS SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Wipers.
3. Switch Rain sensing on or off.
Note: When you switch the feature off, the
wipers do not operate based on the rain
sensor. When you switch on the windshield
wipers to the intermittent wipe position with
the feature off, the wipers use the wipe
speed set by the rotary control.
108
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wipers and Washers
ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY OF THE
RAIN SENSOR
E330179
High sensitivity.A
Low sensitivity.B
Use the rotary control to set the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
When you select high sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
When you select low sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield.
SWITCHING THE REAR WINDOW
WIPER ON AND OFF
E396130
Rear window wiper off.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Continuous wipe.C
REVERSE WIPE
WHAT IS REVERSE WIPE
Reverse wipe turns on the rear window wiper
when you shift into reverse (R) and the
windshield wipers are on.
REVERSE WIPE SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Wipers.
3. Switch Rear wiper on or off.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
109
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wipers and Washers
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
REPLACING THE FRONT WIPER
BLADES
Make sure your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
E430088
2. Press the wiper blade locking clip.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
REPLACING THE REAR WIPER
BLADES
E271380
1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
110
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wipers and Washers
Note: Do not lift the wiper arm beyond the
limited service-up position, as this might
cause damage to the wiper arm. The limited
service-up position is intended to protect the
wiper arm against car washes.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
WASHERS
WASHER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit
the windshield.
USING THE WINDSHIELD WASHER
E269412
E270967
Pull the lever toward you to
operate the windshield washer.
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time
after the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid when switched on. See
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off
(page 111).
SWITCHING THE COURTESY WIPE ON
AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Wipers.
3. Switch Courtesy wipe on or off.
USING THE REAR WINDOW WASHER
E269727
111
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wipers and Washers
Push the lever away from you to operate the
rear window washer.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
E348204
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
112
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wipers and Washers
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid -35 °C / Liquide lave-glace
de haute qualité -35 °C Motorcraft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-M(Canada)
WIPERS AND WASHERS –
TROUBLESHOOTING
WIPERS AND WASHERS – WARNING
LAMPS
E132353
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
WIPERS AND WASHERS –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why are there streaks and smears on
the windshield?
• The wiper blades could be dirty, worn or
damaged. Check the wiper blades. See
Checking the Wiper Blades (page 109).
If the wiper blades are dirty, clean them
with washer fluid or water applied with a
soft sponge or cloth. If the wiper blades
are worn or damaged, install new ones.
See Replacing the Front Wiper Blades
(page 110).
113
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wipers and Washers
EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL
E417515
Press the button on the
touchscreen to access the lighting
menu.
E417205
Headlamps on.A
Autolamps on.B
Parking lamps on.C
Lamps off.D
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps every time you switch your
vehicle on.
HEADLAMPS
USING THE HIGH BEAM HEADLAMPS
E421666
E67019
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever
toward you to switch the high beams off.
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
Note: Continuous activation only occurs with
the headlamps on.
SWITCHING HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
ON AND OFF
To switch headlamp exit delay on, pull the
turn signal lever toward you when the
headlamps are off and the ignition is off. A
short tone sounds when the system is on.
To switch headlamp exit delay off, pull the
turn signal lever toward you again or switch
your vehicle on.
Note: The headlamps turn off after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door closes.
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE
HEADLAMPS
Your vehicle has a dynamic leveling system.
The headlamps do not require additional aim
adjustment.
114
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
HEADLAMP INDICATORS
Lamps On
E71341
Illuminates when you switch the
low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
Headlamp High Beam
E67019
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on.
HEADLAMPS – TROUBLESHOOTING
HEADLAMPS – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
Why is there condensation in the
headlamps?
• Headlamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural
by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the
vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the
temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form
on the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the
vents during normal operation.
How much condensation is acceptable?
• The presence of a fine mist, for example
no streaks, drip marks or large droplets.
A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
How long does it take for the
acceptable condensation to clear?
• Clearing time can take as long as 48
hours under dry weather conditions.
How much condensation is
unacceptable?
• A water puddle inside the lamp. Streaks,
drip marks or large droplets present on
the interior of the lens.
What should I do if unacceptable
condensation is present?
• Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Why do my headlamps turn off when I
have them switched on when I switch
my vehicle off?
• The battery saver turns the headlamps
off after a short period of time after you
switch your vehicle off.
AUTOLAMPS
WHAT ARE AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
115
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low light
situations or when the windshield wipers
operate.
AUTOLAMP SETTINGS
Autolamp Exit Delay
You can adjust the amount of time the
autolamps remain on after you switch off
your vehicle. Use the touchscreen to choose
a delay setting.
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Lighting.
3. Press Autolamp Delay.
4. Select a setting.
Note: If the setting is off, the external lamps
switch off immediately when you shut down
your vehicle.
Note: You can pull the turn signal toward
you to manually switch off the autolamp exit
delay.
EXTERIOR LAMPS
USING THE TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
E428575
E67018
Push the lever up or down to
switch the turn signal lamps on.
Set the lever to the middle position to switch
the turn signal lamps off.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
turn signal lamps flash three times.
Turn Signal Lamp Indicator
E67018
It flashes when you switch the turn
signal lamps on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed turn signal lamp.
SWITCHING THE DAYTIME RUNNING
LAMPS ON AND OFF - VEHICLES
WITH: CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Lighting.
3. Switch Daytime Running Lights on or off.
116
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
The daytime running lamps turn on when all
of the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
• The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
• The headlamps are off.
Note: Other lighting control positions do not
turn on the daytime running lamps.
SWITCHING THE DAYTIME RUNNING
LAMPS ON AND OFF - VEHICLES
WITH: DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
(DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system may not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Daytime running lamps are always on unless
you switch on the headlamps or your vehicle
is in park (P).
SWITCHING THE REAR FLOODLAMPS
ON AND OFF
The rear floodlamps automatically turn on
when you open the liftgate.
Note: The rear floodlamps turn off
approximately 10 minutes after the liftgate
is opened.
E296616
You can also press the button in
the cargo area to switch the rear
floodlamps on and off.
Note: The rear floodlamps turn off
approximately 30 minutes after you switch
them on manually.
Note: The rear floodlamps automatically turn
off when the liftgate is closed.
SWITCHING WELCOME LIGHTING ON
AND OFF
Approach Detection
The system turns on the exterior lamps when
you approach your vehicle with an
authenticated device.
To switch the system on or off:
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Easy entry and exit.
3. Switch Approach detection on or off.
Note: Depending on your vehicle's
configuration, you may not have the option
to switch the feature on and off.
117
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
To conserve power, the system may not work
if:
• The 12-volt battery is low.
• The system was triggered 10 times prior
to starting the vehicle.
• The vehicle is left unused for a few days.
EXTERIOR LAMPS ON AUDIBLE
WARNING
Sounds when you open the driver door and
the exterior lamps are on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL
HOW DOES AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL WORK
Automatic high beam control turns the high
beams on if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. If it detects an approaching
vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street
lighting ahead, the system turns the high
beams off.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to turn the high beams
on and off.
118
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
E327596
Without automatic high beam
control.
A
With automatic high beam control.B
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.
WARNING: The system may not
switch the high beams off if the lights of
oncoming vehicles are hidden by
obstacles, for example guard rails.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: In situations with poor
visibility, such as fog, heavy rain or other
inclement weather, you may need to
override or completely switch off the
system.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL
REQUIREMENTS
The system turns the high beams on if all of
the following occur:
• You switch the system on.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
• The ambient light level is low enough that
you require high beams.
• There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
119
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
The system turns the high beams off if any
of the following occur:
• You switch the system off.
• You set the lighting control to any
position except autolamps.
• The ambient light level is high enough
that you do not require high beams.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or a leading
vehicle's tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The system detects street lighting.
• The camera has reduced visibility.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed may be lower
on curves.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL ON AND OFF
You can switch the feature on and off using
the touchscreen.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL
INDICATORS
E389529
Illuminates to confirm when the
system is ready to assist.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
E431450
Push the lever away from you to switch the
high beams on.
Push the lever away from you again to switch
the high beams off.
Push the lever away from you for a third time
to switch automatic high beam control back
on.
120
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If the message continues to appear,
have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time for the camera to cool down. If the
message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING WORK
Adaptive front lighting adjusts the headlamps
to improve visibility in certain situations.
Note: There are several types of adaptive
front lighting. Availability and activation
conditions may vary based on your vehicle.
Switching Adaptive Front Lighting On
or Off
Set the lighting control to the autolamps
position to use adaptive front lighting.
Note: Other lighting control positions do not
turn on adaptive front lighting.
121
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
Adaptive Front Lighting Types
DetailsName
Provides additional light on the road depending on your vehicle speed
and weather conditions.
Speed Dependent Light Mode
Directs the light beam based on your steering around a curve. Addi-
tionally, lane makings detected by the front windshield camera and
map data also help direct the light beam.
Dynamic Bending Light
Adds lighting at the inside of a curve or corner when you are turning
the steering wheel.
Static Bending Light
Activates targeted lighting when certain traffic signs are detected in
intersection and roundabout scenarios.
Sign Based Light Mode
Note: This feature may use map data. We
recommend having all connected vehicle
settings enabled to allow the map content
to be updated to the latest version. See
Connected Vehicle Settings (page 489). If
your vehicle does not receive automatic
updates, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to receive periodic updates.
122
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Lighting
SWITCHING ALL OF THE INTERIOR
LAMPS ON AND OFF
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a button on the remote control.
• You press the all lamps on button on the
overhead console.
E259649
Press to switch all interior lamps
on or off.
SWITCHING THE FRONT INTERIOR
LAMPS ON AND OFF
E358859
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Individual Map Lamps
Press the lamp lens to switch the lamps on
and off.
SWITCHING THE REAR INTERIOR
LAMPS ON AND OFF
E281231
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
E259649
Press to switch the lamps on or off.
Note: If you switch the rear lamps on through
the overhead console, you cannot switch
them off with the rear lamp switch.
INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION
WHAT IS THE INTERIOR LAMP
FUNCTION
The interior lamp function switches the
courtesy and door lamps on or off.
SWITCHING THE INTERIOR LAMP
FUNCTION ON AND OFF
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
Note: The indicator lamp illuminates amber
when the door function is off.
ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL LIGHTING BRIGHTNESS
1. From the controls menu, press Lighting.
2. Press Interior.
123
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Lighting
3. Drag the slider to adjust the brightness
of the instrument panel lighting.
Note: There are six stages of brightness
adjustments available during the day and
twelve stages of brightness adjustments are
available at night.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
SWITCHING AMBIENT LIGHTING ON
AND OFF
1. From the controls menu, press Ambient
Lighting.
2. Press a color to switch ambient lighting
on.
3.
E396723
Press the power button to
switch ambient lighting off.
Note: The power button icon appears in
whichever ambient lighting color you select.
ADJUSTING AMBIENT LIGHTING
E412511
Drag the slider up or down to adjust the
ambient lighting intensity.
INTERIOR LIGHTING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTERIOR LIGHTING – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
Why do my courtesy lamps or interior
lamps turn off when I have them
switched on when I switch my vehicle
off?
• The battery saver turns the courtesy
lamps and interior lamps off after a short
period of time after you switch your
vehicle off.
124
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Lighting
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle and do not
let children play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify that they are free of
obstructions and make sure children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If an obstruction is
detected, release the switch and reverse
the window immediately. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
remote control unattended in the vehicle.
Children or pets could operate the power
windows and could become trapped in a
closing window. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Press the window control switch
to open the window. Lift the
window control switch to close the
window.
Note: The power windows operate with the
ignition on, and for several minutes after you
switch the ignition off or until you open a
front door.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
one window is open, slightly open the
opposite window.
One-Touch Open
Fully press the window control switch and
release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
One-Touch Close
Fully lift the window control switch and
release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
Resetting One-Touch Open and Close
If the one-touch open and close feature fails,
please reset it according to the following
steps:
Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence.
1. Close the window.
2. Press and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully open. Keep the
window control switch pressed for a few
seconds.
3. Lift and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully closed. Keep the
window control switch held for a few
seconds.
4. Press and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully open. Keep the
window control switch pressed for a few
seconds.
125
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Windows
5. Lift and hold the window control switch
until the window is fully closed. Keep the
window control switch held for a few
seconds.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
WHAT IS GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
USING GLOBAL OPENING
1. Press and release the unlock button on
the remote control.
2. Within one second, press and hold the
unlock button on the remote control.
3. Release the button when the windows
start to open.
Press the lock or the unlock button on the
remote control to stop global opening.
Note: Global opening will only respond to a
press and hold of the unlock button for a
short period of time after the unlock button
is pressed on the remote control.
SWITCHING GLOBAL OPENING ON
AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Windows.
3. Switch Remote open on or off.
USING GLOBAL CLOSING
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify that they are free of
obstructions and make sure children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
1. Press and hold the lock button on the
remote control.
2. Release the button when the windows
start to close.
Press the lock or the unlock button on the
remote control to stop global closing.
Note: Bounce-back is on during global
closing. See What Is Window Bounce-Back
(page 126).
SWITCHING GLOBAL CLOSING ON
AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Windows.
3. Switch Remote close on or off.
WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK
WHAT IS WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK
The window stops and reverses if it detects
an obstruction when closing.
126
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Windows
OVERRIDING WINDOW BOUNCE-
BACK
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
1. Close the window until it reaches the
point of resistance and let it reverse.
2. Lift and hold the window control switch
within two seconds to override
bounce-back and close the window.
Bounce-back is now disabled and you
can close the window manually.
Note: The window goes past the point of
resistance and you can fully close it.
Note: If the window does not close, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
LOCKING THE REAR WINDOW
CONTROLS
WARNING: When children and pets
are in the rear seat, use the power window
lockout button to prevent accidental
operation of the power windows.
To access the rear window lockout menu:
1. From the controls menu, press Parental
Controls.
2.
Press rear windows to lock and
unlock the controls.
127
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Windows
INTERIOR MIRROR PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR MIRROR
WHAT IS THE AUTO-DIMMING
INTERIOR MIRROR
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright
light from behind. It returns to normal when
the bright light from behind is no longer
present or if you shift into reverse (R).
AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR MIRROR
LIMITATIONS
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light from
reaching the sensor.
128
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Mirror
ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
The control is on the right-hand side of the
steering wheel. See Using the Controls on
the Steering Wheel (page 104).
1.
E418213
Using the controls on the
steering wheel, press the driver
adjustment menu.
Note: The available controls appear in the
instrument cluster display.
2.
E418185
Select the mirror you want to
adjust.
3.
E418184
Press the directional arrows to
adjust the position of the mirror.
4.
E418188
Press the button to toggle
between the mirrors.
E418187
Press the button to go back to the
previous menu.
Note: The instrument cluster display control
mirror times out after a few seconds.
FOLDING THE EXTERIOR MIRRORS
With the auto-fold feature enabled, the
exterior mirrors fold in toward the glass after
you place the transmission into park (P), turn
off the vehicle, open and close the driver
side door and lock the vehicle. The exterior
mirrors unfold and return to their driving
position after you unlock the vehicle and
open and close the driver side door.
To fold the mirrors in tight parking conditions,
1.
E418213
Press the driver adjustment
menu on the steering wheel.
2.
E418189
Press the control to power fold
the mirrors.
Press the control again to unfold the mirrors.
If you press the control to fold in the mirrors
with auto-fold on, the mirrors do not unfold
when you unlock your vehicle.
Note: The power folding mirrors operate with
the ignition on, and for several minutes after
you switch the ignition off.
Note: If you fold and unfold the mirrors
several times within one minute, the power
fold function may turn off to protect the
motors from overheating.
Switching Auto-fold On and Off
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Mirrors.
3. Switch Autofold on or off.
129
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Mirrors
Loose, Noisy or Intermittently Working
Mirrors
If you manually fold the power folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you reposition them. Reset the mirrors
if:
• They vibrate when you drive.
• They feel loose.
• They do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
• The mirrors are intermittently working.
To reset the power fold feature, use the
power folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Operate the power folding
mirrors an additional 3 to 4 times to
synchronize the mirrors.
If the above process does not help you to fix
the mirror, perform the following steps.
1. Fold or retract both mirrors manually.
2. Using the power folding control switch,
operate the mirrors until you hear an
audible click.
3. Operate the power folding an additional
3 to 4 times to synchronize the mirrors.
Repeat this process as needed each time
you manually fold the mirrors.
AUTO-DIMMING EXTERIOR MIRROR
(IF EQUIPPED)
WHAT IS THE AUTO-DIMMING
EXTERIOR MIRROR
The driver exterior mirror dims when the
interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Personal
Profiles (page 519).
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Switching the Heated Mirrors On and
Off (page 139).
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Lincoln Welcome Mat (If Equipped)
Projection lights, on the bottom of the mirror
housings, project an image onto the ground
a short distance from the vehicle.
Blind Spot Monitor
See What Is Blind Spot Information System
(page 310).
360 Degree Camera (If Equipped)
See What Is the 360 Degree Camera (page
259).
130
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exterior Mirrors
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUNSHADE
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
remote control unattended in the vehicle.
Children or pets could operate the
sunshade and get caught in a closing
sunshade. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle and do not
let children play with the sunshade. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
The controls are on the overhead console.
Opening the Sunshade
E312249
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch open
feature. To stop movement, press
the switch a second time. The sunshade also
opens when you open the glass roof.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To fully open the sunshade,
press the switch again.
Closing the Sunshade
WARNING: When closing the
sunshade, verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure children and
pets are not in the proximity of the
sunshade. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: If an obstruction is
detected, press the switch a second time
and reverse the sunshade immediately.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
E312250
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch close
feature. To stop movement, press
the switch a second time.
Note: If fully open, the sunshade stops after
covering the rear glass panel. Press and
release again to fully close the sunshade.
Note: If the glass roof is either in the open
or vent position and the sunshade is in the
mid-open position, press and release the
switch to close the glass roof first and then
the sunshade.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
GLASS ROOF
WARNING: Do not allow anyone to
stand or place any portion of their body
through the open glass roof while the
vehicle is in motion. Make sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and properly
using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious injury or
death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle and do not
let children play with the glass roof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
131
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Glass Roof
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
remote control unattended in the vehicle.
Children or pets could operate the glass
roof and could become trapped in a
closing glass roof. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The controls are on the overhead console.
Opening the Glass Roof
E312251
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch open
feature. To stop movement, press
the switch a second time.
Note: The glass roof stops short of the fully
opened position to reduce wind noise or
rumbling that may happen with the glass
roof fully open.
Press and release the switch again to fully
open the glass roof.
Closing the Glass Roof
WARNING: When closing the glass
roof, verify that it is free of obstructions
and make sure children and pets are not
in the proximity of the glass roof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If an obstruction is
detected, release the switch and reverse
the glass roof immediately. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
E312252
Press and release the switch to
activate the one-touch close
feature, from either the open or
vent positions. To stop movement, press the
switch a second time.
VENTING THE GLASS ROOF
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle and do not
let children play with the glass roof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
The glass roof controls are on the overhead
console.
E312252
With the glass roof in the closed
position, press and release the
switch to vent the glass roof. To
close the glass roof from the vent position,
press and release the switch again.
GLASS ROOF BOUNCE-BACK
WHAT IS GLASS ROOF BOUNCE-BACK
The glass roof stops and reverses some
distance if it detects an obstacle when
closing.
132
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Glass Roof
OVERRIDING GLASS ROOF BOUNCE-
BACK
Press and hold the close switch within two
seconds after the glass roof comes to a stop.
133
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Glass Roof
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
OVERVIEW
Note: The instrument cluster display can be
customized to display information in several
different layouts. Maximum zone complexity
shown.
Note: The instrument cluster display changes
based on feature settings selected in the
touchscreen or set with steering wheel
controls.
E422128
Fuel gauge.A
Tachometer.B
Automatic transmission position indicators.C
Engine coolant temperature gauge.D
Outside air temperature.E
Odometer.F
Pop-up message display area.G
Speedometer.H
134
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Instrument Cluster
Advanced driver assistance systems display area.I
Steering wheel function display area.J
Distance to empty.K
TACHOMETER
Indicates the engine speed.
SPEEDOMETER
Indicates the vehicle speed.
FUEL GAUGE
WHAT IS THE FUEL GAUGE
Indicates approximately how much fuel is in
the fuel tank.
FUEL GAUGE LIMITATIONS
The fuel gauge may not provide an accurate
reading when your vehicle is on an incline.
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER DOOR
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of your vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
WHAT IS THE LOW FUEL REMINDER
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty reaches
50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km)
and 0 mi (0 km).
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
WHAT IS DISTANCE TO EMPTY
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but also
increase or stay constant for periods of time.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
Indicates the engine coolant temperature.
135
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Instrument Cluster
ACCESSING THE TRIP COMPUTER
1. Access the instrument panel display
screen.
2. Press and drag a trip tile to the active tile
area.
RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER
The trip tile must be in the active tile area to
reset it.
1. Access the instrument panel display
screen. See Customizing the Instrument
Panel Display (page 507).
2. Press the trip tile in the active tile area.
3. Press reset.
136
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trip Computer
USING REMOTE START
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power outlet
whenever the device is not in use. Power
outlets power up during remote start.
The system allows you to remotely start your
vehicle to heat or cool the interior to a preset
temperature.
Follow the instructions in the vehicle app to
start and stop your vehicle.
Note: The vehicle app must be paired with
your vehicle to remotely start using the app.
Note: Depending on your vehicle app, you
may need to be within a certain range for
the vehicle to successfully remote start.
When you successfully remote start your
vehicle:
• The vehicle doors lock.
• The turn signal lamps flash twice.
• The parking lamps turn on when the
vehicle is running.
• The vehicle remains secured when you
have remotely started the vehicle. A valid
key must be inside your vehicle to switch
your vehicle on and drive your vehicle.
• All other vehicle systems remain off when
you have remotely started the vehicle.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: You cannot adjust any comfort settings
until you switch your vehicle on from inside
your vehicle.
Remote start does not work under the
following conditions:
• Remote start is not enabled.
• The alarm horn is sounding.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• Your vehicle is already on.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
Note: A maximum of two remote starts are
allowed. After that you have to switch your
vehicle on and off before you can use
remote start again.
REMOTE START SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Remote Start Setup.
You can adjust the following in the remote
start settings menu:
• Enable or disable remote start.
• Climate control settings.
• Heated seat settings.
• Heated steering wheel settings.
• Remote start duration.
137
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Remote Start
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
E422652
Depending on your vehicle options, the
controls could look different than what you
see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
E265283
Press the button to access the
climate controls.
Press the button.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED AIR
ON AND OFF
E265283
Press the button to access the
climate controls.
Press the button to recirculate air
currently in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to
improve heating or cooling efficiency.
SWITCHING AIR CONDITIONING
ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air
conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
Note: To keep the system and its
components fully functional, switch air
conditioning on and let your vehicle idle at
least once per month for a minimum of two
minutes.
SWITCHING DEFROST ON AND
OFF
E265283
Press the button to access the
climate controls.
Press the button.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM DEFROST
ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
the temperature is set to the highest setting,
and the blower motor adjusts to the highest
speed.
138
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window and heated
mirrors also turn on when you select
maximum defrost.
Note: When maximum defrost is on, the air
conditioning compressor may continue to
operate even though you switch off the A/C.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM COOLING
ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
SWITCHING THE HEATED REAR
WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off after
a short period of time.
Note: This button also activates the heated
mirrors.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
Press the button to switch the
blower motor on.
E328451
Slide the control to set the blower
motor speed.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. See
Switching the Heated Rear Window On and
Off (page 139).
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
Note: The engine must be running or your
vehicle must be ready to drive to switch the
system on.
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
E402501
Adjusting the arrows on either side
of the climate control sets the
temperature for the respective
sides.
139
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
< Press the arrow to decrease the
temperature.
> Press the arrow to increase the
temperature.
Note: The blue arrow decreases and the red
arrow increases the temperature. Pressing
the temperature value allows you to control
it using the slider.
E413046
Press the button to switch dual
mode on.
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Electromechanical registers
Electromechanical registers allow airflow
direction to be controlled through the
touchscreen.
E429277
Directing the flow of air on driver and
passenger side:
E406615
Drag the airflow line to change the
airflow direction.
E406616
Press this button to direct the
airflow direction onto the body.
E406617
Press this button to direct the
airflow direction away from the
body.
E406618
Press this button to allow the
airflow to sweep (if equipped).
E406619
Drag the airflow line down to the
close area or use the close button
to shut down the registers.
Touching the related area opens the register.
When in free adjustment mode, you can
change the direction from any of the air vents
by dragging the relevant register areas in
the touchscreen.
To cancel the airflow sweep function,
do one of the following: (If Equipped)
• Touch/adjust the register manually.
• Select the different motion options.
• Press the close icon on the menu.
Note: Do not block the air vents when they
are moving. Once blocked, drag the airflow
direction and clear out the obstacle.
Note: Airflow sweep mode may not work
when climate control is powered off/on. If
this happens, manually turn on airflow sweep
(if equipped).
140
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
Note: When the climate system is set to
AUTO mode, there may be no airflow
through the electromechanical registers, but
the registers may continue to sweep if
equipped with sweeping registers. This is
normal. See Climate Control Hints (page
142).
Note: Electromechanical registers may
continue to work for a certain time after the
vehicle is powered off. This is normal.
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
E422540
Press this climate control button
on the touchscreen to direct air to
the windshield air vents.
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel
Air Vents
E244097
Press this climate control button
on the touchscreen to direct air to
the instrument panel air vents.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents
E244098
Press this climate control button
on the touchscreen to direct air to
the footwell air vents.
LOCKING THE REAR PASSENGER
CLIMATE CONTROLS
To access the rear climate lockout menu:
1. From the controls menu, press Parental
Controls.
2.
E422115
Press rear climate to lock and
unlock the controls.
AUTO MODE
SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND
OFF
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Note: When you switch auto mode on, lights
on the blower motor control do not illuminate
to indicate the blower motor speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode off.
AUTO MODE INDICATORS
The indicators are on the Auto Mode button.
141
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator Status
The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from the
blower motor. This setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
One indicator illuminated.
The blower motor speed is moderate.Two indicators illuminated.
The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the interior.
This setting increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
Three indicators illuminated.
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS
General Hints
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air from
the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air
always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the
air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
• To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
• Adjusting the settings when your vehicle
interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. Automatic mode is best
recommended to maintain set
temperature.
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the
interior to the temperature you select as
quickly as possible.
• For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
142
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
• If you press AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs air flow
to the windshield and side window air
vents.In addition, the blower motor may
run at a slower speed until the engine
warms up.
• If you press AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system uses
recirculated air to maximize interior
cooling. Blower motor speed may also
reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Your vehicle has an under hood label that
identifies the refrigerant used by the air
conditioning system.
Note: Only allow a trained and certified
technician service the refrigerant system to
ensure proper and safe operation, per the
society of automotive engineers J2845.
Note: Never repair or replace the air
conditioning evaporator with one from a
salvage vehicle. Only replace it with a new
evaporator to ensure proper and safe
operation.
The meaning of each symbol on the under
hood label are as follows:
143
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
E429212
Caution
E429213
Air conditioning system.
E429214
System lubricant type.
E429215
See vehicle service manual for
service information.
E429216
Requires registered technician to
service.
E429217
Flammable refrigerant.
E429218
Replace safety system
components. Do not repair, reuse
or try to salvage.
144
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Climate Control
IDENTIFYING THE REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
E419173
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls could look different
from what you see here.
SWITCHING THE REAR
PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
ON AND OFF
Press and release the button to
switch the rear climate control on
or off.
Note: If the system is on and Max Defrost is
switched on through the front climate
controls, the system turns off. It turns back
on when Max Defrost is switched off.
Note: If Max Defrost is switched on, the
system can be turned on at the same time.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED
Press the buttons on the touchscreen to
adjust the volume of air circulated in the rear
passenger compartment.
E356421
E356422
145
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Passenger Climate Control
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
Press the buttons on the touchscreen to set
the temperature in the rear passenger
compartment.
E356421
E356422
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
Directing Air to the Rear Console Air
Vents
E244097
Press the button on the
touchscreen to direct airflow to the
rear console air vents.
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air
Vents
E244098
Press the button on the
touchscreen to direct airflow to
rear footwell air vents.
Note: Air can be directed through any
combination of air vents.
REAR AUTO MODE
SWITCHING REAR AUTO MODE ON
AND OFF
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch rear
automatic operation on, then set
the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed,
air distribution, air conditioning operation to
reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROL INDICATORS
E422115
Illuminates when the rear climate
controls are locked through the
front climate controls.
Note: If the rear climate controls are locked
and the rear climate system is turned off, the
indicator illuminates for a few seconds when
you try to use any of the rear climate
controls.
146
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Passenger Climate Control
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of air
in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen and
other particles.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
AUTO AIR REFRESH
WHAT IS AUTO AIR REFRESH
Auto air refresh helps improve or maintain
the quality of air within your vehicle cabin.
HOW DOES AUTO AIR REFRESH
WORK
Auto air refresh uses an external air quality
sensor and a cabin particulate matter sensor
to automatically adjust the climate control
system to change from outside air to
recirculated air, to help reduce outside odors
and particulate matter into the cabin. The
particulate matter sensor also estimates and
provides information about particulate matter
pollution in the cabin. Auto air refresh allows
you to refresh the cabin air with outside air
by pressing a dedicated button.
CHECKING THE INTERIOR AIR
QUALITY
E265283
Press the button on the
touchscreen.
E401833
Press Auto Air Refresh icon.
Note: The icon may change depending on
the current PM2.5 concentration.
Particulate Matter Pollution
Information
Press Help for more information about
particulate matter pollution.
The numbers provided by the cabin's PM2.5
sensor are estimates of the concentration of
particles in the cabin air. The measurement
unit is µg/m3, representing mass (micrograms
of particulates) per unit of air volume (cubic
meter of air).
The colors around the PM2.5 numbers
provide visual cues about the concentration
levels.
Note: PM2.5 is only one pollution type
contributing to an Air Quality Index and by
itself does not represent the Air Quality
Index.
AUTO AIR REFRESH INDICATORS
The indicator area is on the touchscreen
feature bar and displays one of the following:
E324585
Indicates the PM2.5 concentration
is low and blower motor is on for
filtering.
147
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Air Quality
E283817
Indicates the PM2.5 concentration
is not low and blower motor is on
for filtering.
E324586
Indicates the blower motor is off.
E324587
Indicates the particulate matter
sensor is temporarily unavailable
(severe environmental conditions)
or sensor needs service.
MANUALLY REFRESHING THE
INTERIOR AIR
E265283
Press the button on the
touchscreen.
1. Press Auto Air Refresh.
2. Press Cabin Refresh.
Note: Climate control settings could change
for about 90 seconds to help flow outside
air into the cabin. You can change the
blower motor speed to the settings you
prefer.
AUTOMATICALLY REFRESHING THE
INTERIOR AIR
If the cabin air recirculates continuously for
longer than 35 minutes, climate control
settings could change automatically for about
90 seconds to help flow outside air into the
cabin.
Refreshing the Interior Air Upon Cabin
Start
If the cabin is above 75°F (24°C) and the
engine has been off for over 30 minutes,
when you start the engine the climate control
system settings could change for
approximately 75 seconds to help flow
outside air into the cabin.
Note: Refreshing may also occur if the
climate control and blower motor were
previously on.
Refreshing the Interior Air Upon
Remote Start
If the cabin is above 75°F (24°C) while parked
for over 30 minutes, when you remote start
the engine the climate control system
settings could change for approximately 75
seconds to help flow outside air into the
cabin.
AUTO AIR REFRESH HINTS
To further improve the air quality in the cabin:
• Adjust the windows and other cabin
openings such as the glass roof.
• Adjust the climate control air recirculation
setting.
• Adjust the climate control blower fan
speed.
• Replace the cabin air filter at regular
intervals.
148
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Air Quality
DIGITAL SCENT
Digital scent provides a certain type and
intensity of scent in the cabin. There are
three different scents in your vehicle.
How Digital Scent Works
The three scent cartridges are stored inside
the front armrest and can be activated
through the center display.
Digital scent works under the following
conditions:
• The ignition is on.
• The scent cartridge is not empty.
• The scent cartridge is Lincoln authorized.
• The temperature of the scent cartridge
is below 139.9°F (60°C) and above 14.0°F
(-10°C).
Using Digital Scent
1. Open the Digital Scent screen on your
touchscreen.
Note: This screen displays the scent names,
scent intensity and remaining life of each
scent cartridge.
2. Select the scent you prefer to turn it on.
3.
Press the power button next to
the scent name to turn it off.
Note: The power button is not visible unless
Digital Scent is on.
4. Press the indicators next to the scent
name to adjust the intensity.
Note: The scent and level selections are
stored for the currently active driver profile.
E366956
Press the button for more
information on purchasing
additional scents.
Digital Scent Settings
1. Open the Digital Scent screen on your
touchscreen.
2. Press the settings icon.
From this menu you can do the following:
• Select a frequency type.
• Switch Diffuse at vehicle start on or off.
Note: These settings are stored for the
currently active driver profile.
Replacing a Digital Scent Cartridge
E394865
1. Open the center console.
2. Press the cartridge replace button on the
scent cartridge unit inside the front
armrest to open the tray.
3. Remove the empty cartridge and insert
the new cartridge.
4. Close the tray.
149
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Air Quality
Digital Scent - Information Messages
DetailsMessage
Displays below the
scent name when
the scent level in a
cartridge becomes
lower than 25%.
Low
Displays below the
scent name when
the scent level in a
cartridge reaches
0%.
Empty
The system reactiv-Scent Limited By
DetailsMessage
Temperature ates once the
temperature reaches
the operable limit.
Displays as scent
name when there is
no cartridge
installed.
No Cartridge
Detected
Displays as scent
name when the
installed cartridge is
not an authorized
product.
Cartridge Not
Recognized
INTERIOR AIR QUALITY –
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTERIOR AIR QUALITY –
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
not all messages display or are available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
ActionMessage
Allow time for the cabin PM2.5 sensor to cool down, warm up, or dry
out.
Status not available
150
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Interior Air Quality
USING REJUVENATE
WARNING: Do not use the feature
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. The engine runs continuously while
the feature is active. Exhaust fumes are
toxic. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
This feature, when activated, switches on
multiple vehicle features at the same time to
give a refreshing experience that targets
multiple senses.
The system does not operate in any of the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is not in park (P).
• The vehicle is off.
• Any door is open.
• The driver seat cannot recline due to the
second row seats being folded forward
or slid too close to the front seats.
Note: If any of the above occur while an
experience is active, the session cancels
and returns all feature settings to their
previous settings.
From the apps menu, press Rejuvenate.
Rejuvenate Interface and Functions
E417162
151
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rejuvenate
Theme icons.A
Settings.B
Theme description.C
Preview.D
Start buttons.E
Selecting a Theme
1. Select a theme. Each theme selection
activates predefined settings for multiple
vehicle features.
Note: Additional themes are available and
can be downloaded via the Google Play
store.
2. Press a start button with the duration you
prefer.
Note: The available durations may vary
depending on the theme selected.
3. Press Stop while the experience is
running to stop it.
If a scent cartridge is low or empty, it can be
replaced.
Previewing a Theme
To view a preview of the experience without
starting it:
1. Press Preview.
Note: The icons represent the features that
are part of the experience.
2. Press the back button to go back to the
main screen.
Settings
Press the settings button to adjust the
following settings:
• Scent preferences.
• Audio preferences.
• Seat preferences.
Note: You can change these settings before
beginning an experience or while it is
running.
Note: If you change the position of your seat
during a Rejuvenate experience, those
positions save when you complete the
session. The next time you use Rejuvenate,
the seat positions from your previous session
are used.
152
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rejuvenate
FRONT SEAT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death in the event of
a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees from
the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
153
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt
over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
POWER SEATS
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
E327921
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button - if equipped.
D
ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head restraints
for all passengers before you drive your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraints when your
vehicle is moving.
To raise the head restraint, pull the head
restraint up.
To lower the head restraint:
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To tilt the head restraint - if equipped:
154
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
E420052
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the preferred position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
Adjusting the Head Restraint Bolster (If
Equipped)
E370253
Pull the front portion of the head restraint
forward.
Power Head Restraints (If Equipped)
E419982
You can adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold the adjust and release
button and the unlock and remove
button.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Note: You cannot remove head restraints
that have audio system speakers.
155
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
INSTALLING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD AND
FORWARD
E308339
Moving the Chauffeur Seat Backward
and Forward
You can control the front passenger seat
forward and backward movement by using
the touchscreen controls in the second-row
seating area.
ADJUSTING THE SEAT CUSHION
E421766
You can also adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
Adjusting the Length of the Seat
Cushion
E419981
You can adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
156
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
E419978
You can adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
Adjusting the Upper Seat Backrest
E419979
You can adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
ADJUSTING THE SEAT HEIGHT
E308337
157
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
ADJUSTING THE LUMBAR SUPPORT
E420387
You can adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
MASSAGE SEATS
MASSAGE SEAT LIMITATIONS
The vehicle must be running or be in
accessory mode to activate the seats.
The passenger side massage is available if
the occupant meets the seat sensor weight
requirements.
Allow a few seconds for any selection to
activate. Selecting a different adjustment
cancels the current one in progress. When
the seat backrest and cushion are both
active, the massage alternates between
zones.
ADJUSTING THE MASSAGE SEAT
SETTINGS
E156301
Select the previous massage
pattern or lumbar area.
A
Decrease the massage or lumbar
Intensity.
B
Select the next massage pattern
or lumbar area.
C
Increase the massage or lumbar
Intensity.
D
Select the massage or lumbar
mode.
E
You can also adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
HEATED SEATS
HEATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions. The heated
seat could cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
158
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything on
the seat that blocks the heat, for example
a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause
the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry.
SWITCHING THE HEATED SEATS ON
AND OFF
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: The heated seats may remain on after
you remote start your vehicle, based on your
remote start settings. The heated seats may
also turn on when you start your vehicle if
they were on when you switched your
vehicle off.
Automatic Climate Controlled Seats (If
Equipped)
When you switch the auto setting on, the
climate controlled seats switch between the
heated seats and ventilated seats to match
your climate control setting.
VENTILATED SEATS
VENTILATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
Do not:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
SWITCHING THE VENTILATED SEATS
ON AND OFF
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
E224689
159
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
Press this symbol on the climate controls or
the touchscreen to cycle through the various
ventilation settings and off. More indicator
lights indicate higher fan speeds.
Note: When you switch the climate control
fan speed and the ventilated seats to their
maximum settings, the ventilated seats
provide increased cooling.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
ventilated seats are on, the feature turns
itself off unless the vehicle is in
Auto-Start-Stop mode. You may need to
reactivate the ventilated seats.
Note: The ventilated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The ventilated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
160
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Seats
MANUAL SEATS
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
The second row outermost head restraints
are not adjustable or foldable.
E354503
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Second and Third Row Center Head
Restraint
E138645
The head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you may be able to fold
them.
E193964
161
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
The head restraints consist of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure.
• A fold button, if equipped.
ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head restraints
for all passengers before you drive your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraints when your
vehicle is moving.
For the second and third row center head
restraint, pull the head restraint up to raise
it.
To lower the head restraint:
1. Press and hold the guide sleeve adjust
and release button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
To fold the third row outermost head
restraints:
1. Press the fold button.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it back
to the upright position.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
For the second and third row outermost head
restraints:
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold the guide sleeve unlock
and remove button.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
For the second and third row center head
restraints:
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold guide sleeve adjust and
release button and the guide sleeve
unlock and remove button.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
INSTALLING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
162
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD AND
FORWARD
E419847
Lift the handle to move the second row seat
forward or backward.
Note: Move the seat forward to keep a child
in a child restraint close to the front seat
occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST
WARNING: Reclining the seatback
can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
E419844
The release handle is on the outermost side
of the seat cushion. Lift it to adjust the seat
backrest to your preferred position.
Adjusting the Center Seat Backrest
E419845
The release strap is on the top of the seat
backrest. Lift it to adjust the seat backrest to
your preferred position.
163
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
FOLDING THE SEAT BACKREST
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make sure
that the seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.
E419983
1. Locate the handle on the outermost side
of the seat cushion.
2. Pull up on the handle to fold the seat
backrest.
Note: Use caution when folding the seat
backrest to the flat position as the seat
moves forward when you lift the release
handle.
Folding the Third Row Center Seat (If
Equipped)
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make sure
that the seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.
E419907
The release strap is on the upper right seat
backrest. Pull the strap to release the folding
seat latch.
Note: Use the same release strap to recline
the seat backrest.
UNFOLDING THE SEATS
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
164
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
E419843
1. Lift the seat backrest toward the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seat backrest until it engages,
locking it in the upright position.
ACCESSING THE THIRD ROW SEATS
WARNING: Make sure that the seats
and the seat backrests are secure and fully
locked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
Note: You can move the outermost seats
forward to allow access to the seats in the
third row.
This feature allows for easier entry and exit
to and from the third row seat.
E419905
1. Press the button on the top of the seat
backrest.
2. Tilt the entire seat forward.
3. Slide the seat forward until it stops.
To return the seat to the seating position,
slide the seat rearward while pulling down
on the seat backrest until the latch fully
engages.
165
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
To move the seat further back, pull the lever
under the front of the seat and slide it
backward.
Note: You can slide the outermost seats
forward when using a child restraint.
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost
Seats for Easy Exit
E419906
When exiting your vehicle from the third row
seats, press the button on the top of the seat
backrest. Then, push the seat forward until
it stops.
Note: If your vehicle loses power, pull the
release strap at the rear of the seats.
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
The second row outermost head restraints
are not adjustable or foldable.
166
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
E354503
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Second and Third Row Center Head
Restraint
E138645
The head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
167
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
WARNING: Adjust the head restraints
for all passengers before you drive your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraints when your
vehicle is moving.
For the second and third-row center head
restraint, pull the head restraint up to raise
it.
To lower the head restraint:
1. Press and hold the adjust and release
button.
2. Push the head restraint down.
E272543
Press the button on the head restraint or the
button on the overhead console to fold the
third-row outermost head restraints. Pull the
head restraint up to place it in the upright
position.
Note: These head restraints fold when you
press the fold flat button.
REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
For the second row outermost head
restraints:
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold the guide sleeve unlock
and remove button.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
The third row outermost head restraints are
fixed and cannot be removed.
For the second and third row center head
restraints:
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold guide sleeve adjust and
release button and the guide sleeve
unlock and remove button.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
INSTALLING THE HEAD RESTRAINT
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
168
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD AND
FORWARD
E421612
ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST
WARNING: Do not recline a rear seat
on which a child restraint is installed.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the child
restraint.
The third-row power recline buttons are on
the quarter trim panel on each side of the
vehicle.
E246706
Moves the seat backrest rearward.A
Moves the seat backrest forward.B
Adjusting the Second Row Seat
Backrest (If Equipped)
E420273
FOLDING THE SEAT BACKREST (If
Equipped)
The control buttons are on the left-hand rear
quarter trim panel and are accessible from
the liftgate area.
169
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
Second-Row Bench Seats
E257920
Second-Row Captain Chairs
E246705
Folds the left-hand third-row seat.A
Folds both third-row seats.B
Folds the right-hand third-row seat.C
Folds the left-hand second-row
seat.
D
Folds the second-row bench
center seat or both second-row
captain chair seats.
E
Folds the right-hand second-row
seat.
F
Third-Row Seats
E422644
Folds the left-hand third-row seat.A
Folds both third-row seats.B
Folds the right-hand third-row seat.C
170
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
Note: The power fold seats operate for 10
minutes after you switch the ignition off. The
transmission must be in park (P) and the
liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open.
Similar to the battery saver feature, the
power rear seats disable 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off.
Note: Be sure the third-row center head
restraint is in the lowered position before
you power the rear seats down. The
third-row outermost head restraints fold
automatically when you press the fold
button.
UNFOLDING THE SEAT BACKREST (If
Equipped)
To return the second-row seat backrest to
the original position, rotate the seat backrest
up until it latches in the upright position. The
seat backrest clicks when it is locked into
position.
To return the third-row seat backrest to the
original position, press the corresponding
control again.
Note: If the third row seat does not
completely fold or unfold, press and hold the
seat button until the seat folds and unfolds
twice.
If the power rear seat is disabled after 10
minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Switching the ignition on.
Folding Down the Rear Seats to the
Load Floor
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make sure
that the seatbelts are not fastened before
folding the seatback.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
The third-row seats have obstacle detection
that prevents the seats from folding or
returning if they are obstructed.
ACCESSING THE THIRD ROW SEATS
WARNING: Make sure that the seats
and the seat backrests are secure and fully
locked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
171
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
E421777
Press the button on the side of the seat
backrest to tilt the seat and move it forward.
To return the seat to the original position,
press the corresponding control. You can
also activate this feature through the
touchscreen.
E422010
If your vehicle loses power, third row
occupants may exit the vehicle by pulling the
strap on the rear of the second-row seat
backrest. This pitches the seat forward.
MASSAGE SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
MASSAGE SEAT LIMITATIONS
The engine must be running or the vehicle
must be in accessory mode to activate the
seats.
This feature is disabled when the child safety
locks are on.
Allow a few seconds for any selection to
activate. Selecting a different adjustment
cancels the current one in progress. When
the seat backrest and cushion are both
active, the massage alternates between
zones.
172
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
ADJUSTING THE MASSAGE SEAT
SETTINGS
E156301
Select the previous massage
pattern or lumbar area.
A
Decrease the massage or lumbar
intensity.
B
Select the next massage pattern
or lumbar area.
C
Increase the massage or lumbar
intensity.
D
Select the massage or lumbar
mode.
E
You can adjust this feature through the rear
touchscreen.
Note: Do not use massage seats on the rear
seats when using a child restraint, or if there
are hard objects on the seat. Failure to
follow this instruction can cause damage to
the system.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
HEATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions. The heated
seat could cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything on
the seat that blocks the heat, for example
a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause
the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry.
SWITCHING THE HEATED SEATS ON
AND OFF
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
173
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
The second and third-row heated seat
controls are on the rear of the center
console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: The heated seats may remain on after
you remote start your vehicle, based on your
remote start settings. The heated seats may
also turn on when you start your vehicle if
they were on when you switched your
vehicle off.
VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
VENTILATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS
Do not:
• Spill liquid on the seats. This may cause
the air vent holes to become blocked and
not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
SWITCHING THE VENTILATED SEATS
ON AND OFF
The vehicle must be running to use this
feature.
E224689
Press this symbol on the climate controls or
the rear touchscreen to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
Note: When you switch the climate control
fan speed and the ventilated seats to their
maximum settings, the ventilated seats
provide increased cooling.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
ventilated seats are on, the feature switches
itself off unless the vehicle is in
Auto-Start-Stop mode. You may need to
reactivate the ventilated seats.
Note: The ventilated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The ventilated
seats may also switch on when you start
your vehicle if they were on when you
switched your vehicle off.
174
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Seats
WHAT IS THE REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM
The rear occupant alert system monitors
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check
for rear seat occupants when you switch the
ignition off. The notifications can be in the
form of warnings inside the vehicle and
sounding of the horn if activated for a short
period of time.
HOW DOES THE REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM WORK
The system monitors the activity of the
buckle on the rear seatbelt and the opening
and closing of the rear doors to indicate the
potential presence of an occupant in the rear
seat.
When Child Seat Installed is selected, the
system monitors only the opening and
closing of the rear doors to indicate the
potential presence of an occupant in the rear
seat.
When Child Seat Installed is not selected,
the system monitors the rear seatbelt buckle
activity and the opening and closing of the
rear doors to indicate the potential presence
of an occupant in the rear seat.
A message displays in the touchscreen and
an audible warning sounds when you switch
the ignition off after any of the following
conditions have been met:
• A rear door is opened or closed while
the ignition is on.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of a rear door opening and
closing.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed or
sounded.
If you do not open a rear door within a short
period of time of the message appearing in
the center display, the first audible warning
sounding and driver door open to close, the
horn sounds for a short period of time.
Note: Horn sounds only when the Rear
Occupant Alert is set to Alert & Horn. If you
change the setting, then there is no horn
sound.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or animals
to these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The system does not detect the presence of
objects or passengers in the rear seat. It
monitors the activity of the buckle on the rear
seatbelt and the opening and closing of the
rear doors.
175
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Occupant Alert System
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
conditions are met.
Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
through a rear door.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Rear Occupant Alert.
3. Select Alert & Horn or Alert Only or Off.
Note: The default setting is Alert Only.
Note: If you choose Alert only, the horn does
not sound even when the alert conditions
are met.
Note: Performing a system reset causes the
system to switch on again.
Switching Child Seat Installed On and
Off
When the system is switched on, it monitors
the opening and closing of the rear doors to
indicate the potential presence of an
occupant in the rear seat.
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press Rear Occupant Alert.
3. Switch Child Seat Installed on or off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Switch the system on when the child restraint
is mounted on any of the following:
• Forward facing seat.
• Rear facing seat.
• Toddler in a LATCH system child seat.
Switch the system off when the child is using
any of the following:
• Seatbelt.
• Booster seat.
Semiannual Reminder
When you switch the system off, a message
appears every six months as a reminder that
the system is off. You can switch the system
back on or leave it off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
INDICATORS
E350472
176
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Occupant Alert System
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch the power off after
the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
Note: Depending on your center display
system version, the graphic may look
different from what you see here.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The first audible warning is an alert tone
within the vehicle, which sounds when you
switch your vehicle off after the alert
conditions are met. The warning sounds for
a short period of time.
The second audible warning is from the horn.
It sounds when you do not open a rear door
within a short period of time of the message
appearing in the center display, the first
audible warning sounding, and driver door
open to close. The warning sounds for a
short period of time.
177
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Occupant Alert System
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
INTRODUCTION
HomeLink Wireless Control System
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common handheld garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter integrated
into the driver-side sun visor.
E188211
How Does The Garage Door Opener
Work
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
You can program garage doors as well as
entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks and home or office lighting.
Garage Door Opener Limitations
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time out, or quit, after
several seconds – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal.
U.S. gate operators time-out in the same
manner.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
PRECAUTIONS AND
FREQUENCIES
Garage Door Opener Precautions
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
178
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Garage Door Opener
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. End Users must follow the
specific operating instructions for satisfying
RF exposure compliance. This transmitter
must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user
and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To clear all stored codes in the garage door
opener in your vehicle, use the clear
function. To override one button, use the
reprogram function.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Clearing the Garage Door Opener
E188213
To clear all stored codes in the garage door
opener in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the indicator above the
buttons flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator flashes, release the
buttons.
Note: This clears all stored codes. You
cannot erase individual buttons.
179
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Garage Door Opener
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after they have been initially
programmed, you must either clear all codes,
or reprogram each individual button.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons.
Reprogramming the Garage Door
Opener
If a button on your garage door opener has
already been programmed, you can override
it. To program a device to a previously
trained button:
1. Press and hold the desired button for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator begins to flash.
2. Without releasing the button, proceed to
Step 3 of Programming the Garage Door
Opener to your Handheld Transmitter.
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to your Handheld Transmitter
Note: The programming steps below assume
you are programming a HomeLink that was
not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to clear or reprogram your
HomeLink buttons.
Note: Put a new battery in the handheld
transmitter. This allows for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
E188213
To program your in-vehicle HomeLink
function button with your handheld
transmitter:
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your vehicle on, but do
not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release one of the three
HomeLink function buttons that you
would like to program.
Note: The indicator should begin to flash. If
the indicator does not flash, press and hold
the function button for 20 seconds until the
indicator begins to flash.
180
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Garage Door Opener
3. Hold your handheld garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
4. Press and hold the handheld transmitter
button you want to program while
watching the indicator on HomeLink.
Continue to hold the handheld button
until the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door.
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to your Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E188212
3. Press and hold one of the three
HomeLink function buttons you want to
program for two seconds, then release.
4. Repeat Step 3. Depending on your brand
of garage door opener, you may need to
repeat this sequence a third time.
181
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Garage Door Opener
Programming the Garage Door Opener
to your Gate Opener Motor
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised that you
unplug the device during the cycling process
to prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release your handheld
transmitter, every two seconds, until the
HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly or is
continuously on.
2. Release the handheld transmitter button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need to
do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
4. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
182
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Garage Door Opener
LOCATING THE USB PORTS
Data Transfer USB Ports
E250655
The USB ports could be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
Note: These USB ports can also charge
devices.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Charge Only USB Ports
E263583
The USB ports could be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• On the upper instrument panel.
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• Behind the first row seats.
• In the cargo area.
PLAYING MEDIA USING THE USB
PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Connect your device to a data transfer USB
port.
E100027
Press the audio button on the
feature bar.
Select Sources.
Select the USB option.
Press to play a track. Press again
to pause the track.
Press to skip to the next track.
Press and hold to fast forward
through the track.
Press once to return to the
beginning of a track. Repeatedly
press to return to previous tracks.
183
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
USB Ports
Press and hold to fast rewind.
CHARGING A DEVICE
Connect your device to the USB port.
Data Transfer USB Ports
E250655
You can charge your device through the data
transfer USB port when the touchscreen is
on.
Charge Only USB Ports
E263583
You can charge your device through the
charge only USB port when the vehicle is in
accessory mode or when the vehicle is
running.
184
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
USB Ports
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet is a socket that connects
an electrical device to your vehicle's power
supply.
POWER OUTLET PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged into the power outlet
whenever the device is not in use. The
outlet provides power when the vehicle is
on. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use an extension
cord or connect multiple devices to the
power outlet. Doing so could result in
overloading the power outlet. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in fire,
personal injury or property damage.
Note: The power outlet provides up to 400
Watts when the ignition is on. This wattage
is divided between multiple outlets when in
use at the same time.
Note: The power outlet turns off when you
switch off the ignition, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
POWER OUTLET LIMITATIONS
You should not use the power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws or other electric power tools
and compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices which process precise
data, such as medical equipment or
measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply, such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch sensor lamps.
Note: Some devices may exceed the power
rating on the device label when they are
initially plugged-in and may require you to
press the device power button more than
one time in order to allow a soft start. After
multiple attempts, if the device remains off,
please consider that your device may require
more than the available power.
Note: The power outlet provides full
available power when the vehicle is in park
(P). Power availability may be reduced when
the vehicle is in drive (D). If more than one
outlet is available in the vehicle, power is
divided between the outlets that are in use
at the same time.
LOCATING THE POWER OUTLETS
The power outlets are located on the rear of
the center console and in the cargo area.
185
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
E372643
POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
The power outlet indicator illuminates to let
you know the status of the system.
DescriptionIndicator Status
When the indicator
light is on, the outlet
is providing power.
On
When the indicator
light is off, there is
no power to the
outlet.
Off
When the indicator
light is flashing, the
outlet is in a fault
mode.
Flashing
Fault mode
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
if the device exceeds the watt limit.
1. Unplug your device.
2. Switch your vehicle off to let the system
cool and reset the fault mode.
3. Switch your vehicle back on, but do not
plug your device back in.
4. With your vehicle on, make sure the
indicator light remains on.
5. Make sure your device does not exceed
the power limits and then plug in your
device.
Note: If a fault occurs again, your device
may exceed the capacity available from the
power outlet.
186
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET
The power outlet can power devices using
a 12 V outlet adapter.
POWER OUTLET PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not plug electrical
devices into the power outlets that exceed
the maximum power rating. Incorrect use
of the power outlets can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty, and
can result in fire or personal injury.
When you switch the vehicle on, you can use
the power outlets to power 12 V appliances
with a maximum current rating of 15 A.
To prevent damage to the vehicle's battery:
• Do not use the power outlets over the
vehicle capacity of 12 V DC 180 W or a
fuse could blow.
• Do not plug in any device that supplies
power to the vehicle through the power
outlets. This could result in damage to
vehicle systems.
• Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug. Always keep the power
outlets caps closed when not in use.
• Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power outlets.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power outlets longer than
necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
• Using devices for extended periods may
require starting and running the engine
to recharge the battery.
LOCATING THE POWER OUTLETS
Power outlets may be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the front of the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
• 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.
187
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
The wireless accessory charger allows you
to charge one compatible Qi wireless
charging device on the charging area.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we recommend
that you consult with your physician.
WARNING: Remove all metal objects
like coins and keys from the charging
surface and remove any metal objects
attached to your mobile phone before
placing the device on the charging surface.
Some mobile devices or cases may attract
metal objects. Metal objects on the
charging surface or attached to the phone
may become hot while charging is active.
If an object is left on or near the charging
surface or attached to the phone while the
device is charging, let the objects cool
before removing to prevent personal injury.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip or
radio-frequency identification chip, for
example passports, parking tickets,
transportation passes or credit cards, near
the charging area when charging a device.
Damage could occur to the magnetic strip
or radio-frequency identification chip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy wrappers,
on or near the charging area when charging
a device. Metal objects may heat up and
degrade the charging performance, in
addition to causing interruptions in charging.
Charging could be interrupted, degraded, or
could stop if any of the following occur:
• The system detects a foreign object.
• The device is misaligned on the charging
area.
• The device moves on the active charging
area when the vehicle is in motion.
• The vehicle ambient temperature is too
high.
• You attempt to charge a non-Qi
compatible device on the wireless
charger.
Note: During charging, the device and the
charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
battery gets hotter than usual, the device
may stop charging.
LOCATING THE WIRELESS
ACCESSORY CHARGER
E297549
The charging area is on the center
console or in the media bin below
the instrument panel.
188
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wireless Accessory Charger
CHARGING A WIRELESS DEVICE
Place the device on the center of the
charging surface with the charging side
down. The charging stops after your device
reaches a full charge.
You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running or when the touchscreen is on.
E263583
Displays on the status bar when
wireless charging is in progress.
E372644
Displays on the status bar when
wireless charging has been
interrupted.
Note: The charging performance may be
affected if your device is in a case. It may be
necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
charge your device.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the use
of unofficial software or firmware. You should
verify charging functionality with your
specific devices in-vehicle.
189
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wireless Accessory Charger
OVERHEAD STORAGE
OPENING THE OVERHEAD STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
E419340
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
OPENING THE GLOVE
COMPARTMENT
E376068
Pull the latch to the left to open.
CENTER CONSOLE
OPENING THE CENTER CONSOLE
E417550
To open the center console storage
compartment, pull up on the handle.
190
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Storage
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
ENGINE – PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use starting fluid,
for example ether, in the air intake system.
Such fluid could cause immediate
explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine
idling for long periods, we recommend that
you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
E357998
Switching the Ignition Off
When the ignition is on or in accessory mode,
press the push button ignition switch once
without your foot on the brake pedal.
Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Mode
When the ignition is off, press the push
button ignition switch once without your foot
on the brake pedal.
All electrical circuits and accessories are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
191
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: Your vehicle has a battery saver
feature that shuts your vehicle off when it
detects a certain amount of battery drain, or
after approximately 30 minutes of inactivity
in accessory mode.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a
cell phone.
Note: You need a valid passive key inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure that the parking brake is on.
• Make sure that the transmission is in park
(P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
E357998
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for
up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: The engine takes longer to start at
lower temperatures. It may crank for several
seconds when very cold.
RESTARTING THE ENGINE AFTER
STOPPING IT
The system allows you to start the engine
within 10 seconds of switching it off, even if
it does not detect a valid passive key.
Within 10 seconds of switching the engine
off, fully press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 10 seconds,
you can no longer start the engine if the
system does not detect a valid passive key.
When you start the engine, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door when the engine is running, the system
searches for a valid passive key.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
192
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power cable
and may cause an electrical short resulting
in fire, injury and property damage.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and engine block
heater cord plug connections are free
and clear of water. This could cause an
electric shock or fire.
• If the engine block heater cord is under
the hood, do not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Park your vehicle in a clean area, clear
of combustible materials.
• Firmly connect the engine block heater
cord and the extension cord.
• Check the extension cord for heat
anywhere when the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Unplug and properly stow the system
before starting and driving your vehicle.
The protective cover seals the terminals
of the engine block heater cord plug
when not in use.
• Check the engine block heater system
for proper operation before winter.
HOW DOES THE ENGINE BLOCK
HEATER WORK
The engine block heater warms the engine
coolant. This allows the climate control
system to quickly respond. The equipment
includes a heater element installed in the
engine block and a wire harness. You can
connect the system to a grounded 110 volt
AC electrical source.
Note: The engine block heater is most
effective when outdoor temperatures are
below 0°F (-18°C). We recommend the use
of engine block heater to improve engine
cold start performance.
USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
193
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the engine block heater
longer than three hours does not improve
system performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN YOUR
VEHICLE IS STATIONARY
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Wait until the engine reaches idle speed.
E357998
4. Press the push button ignition switch.
STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN YOUR
VEHICLE IS MOVING
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when your vehicle is still moving results in
a significant decrease in braking
assistance. Higher effort is required to
apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle.
A significant decrease in steering
assistance could also occur. The steering
does not lock, but higher effort could be
required to steer your vehicle. When you
switch the ignition off, some electrical
circuits, for example airbags, also turn off.
If you unintentionally switch the ignition
off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the
engine.
Only in case of emergency, do the following:
E357998
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch until the engine stops, or press it
three times within two seconds.
2. Shift into neutral (N) and use the brakes
to safely bring your vehicle to a complete
stop.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Apply the parking brake.
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP
Automatic engine stop is a feature that
switches the engine off if it has been idling
for an extended period to help you save fuel.
194
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
HOW DOES AUTOMATIC ENGINE
STOP WORK
Automatic engine stop turns the engine off.
The ignition also turns off in order to save
battery power. Before the engine shuts
down, a message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting down. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the
engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to inform
you that the engine has shut down in order
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC ENGINE
STOP ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Switch 30min Max Idle on or off.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. If you switch it off,
it turns on each time you switch the ignition
on.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC ENGINE
STOP
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Pressing the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
• Pressing the OK or RESET button during
the countdown.
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns
on at the next ignition cycle.
ACCESSING THE PASSIVE KEY
BACKUP POSITION
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
E417379
1. Access the backup slot.
2. With the buttons facing the back of your
vehicle, place the passive key into the
backup slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
195
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
ENGINE – TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
ENGINE – WARNING LAMPS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
E67028
If it illuminates when the engine is
running, the on-board diagnostics
system is detecting a malfunction
of the vehicle emission control system.
If it flashes, engine misfire could be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration,
and have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Powertrain Warning Lamp
E415072
If it illuminates when the engine is
running, this indicates a powertrain
or four-wheel drive fault. If it
flashes when you are driving, immediately
reduce the vehicle speed. Avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration, and have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
If both lamps illuminate when the engine is
running, stop your vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so. Continuing to drive your
vehicle could cause reduced power or the
engine to stop. Switch the ignition off and
attempt to restart the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
E67022
It illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If it illuminates when
the engine is running, this indicates
a malfunction. Stop your vehicle and switch
the engine off. Check the engine oil level.
If the oil level is sufficient, this indicates a
system malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
196
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
Displays if you exceed the starting time limit. You cannot attempt to start the engine for 15 minutes.
If you cannot start the engine after 15 minutes passes, have your vehicle immediately checked.
Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays if you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key. The system has
detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Starting System Fault
Displays if the system does not detect a valid passive key.No Key Detected
197
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
ENGINE – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
Why is the engine idle speed high
when I start the engine?
• The speed the engine idles immediately
after starting is optimized to minimize
vehicle emissions and maximize cabin
comfort and fuel economy.
Why is the engine not cranking?
The engine will not crank if:
• The system does not detect a valid
passive key.
• The passive key battery has no charge.
• The vehicle battery does not have
sufficient charge.
• The brake pedal is not pressed for
automatic transmissions or the clutch
pedal is not pressed for manual
transmissions.
• The transmission is not in the park (P) or
neutral (N) for automatic transmissions.
• The starting system has been disabled
after multiple attempts of starting the
engine.
What should I do if the starting system
is disabled?
• You can only attempt to start the engine
for a set number of times before the
starting system temporarily disables. If
you exceed the limit, a message may
appear and you need to wait at least 15
minutes to start the engine again.
What should I do if the engine does not
start?
• If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the
following:
1. Fully press the brake pedal for automatic
transmissions or clutch pedal for manual
transmissions.
Note: Make sure that the parking brake is
applied.
Note: Make sure that the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N) for automatic
transmissions.
2. Fully press and hold the accelerator
pedal.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
See Push Button Ignition Switch (page
191).
Note: The engine cranks for a short period
of time and then stops.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
5. Press the push button ignition switch.
See Push Button Ignition Switch (page
191).
Why do I experience different driving
characteristics?
• If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for about 5 mi (8 km) after
you reconnect it. This is because the
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard
any unusual driving characteristics during
this period.
198
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Why does the system not detect a
passive key?
• If the system does not detect a passive
key and you are unable to start the
engine, insert the passive key into the
backup position and press the push
button ignition switch to start the engine.
See Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position (page 195).
What happens when driving the vehicle
without a valid key?
• A message displays in the instrument
cluster if no valid key is detected, when
you exit your vehicle with a key, after the
last front door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in run, indicating your vehicle
is still on. The horn sounds if you have
driven the vehicle and reached a speed
of 16 mph (25 km/h) and the above
conditions are met.
You can switch the key detection audible
alert on or off. See Keyless Entry Settings
(page 84).
199
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP
The system is designed to help reduce fuel
consumption and CO
2
emissions by stopping
the engine when it is idling, for example at
traffic lights.
AUTO-START-STOP PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you leave your
vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you open the
hood or have any service or repair work
completed. If you do not switch the ignition
off, the engine could restart at any time.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
SWITCHING AUTO-START-STOP
ON AND OFF
The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on.
E392312
Press the button to switch the
system off.
Note: Deactivating the system using the
button lasts only one key cycle.
Press the button again to switch the system
back on.
Note: The system turns off if it detects a
malfunction. If the system malfunctions,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Stop your vehicle, keep your foot on the
brake pedal and the transmission in drive
(D).
RESTARTING THE ENGINE
Release the brake pedal or press the
accelerator pedal.
A message appears in the instrument cluster
display if the system requires you to take
action.
AUTO-START-STOP INDICATORS
WARNING: The system may require
the engine to automatically restart when
the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green or flashes amber. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
E121377
The auto-start-stop indicator
illuminates green when the engine
stops. It flashes amber and a
message appears when you need to take
action. It illuminates gray when the system
is not available.
200
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Auto-Start-Stop
E146361
The auto-start-stop indicator
illuminates gray with a
strikethrough when you disabled
the feature.
AUTO-START-STOP –
TROUBLESHOOTING
AUTO-START-STOP – INFORMATION
MESSAGES
A message appears in the instrument cluster
display if the system requires you to take
action.
ActionConditionMessage
Press the brake pedal to restart the engine.The system needs to restart the engine but
requires your confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine
Press the brake pedal or the accelerator pedal
to restart the engine.
The system needs to restart the engine but
requires your confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start Engine
201
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Auto-Start-Stop
AUTO-START-STOP – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
Why does the engine not always stop
when I expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way that
complements other vehicle systems, allowing
them to operate at optimum performance.
The system does not stop the engine if:
• The driver door is open.
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
• The heated windshield is on.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
• The battery charge is low.
• The battery temperature is outside the
optimal operating range.
• The engine is required to run to maintain
interior climate and reduce fogging.
Why does the engine sometimes
restart when I do not expect it to?
The system is designed to work in a way that
complements other vehicle systems, allowing
them to operate at optimum performance.
The system restarts the engine if:
• You switch the heated windshield on.
• You switch maximum defrost on.
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
neutral.
• The engine is required to run to maintain
adequate brake system assistance.
• The engine is required to run to maintain
interior climate and reduce fogging.
Can I permanently switch the system
off?
No. The system plays an important role in
reducing the fuel consumption and the CO
2
emissions.
Will the frequent engine starts cause
parts to wear out?
Your vehicle has an enhanced battery and
starter motor that are designed for the
increased number of engine starts.
202
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Auto-Start-Stop
FUEL AND REFUELING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Switch the engine off before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately
call a physician, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects
of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive
or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can
cause serious illness and permanent
injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses, if worn, flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through
the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin,
clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and thoroughly
wash your skin with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact
causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
fuel vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. Immediately call a physician if
you experience any adverse reactions.
203
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
SELECTING THE CORRECT FUEL
E161513
Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded
gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2
octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high
altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87. The use of these fuels could result
in engine damage that will not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as
other conditions, for example when towing
a trailer. See Towing a Trailer (page 354).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle
and engine performance.
For additional information, visit
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
(E15) or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl, which is a manganese-based fuel
additive, will impair engine performance and
affect the emission control system.
LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER
FUNNEL
The fuel filler funnel is in the rear floor
compartment with the jack and tools.
204
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
FILLING A PORTABLE FUEL
CONTAINER
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
ADDING FUEL FROM A PORTABLE
FUEL CONTAINER
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in
the household refuse or the public sewage
system. Use an authorized waste disposal
facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Locating
the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 204).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
may not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
E157452
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
205
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel add a
minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the
engine.
Note: You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When restarting,
cranking time takes a few seconds longer
than normal.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
REFUELING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
E416859
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel filler inlet.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
REFUELING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently
and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Keep children away from
the fuel pump. Never let children pump
fuel.
206
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Stay outside your vehicle
and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds
before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting
on the fuel tank filler pipe.
E327438
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position A
when refueling. Holding the fuel pump
nozzle in position B can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
207
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
E119081
5. When the pump shuts off, wait five
seconds, then raise the fuel pump nozzle
and slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle immediately checked.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
Capacities
QuantityVariant
23.6 gal (89.3 L)Base.
27.8 gal (105.2 L)Navigator L.
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified
amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank
when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: When refueling your vehicle after the
fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity due to the empty
reserve still present in the fuel tank.
208
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL AND REFUELING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
FUEL AND REFUELING – WARNING
LAMPS
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as possible.
FUEL AND REFUELING –
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Refueling System Warning
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close,
a message could appear in the instrument
cluster display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel
filler funnel provided with your vehicle
into the fuel filler pipe. See Locating the
Fuel Filler Funnel (page 204). This action
should dislodge any debris that may be
preventing the fuel tank filler valve from
fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler
funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
209
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuel and Refueling
WHAT IS THE CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
The catalytic converter is part of your
vehicle's emissions system and filters harmful
pollutants from the exhaust gas.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 401).
• Use the correct fuel. See Fuel and
Refueling (page 203).
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Do not make any unauthorized
changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who
manufactures, repairs, or services a fleet of
vehicles are not permitted to intentionally
remove an emission control device or
prevent it from working.
210
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Catalytic Converter
CATALYTIC CONVERTER –
TROUBLESHOOTING
CATALYTIC CONVERTER – WARNING
LAMPS
Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
system that monitors the emission control
system. If any of the following warning lamps
illuminate, this may indicate that the on-board
diagnostics system has detected an emission
control system malfunction.
E103308
E67021
E67028
Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause
reduced power or the engine to stop. Failure
to respond to a warning lamp may cause
damage that your vehicle Warranty may not
cover. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
211
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Catalytic Converter
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
POSITIONS
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the vehicle off and
remove the key or remote control before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property damage.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds limits vehicle performance, which
may result in difficulty maintaining speed
in traffic and could lead to serious injury.
SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO GEAR
The transmission selector is on the center
stack.
E417084
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press a button to select a position.
Note: The position illuminates on the
transmission selector.
PARK (P)
WARNING: Shift into park (P) only
when your vehicle is stationary.
In park (P) power is not transmitted to the
driven wheels.
Note: A tone sounds if you attempt to exit
your vehicle without the vehicle in park (P).
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) if the 12 V battery has run out of charge.
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) if a fuse is blown.
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) unless the key or remote control is inside
your vehicle.
Note: The electronic parking brake could
apply when you power your vehicle on with
the selector in park (P).
212
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
Note: The electronic parking brake could
apply if you shift to park (P) without fully
pressing the brake pedal.
Note: The electronic parking brake could
apply if you shift to park (P) on a slope.
Note: Do not manually release the parking
brake when the selector is in park (P). See
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake (page 233).
Note: Your vehicle could shift into park (P) if
you attempt to exit your vehicle without the
vehicle in park (P). See Temporary Neutral
Mode (page 214).
Note: A tone could sound when you select
park (P).
REVERSE (R)
WARNING: Shift into reverse (R) only
when your vehicle is stationary.
In reverse (R) power is transmitted to the
driven wheels.
NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING: In neutral (N) your vehicle
is free to roll.
In neutral (N) power is not transmitted to the
driven wheels.
DRIVE (D)
In drive (D) power is transmitted to the driven
wheels.
Note: Progressive range selection is
available in drive (D). See Using Progressive
Range Selection (page 217).
MANUAL (M)
In manual (M) you can select a specific gear.
See Manually Shifting Gears (page 213).
Note: We recommend using this mode for
driving on hilly or mountainous roads or
when towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
(page 354).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
POSITION INDICATORS
The instrument cluster displays the current
position.
E341776
Note: The position could illuminate on the
transmission selector.
MANUALLY SHIFTING GEARS
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear. The current gear flashes when your
vehicle cannot shift into the requested gear.
Your vehicle will not shift if the requested
gear raises or lowers the engine speed
beyond the limit.
Your vehicle could shift when you fully press
the accelerator or brake pedal.
213
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
Note: Prolonged driving with high engine
speed could cause vehicle damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Note: Drive modes could affect when the
vehicle shifts into the requested gear.
E417183
Manually Shifting Gears in Manual (M)
Use this feature to select a specific gear.
Note: We recommend using this feature for
engine braking, driving on hilly or
mountainous roads, or when towing a trailer.
See Towing a Trailer (page 354).
• Press any button to switch the feature
on.
• Press the upper (+) button to upshift.
• Press the lower (-) button to downshift.
• Shift to drive (D) to switch the feature off.
TEMPORARY NEUTRAL MODE
How Does Temporary Neutral Mode
Work
Use this mode to keep your vehicle in neutral
(N), for a limited time, when you exit your
vehicle or switch your vehicle off. For
example, if you exit your vehicle before an
automatic car wash.
Note: You do not need to use this mode at
an automatic car wash if you shift into
neutral (N) and stay in your vehicle with
power on.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Automatic return to park (P) is delayed
when your vehicle is in this mode. See
Automatic Return to Park (P) (page 215).
Temporary Neutral Mode Limitations
This mode could be unavailable if your 12 V
battery charge level is low. Connect an
external power source and attempt the
procedure again.
Your vehicle could shift to park (P) after 30
minutes, or when the vehicle battery charge
level is low. Prolonged use of this mode can
cause the 12 V battery to run out of charge.
This mode could be unavailable if your
vehicle is below operating temperature.
Warm up your vehicle and attempt the
procedure again.
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. Failure
to follow these instructions could result in
vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Power your vehicle on.
4. Shift into neutral (N).
Note: An instructional message appears.
214
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
5. Shift into neutral (N) again within a few
seconds.
Note: A confirmation message appears
when your vehicle enters the mode.
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
7. Switch your vehicle off.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: The neutral (N) indicator on the
selector may flash in this mode.
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P), or power your vehicle
on and shift into drive (D) or reverse (R).
AUTOMATIC RETURN TO PARK (P)
How Does Automatic Return to Park
(P) Work
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) when your
vehicle is stationary and any of the following
occur:
• You switch the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with the driver
seatbelt unfastened.
• You unfasten the driver seatbelt when
the driver door is open.
Note: Do not use automatic return to park
(P) when your vehicle is moving, except in
an emergency. See Starting and Stopping
the Engine (page 191).
Automatic Return to Park (P)
Limitations
Automatic return to park (P) may not work if
any of the following occur:
• The driver door ajar sensor is
malfunctioning.
• The driver seatbelt sensor is
malfunctioning.
See an authorized dealer if any of the
following occur:
• Seatbelt indicator illuminates or tone
sounds with the driver seatbelt fastened.
• Door ajar indicator does not illuminate
with the driver door open.
• Door ajar indicator illuminates with the
driver door closed.
• Transmission not in park message
appears, with the driver door closed, after
you shift out of park (P).
215
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
SHIFTING YOUR IMMOBILE
VEHICLE OUT OF PARK (P)
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take your vehicle
out of park (P) which means your vehicle
can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
Use this procedure to shift your vehicle out
of park (P) in the event of an electrical
malfunction or emergency.
Note: This mode could be unavailable if your
12 volt battery charge level is low. Connect
an external power source and attempt the
procedure again.
Note: Your vehicle could shift to park (P)
after 30 minutes, or when the vehicle battery
charge level is low. Prolonged use of this
mode can cause the 12 volt battery to run
out of charge.
Note: This mode could be unavailable if your
vehicle is below operating temperature.
Warm up your vehicle and attempt the
procedure again.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in vehicle damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Shifting Your Vehicle Out of Park (P)
1. Apply the parking brake.
Note: If the battery is out of charge, use an
external power source to apply the parking
brake.
2. Power your vehicle on without your foot
on the brake pedal.
3. Fully press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Fully press and hold the accelerator
pedal.
5. Shift into neutral (N).
6. Shift into neutral (N) again within a few
seconds.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: A confirmation message appears
when your vehicle enters the mode.
Note: You must complete this procedure
within 15 seconds. If your vehicle shifts into
park (P) attempt the procedure again.
8. Release the accelerator and brake
pedals.
9. Release the parking brake.
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
10. Switch your vehicle off.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal
Mode
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
216
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Transmission Not In Park (P) Audible
Warning
Sounds if you open the driver door before
shifting into park (P).
Park Selection Audible Warning
Sounds when you shift into park (P).
USING PROGRESSIVE RANGE
SELECTION
Progressive range selection gives you the
ability to lock out gears from the automatic
shifting range. This could provide you with
an improved driving experience by reducing
transmission shifts, for example, in slippery
conditions, when driving on hilly or
mountainous roads, or when towing a trailer.
See Towing a Trailer (page 354).
1. With the selector in drive (D), press the
minus (-) button to switch the feature on.
2. Press the minus (-) button to lock out the
highest gear.
3. Press the minus (-) button again to
continue locking out higher gears.
Note: The instrument cluster displays the
current gear and the highest gear available.
Note: Your vehicle automatically shifts within
the available gear range.
4. Hold the plus (+) button for a few seconds
to switch the feature off and allow shifts
to higher gears.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A,Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile
pour boîtes automatique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
217
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use transmission fluid that
conforms to the defined specification. Use
of other fluids could result in vehicle damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
218
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Automatic Transmission
HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WORK
Using the 1-Speed Automatic Four-
Wheel Drive System
The 1-speed automatic four-wheel drive
system utilizes an electronically controlled
on-demand 1-speed transfer case. This
system monitors various vehicle sensory
inputs to provide an increased level of
performance. This system offers the driver
two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive auto
and four-wheel drive high as available modes
of operation via the selectable drive mode
switch. When four-wheel drive auto is
selected, the system continuously varies
power to the front wheels for optimum
performance for all on-road conditions. When
four-wheel drive high is selected, the system
provides power to the front and rear wheels
for use in off-road or slippery conditions such
as deep snow, sand or mud. There is further
information on driving in unique driving
conditions. See Driving Hints (page 394).
Using the 2-Speed Automatic Four-
Wheel Drive System (If Equipped)
The 2-speed automatic four-wheel drive
system utilizes an electronically controlled
on-demand 2-speed transfer case. This
system monitors various vehicle sensory
inputs to provide an increased level of
performance. This system offers the driver
two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive auto,
four-wheel drive high, and four-wheel drive
low as available modes of operation. When
four-wheel drive auto is selected, the system
continuously varies power to the front wheels
for optimum performance for all on-road
conditions. When either four-wheel drive high
or four-wheel drive low are selected with the
appropriate drive modes , the four-wheel
drive system provides electronically locked
power to the front and rear wheels for use
in off-road or slippery conditions such as
deep snow, sand or mud. Selecting slow
climb also provides additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication for conditions
like deep sand, snow, steep slopes, or pulling
heavy objects. See Slow Climb (page 296).
Additionally, the system is capable of
recreational flat towing by putting the
transfer case into neutral (N). See
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle (page
408).
There is further information on driving in
unique driving conditions. See Driving Hints
(page 394).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
219
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle could be
higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain
without getting stuck or damaging
underbody components. The differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary passenger
car. Always maintain steering wheel control,
especially in rough terrain. Since sudden
changes in terrain can result in abrupt
steering wheel motion, make sure you grip
the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid
vehicle damage from concealed objects such
as rocks and stumps. Drive slower in strong
crosswinds which can affect the normal
steering characteristics of your vehicle. Be
extremely careful when driving on pavement
made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel,
snow or ice.
Note: Do not use four-wheel drive high or
four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and can
damage drive components.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE LIMITATIONS
Operating Four-Wheel Drive with a
Spare or Mismatched Tires (If Equipped)
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire can affect the four-wheel drive
system. If there is a significant difference
between the size of the spare tire and the
remaining tires, you could have limited
four-wheel drive functionality. When driving
with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly, we recommend that you do
not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a
four-wheel drive mode turned on.
• Use a four-wheel drive mode on dry
pavement.
• Activate a four-wheel drive mode unless
the vehicle is stationary.
Driving with the full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can limit four-wheel
drive functionality. You can experience the
following:
• Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked four-wheel drive mode.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Comfort and noise.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
220
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Your vehicle could have a front air
dam that can become damaged, due to
reduced ground clearance, when taking your
vehicle off-road. You can remove this air
dam by removing the eight bolts that secure
it.
Note: Your vehicle could have side steps
that can become damaged, due to reduced
ground clearance, when taking your vehicle
off-road. Remove side steps before driving
your vehicle off-road.
SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
MODE
To select a specific four-wheel drive mode
please select one of the desired drive
modes. For additional information. See
Selecting a Drive Mode (page 294).
Note: When shifting to and from four-wheel
drive, a message appears in the instrument
cluster display indicating that the system is
in the process of making a shift.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or while applying
the accelerator pedal.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the instrument cluster
display. See Four-Wheel Drive –
Information Messages (page 224).
Note: Do not use DEEP CONDITIONS or
SLOW CLIMB on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so produces excessive noise,
increases tire wear and may damage drive
components. The 4X4 system in these
modes is only intended for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
Shifting to or from Slow Climb (4L)
To select or exit SLOW CLIMB (4L):
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Select SLOW CLIMB on the drive mode
switch.
A message appears in the instrument cluster
display indicating a four-wheel drive shift is
in progress. If any of the above shift
conditions are not present, the shift will not
occur and a message appears in the
instrument cluster display guiding you
through the proper shifting procedures. If
there is a transfer case tooth blockage, a
message appears in the instrument cluster
display. To alleviate this condition, place the
transmission in a forward gear, move your
vehicle forward approximately 4.9 ft (1.5 m),
and shift the transmission back to neutral (N)
to allow the transfer case to complete the
range shift.
Note: You could hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages which is normal. If
the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the instrument cluster
display. See Four-Wheel Drive –
Information Messages (page 224).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODES
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE HIGH
2H turns on when you select NORMAL or
CONSERVE. Two-wheel drive high is for
general on-road driving. Power is sent to the
rear wheels only.
221
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Two-wheel drive high can turn on or
off based on Drive Mode selection See Drive
Mode Control (page 294).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE AUTO
4A turns on when you select EXCITE,
NORMAL 4x4 AUTO or SLIPPERY.
Four-wheel drive auto provides electronically
controlled four-wheel drive power to both
the front and rear wheels, as required, for
increased traction in varying on-road
conditions. The four-wheel drive auto tuning
varies based on selected Drive Mode. See
Selecting a Drive Mode (page 294).
Note: Four-wheel drive auto can turn on or
off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page
294).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE HIGH
4H turns on when you select DEEP
CONDITIONS. Four-wheel drive high
provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear wheels
for use in off-road or winter conditions such
as deep snow, sand or mud. This mode is
not for use on dry pavement.
Note: Four-wheel drive high can turn on or
off automatically based on Drive Mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page
294).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE LOW
This mode turns on when you select SLOW
CLIMB. It provides electronically locked
four-wheel drive power to both the front and
rear wheels for use on low traction surfaces,
and does so with additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication. This mode
is only for off-road conditions, such as deep
sand, steep slopes, or pulling heavy objects.
Note: Four-wheel drive low can turn on or
off automatically based on drive mode
selection. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page
294).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE INDICATORS
Two-wheel Drive High
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
two-wheel drive high is selected.
Four-wheel Drive Auto
E181781
Continuously illuminates when
four-wheel drive auto is selected.
Four-wheel Drive High
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
four-wheel drive high is selected.
Four-wheel Drive Low (If Equipped)
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is selected.
222
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
TRANSFER CASE FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification
and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.4–1.6 qt (1.3–1.5 L)Four-wheel drive.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid / Huile pour boîte auto-
matique MERCON® LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
223
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – WARNING
LAMPS
E415072
Illuminates when a four-wheel
drive or power train fault is
present.
Note: When a system fault is present, the
system can typically remain in whichever
mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It does not default to
two-wheel drive in all circumstances. When
this warning displays, have your vehicle
serviced by an authorized dealer.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
A four-wheel drive system fault is present. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Check 4x4
The four-wheel drive system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress
Displays when you attempt to switch to four-wheel drive low mode
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch to four-wheel drive low mode
and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 5 km/h
Displays when you attempt to switch from four-wheel drive low mode
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch from four-wheel drive low mode
and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 5 km/h
224
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Displays when there is a transfer case gear tooth blockage while
shifting to or from four-wheel drive low mode or to the neutral state.
Place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral
(N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Shift Delayed Drive Forward
Displays when the four-wheel system detects elevated system
temperature and temporarily stops providing power to the front
wheels. The system automatically resumes normal function when the
system temperature returns to normal.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
Displays when the four-wheel drive system resumes normal function.4x4 Restored
Displays when the four-wheel drive system detects driving condition
which temporarily require greater four-wheel drive performance. The
system automatically resumes normal function after the system no
longer detects these driving conditions.
4X4 Temporarily Locked
Displays when the system requires an additional transmission shift to
neutral (N) to complete a transfer case shift.
Shift to Neutral
225
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
FRONT AXLE FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification
and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.8 qt (1.7 L)Four-wheel drive.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile
synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
226
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Front Axle
REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification
and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.00–2.25 qt (1.89–2.13 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile
synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
227
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Axle
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when leaving a car wash or driving
from standing water to dry the brakes.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risk of crash when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal could pulse and travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.
BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID
RESERVOIR
See Under Hood Overview (page 424).
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other
than the recommended brake fluid as this
will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system could
be affected if the brake fluid level is below
the MIN mark or above the MAX mark on
the brake fluid reservoir.
228
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Brakes
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
E170684
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative to
the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our specifications.
See Brake Fluid Specification (page 229).
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION
Use fluid that meets the defined specification
and viscosity grade.
If you do not use fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced brake performance.
Note: We recommend you to use Dot 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 specifications or
ISO 4925 Class 6 standards. If you use any
fluid other than the recommended fluid, it
could cause reduced brake performance
and not meet our performance standards.
Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
229
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Brakes
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de
frein automobile haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
BRAKES – TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKES – WARNING LAMPS
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
E67020
If the ABS indicator illuminates
when you are driving, this indicates
a malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock braking system function. See
an authorized dealer.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
E270480
E67024
The brake indicator momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. It may also illuminate when you
apply the parking brake and the ignition is
on. If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. See an
authorized dealer.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
230
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Brakes
BRAKES – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
Is brake dust on the wheels normal?
Brake dust could accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as
the brakes wear and does not contribute
to brake noise. See Cleaning Wheels
(page 448).
Will wet driving conditions effect my
braking abilities?
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal
a few times when driving from a car
wash or standing water to dry the
brakes.
Is brake noise considered normal?
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them.
If the vehicle has continuous vibration
or shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, an authorized dealer should
check your vehicle.
When should you replace the brake fluid?
Brake fluid absorbs water over time
which degrades the effectiveness of the
brake fluid. Change the brake fluid at
the specified intervals to prevent
degraded braking performance. See
General Maintenance Information
(page 534).
231
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Brakes
WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC PARKING
BRAKE
The electric parking brake is used to hold
your vehicle on slopes and flat roads.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you leave your
vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery has run out of charge.
E267156
The electric parking brake switch
is on the center console.
1. Pull the switch up.
The red warning lamp flashes during
operation and illuminates when the parking
brake is applied.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could apply
when park (P) is selected. See Park (P) (page
212).
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE IN AN
EMERGENCY
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
Pull the switch up and hold it.
The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone
sounds and the stoplamps turn on when you
use the electric parking brake in an
emergency.
The electric parking brake continues to slow
your vehicle down unless you release the
switch.
Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake
when your vehicle is moving, except in an
emergency. If you repeatedly use the electric
parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
MANUALLY RELEASING THE
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Push the switch down.
The red warning lamp turns off.
Pulling Away When Towing a Trailer Uphill
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Pull the switch upward and hold it.
3. Shift into gear.
232
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Electric Parking Brake
4. Press the accelerator pedal until engine
has developed sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down
the hill.
5. Release the switch and pull away in a
normal manner.
AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING THE
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
1. Close the driver door.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull away
in a normal manner.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
AUDIBLE WARNING
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone
continues after you have released the
parking brake, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
RELEASING THE ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE IF THE VEHICLE
BATTERY HAS RUN OUT OF
CHARGE
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery has run out of charge.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery has run out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 401).
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
WARNING LAMPS
Brake System
E270480
E67024
It illuminates red when you apply
the parking brake and your vehicle
is on. If the lamp flashes when the
parking brake has been released,
this indicates the parking brake
system requires service. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
Electric Parking Brake
E67024
E146190
When the lamp illuminates yellow,
it indicates a malfunction in the
electric parking brake. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
233
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Electric Parking Brake
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake
pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be
performed. Perform a manual release.
Park Brake Use Switch to Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).
Release the electric parking brake before continuing to drive.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode to allow brake
service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Brake maintenance mode
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some
functionality may still be available. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Limited Function Service Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
234
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Electric Parking Brake
WHAT IS REVERSE BRAKE ASSIST
Reverse brake assist is designed to reduce
impact damage or assist in avoiding a
collision while in reverse (R).
HOW DOES REVERSE BRAKE
ASSIST WORK
Reverse brake assist functions when in
reverse (R) and traveling at a speed of
1–7 mph (2–12 km/h).
If the system detects an obstacle behind your
vehicle, it provides a warning through the
rear parking aid or cross traffic alert system.
REVERSE BRAKE ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air
brakes, external motors and fans may
affect the correct operation of the sensing
system. This may cause reduced
performance or false alerts.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types, and
pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example a
trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is not
able to make corrections for the additional
length of the accessories.
235
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Reverse Brake Assist
The system only applies the brakes for a
short period of time when an event occurs.
Act as soon as you notice the brakes apply
to remain in control of the vehicle. If you do
not intervene the vehicle may start to move
again.
Note: Certain add-on devices around the
bumper or fascia may create false alerts. For
example, large trailer hitches, bicycle or
surfboard racks, license plate brackets,
bumper covers or any other device that may
block the normal detection zone of the
system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
Note: The system does not react to small or
moving objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
Note: The system does not operate during
hard acceleration or steering.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned or
bent, it could alter the sensing zone causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or
false alerts.
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension
changes can impact the angle of the sensors
and may change the normal detection zone
of the system resulting in inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer, the system
may detect the trailer and provide an alert,
or the system turns off. If the system does
not turn off, manually switch the system off
after you connect the trailer.
Note: You may experience reduced system
performance on road surfaces that limit
deceleration. For example, roads with ice,
loose gravel, mud or sand.
SWITCHING REVERSE BRAKE
ASSIST ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Switch Reverse Brake Assist on or off.
Note: The system is unavailable when rear
parking aid or cross traffic alert is off.
The default setting is on in some regions.
OVERRIDING REVERSE BRAKE
ASSIST
There could be instances when unexpected
or unwanted braking occurs. Firmly pressing
the accelerator pedal or switching the feature
off overrides the system.
REVERSE BRAKE ASSIST
INDICATORS
If the system determines that a collision with
an obstacle may occur, full braking may
apply.
E293490
A message and warning indicator
appear when the system applies
the brakes.
236
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Reverse Brake Assist
REVERSE BRAKE ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
REVERSE BRAKE ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DescriptionMessage
Displays for a few seconds when the system applies the brakes.Reverse Brake Assist
Displays when a related system or feature error occurs. Make sure
the exterior cameras are clean and not obstructed. Drive the vehicle
on a straight road for a short period. If the message remains, have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Not Available See Manual
Displays when a system error has occurred. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Reverse Brake Assist Fault
Displays when reverse brake assist is off.Reverse Brake Assist Off
237
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Reverse Brake Assist
REVERSE BRAKE ASSIST –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why is reverse brake assist
unavailable?
• Make sure you switch the system on.
See Switching Reverse Brake Assist On
and Off (page 236).
• Make sure that the liftgate or tailgate,
hood and all doors are closed.
• Make sure the cross traffic alert system
is on. See What Is Cross Traffic Alert
(page 320).
• Make sure the rear parking aid system is
on. See What is the Rear Parking Aid
(page 252).
• Make sure that traction control is on. See
Switching Traction Control On and Off
(page 242).
• Your vehicle may have sustained a rear
end impact. Have the sensors checked
for proper coverage and operation.
• Make sure the exterior cameras are not
dirty or obstructed. If dirty, clean the
cameras. If the reverse brake assist
unavailable message still appears after
cleaning the cameras, wait a short time
for the message to clear. If the message
does not clear, drive the vehicle on a
straight road for a short period. If the
message remains, have the system
checked.
• Make sure the sensors are not blocked
or faulted. See Locating the Rear
Parking Aid Sensors (page 252). See
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors
(page 322).
• You recently had your vehicle serviced,
or the battery disconnected. Drive your
vehicle a short distance to resume
system operation.
• The system does not function when you
connect a trailer. Operation resumes
when you disconnect the trailer.
Note: If you are still having problems with
reverse brake assist, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
238
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Reverse Brake Assist
WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST
Hill Start Assist applies the brakes to hold
your vehicle after you bring it to a stop on a
slope. This makes it easier for you to pull
away without using the parking brake.
HOW DOES HILL START ASSIST
WORK
When the system activates, your vehicle
remains stationary for a few seconds after
you release the brake pedal. This gives you
time to move your foot from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal. The brakes release
when you apply the accelerator pedal and
the vehicle begins to move forward, or the
system exceeds the time allowed for
automatically applying the brakes.
The system activates when your vehicle is
in any forward gear and facing uphill, or
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and facing
downhill.
HILL START ASSIST PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system, and
intervening if required. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system turns off if
there is a malfunction.
HILL START ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
HILL START ASSIST – INFORMATION
MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
Displays when
system is not avail-
able. Have your
vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
239
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Hill Start Assist
HOW DOES AUTO HOLD WORK
Auto hold applies the brakes to hold your
vehicle after you bring the vehicle to a stop.
This can help when waiting on a hill or in
traffic.
SWITCHING AUTO HOLD ON AND
OFF
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system, and
intervening if required. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system will turn off
if a malfunction is apparent. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
1. From the controls menu, switch Auto hold
on or off.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door and start the
engine.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
Make sure you switch the system off before
towing with your vehicle or before using an
automatic car wash.
USING AUTO HOLD
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
The auto hold active indicator illuminates
in the instrument cluster display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the instrument cluster
display.
3. Apply the accelerator and drive off in a
normal manner. The system releases the
brakes and the auto hold active indicator
switches off.
Note: The system only activates if you apply
enough pressure to the brake pedal to bring
the vehicle to a standstill.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
could apply the electric parking brake. The
brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
electric parking brake releases when you
press the accelerator pedal. See
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake (page 233).
Note: The system switches off if you shift
into reverse (R) or neutral (N) while pressing
the brake pedal.
240
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Auto Hold
There could be actions that can cause the
auto hold system not to work when the
following occur:
• Your vehicle is in temporary neutral
mode.
• The driver door is open.
• You shift into reverse (R) or neutral (N)
before the system is active.
AUTO HOLD INDICATORS
E323448
Illuminates when the system is
active.
E323449
Illuminates when the system is on
but cannot hold your vehicle at a
standstill at this particular time.
241
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Auto Hold
WHAT IS TRACTION CONTROL
The traction control system helps to avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
HOW DOES TRACTION CONTROL
WORK
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces power at the same
time. If the wheels spin when accelerating
on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces power in order to increase traction.
SWITCHING TRACTION CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Operating your vehicle
with the traction control disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door and start the
engine.
1. From the controls menu, press Traction
Control.
2. Switch Traction Control on or off.
TRACTION CONTROL INDICATOR
Stability and Traction Control Indicator
E138639
If the indicator does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on,
or remains on when the engine is
running, this indicates a malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
E130458
The traction control off indicator
illuminates when you switch the
traction control system off, or when
an alternative stability control mode is
selected that requires the traction control off
depending on the drive mode selected.
TRACTION CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
TRACTION CONTROL – WARNING
LAMPS
System Messages
E138639
The traction control light
temporarily illuminates on start-up
and flashes when activated by a
driving condition. The light stays on if a
problem occurs in the system.
E130458
The traction control off light
temporarily illuminates on start-up
and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• When you select an alternative stability
control mode.
242
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Traction Control
HOW DOES STABILITY CONTROL
WORK
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo speakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Reducing the effectiveness
of the electronic stability control system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It's always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this could reduce the operator's
ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or traction control you may
experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic stability control enhances your
vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral
slides by applying brakes to one or more of
the wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
Roll stability control enhances your vehicle’ s
ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
Curve Control
Curve control enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to follow the road when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
control operates by reducing engine power
and, if necessary, applying brakes to one or
more of the wheels individually.
243
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Stability Control
Side Wind Stabilization
Side wind stabilization is an advanced
feature that works by carefully applying the
brakes on one side of the vehicle to reduce
the effect of a side wind gust on the vehicle's
path.
Traction Control
Traction control enhances your vehicle’s
ability to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Traction Control (page 242).
E72903
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
SWITCHING STABILITY CONTROL
ON AND OFF
The system turns on each time you switch
the ignition on.
Shifting the transmission into reverse (R) will
disable the system.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Switching
Traction Control On and Off (page 242).
244
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with Roll Stability Control
Traction Control System
2
Electronic Stability Control
2
Roll Stability Control
2
Stability Control OFF Light
Enabled
Enabled
2
EnabledIlluminated during bulb
check
Default at start-up
Disabled
1
Enabled
2
EnabledilluminatedButton pressed moment-
arily
Disabled
1
DisabledEnabledilluminatedButton not pressed and
transfer case is switched
to 4x4 Low
1
The Traction Control system can still be enabled but with tighter or looser thresholds.
2
Functions can vary depending on what selectable drive mode the vehicle is currently in.
STABILITY CONTROL INDICATOR
E138639
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the power on, or remains
on, this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
245
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Stability Control
WHAT IS HILL DESCENT CONTROL
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep slopes in various surface
conditions.
HOW DOES HILL DESCENT
CONTROL WORK
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill slopes between
2–20 mph (3–32 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains on but the
descent speed cannot be set or maintained.
Note: The system does not function below
2 mph (3 km/h).
The system requires a cool down interval
after a period of sustained use. Hill descent
control provides a warning in the message
center and a tone sounds when the system
is about to disengage for cooling. At this
time, manually apply the brakes as needed
to maintain descent speed.
Note: The amount of time that the system
can remain active before cooling varies with
conditions.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions or
extremely steep slopes. The system is
designed to be an aid and does not relieve
you of your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as ice
or extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of
vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park
(P) for automatic transmission or first gear
for manual transmission.
SWITCHING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL ON AND OFF
1. From the controls menu, switch Hill
Descent Control on or off.
Note: A message appears in the instrument
cluster display when the system is active.
SETTING THE HILL DESCENT
SPEED
To increase or decrease the descent speed,
press the accelerator or brake pedal, or use
the SET + and SET - buttons on the steering
wheel. Once you reach the preferred speed
remove your feet from the pedals.
246
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Hill Descent Control
HILL DESCENT CONTROL
INDICATOR
E434305
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent control on.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
HILL DESCENT CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met.For Hill Descent Reduce Speed XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent mode.For Hill Descent Select Gear
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must resume control.Hill Descent Driver Resume Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling
The hill descent system cannot activate while Cruise Control is actively controlling
speed.
Hill Descent Control not available with Cruise Control
Active
247
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Hill Descent Control
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
HOW DOES ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING WORK
The electric power steering system assists
the brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems.
If your vehicle loses electrical power or
detects a concern when you are driving, the
system switches to reduced steering assist
or manual steering. Additionally, whenever
disconnecting the battery or installing a new
one, you must drive your vehicle a short
distance before the system relearns the
strategy and reactivates all systems.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
vehicle off. After at least 10 seconds, switch
the vehicle on and watch the information
display for a steering system warning
message. If a steering system warning
message returns, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. Failure to do so may result in
loss of steering control.
Adapt your speed and driving behavior
according to reduced steering assist.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort to steer. This occurs to prevent
internal overheating and damage to the
steering system. If this occurs, you will not
lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually
nor will it cause damage to the system.
Normal steering and driving allows the
system to cool down and steering assist
returns to normal.
Note: There is no fluid reservoir to check or
fill.
When your vehicle is still moving, a
significant decrease in steering assistance
or a loss of steering assistance could occur
if:
• You switch your vehicle off.
• Your vehicle loses electrical power.
• Your vehicle detects a concern.
When your vehicle is off and your vehicle
begins moving, there is no steering
assistance.
248
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Steering
STEERING – TROUBLESHOOTING
STEERING – WARNING LAMPS
E223375
The electric power steering system
indicator illuminates if the system
detects a fault during the
continuous diagnostic checks.
Note: If a red warning message displays,
stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
STEERING – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
The steering system has detected a condition that requires service.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now
249
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Steering
STEERING – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
Why does it seem that the steering is
wandering or pulling?
• Check your vehicle for an improperly
inflated or uneven tire, loose or worn
suspension or steering components, or
improper vehicle alignment.
The system is functioning properly and
the components have been checked,
why is the steering system continuing
to pull or wander?
• A high crown in the road or crosswinds
could make the steering system feel like
it is wandering or pulling.
250
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Steering
PARKING AID PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air
brakes, external motors and fans may
affect the correct operation of the sensing
system. This may cause reduced
performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking speeds.
To help avoid personal injury you must
take care when using the parking aid
system.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this will
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the rear parking aid detects the trailer and
provides an alert. Disable the parking aid
when you connect a trailer to prevent the
alert.
Note: Connected trailers might be detected
by the vehicle and parking aid turns off
automatically in those instances.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
could block the normal detection zone of the
parking aid system. Aftermarket spare tires
or spare tire covers mounted to the rear
tailgate could cause false alerts from the
park aid system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the
sensors are covered, the system's accuracy
can be affected.
Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
251
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Parking Aids
SWITCHING PARKING AID ON AND
OFF
Muting the Audible Tone
E326188
P
Press the parking aid button and
use the menu to switch the
system's audible tone on and off.
E383616
You can also switch the tone on
and off by shifting into reverse (R)
and pressing the button on the
rear view camera display screen.
REAR PARKING AID
WHAT IS THE REAR PARKING AID
Rear parking sensors detect objects behind
your vehicle when in reverse (R).
REAR PARKING AID LIMITATIONS
There is a decreased coverage area at the
outer corners.
The rear parking aid sensors are active when
your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the vehicle
speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 71 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
The rear parking aid detects large objects
when you shift into reverse (R) and any of
the following occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a low
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at a low
speed and an object is moving towards
your vehicle, for example another vehicle
at a low speed.
The system shall provide no audible warning
for the object behind the vehicle when in
neutral (N) gear.
LOCATING THE REAR PARKING AID
SENSORS
E374927
The rear parking aid sensors are in the rear
bumper.
REAR PARKING AID AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the rear bumper.
252
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Parking Aids
If your vehicle remains stationary for a few
seconds, the audible warning turns off. If your
vehicle moves backward the tone sounds
again.
Note: When the parking aid system sounds
a tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume.
FRONT PARKING AID
WHAT IS THE FRONT PARKING AID
Front parking sensors detect objects in front
of your vehicle.
FRONT PARKING AID LIMITATIONS
The front parking aid sensors are active
when your vehicle is in any position other
than park (P) and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in
(70 cm) from the front bumper.
If your vehicle is in reverse (R), the front
parking aid detects objects and provides an
audible warning when your vehicle is moving
at a low speed and when an object is moving
toward your vehicle, for example, another
vehicle at a low speed. If your vehicle
remains stationary for a few seconds, the
audible warning turns off. Visual indication
is always active in reverse (R).
If your vehicle is in any forward gear, the
front parking aid provides audible warnings
and a visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
below and the system detects an object
within the detection zone. If your vehicle
remains stationary for a few seconds, the
visual indication and audible warning turns
off.
If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the front and
rear sensors provide a visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving below a speed
of 5 mph (8 km/h) and the system detects
obstacles inside the detection areas. Once
your vehicle stops, the visual indication and
audible warning stops after a few seconds.
LOCATING THE FRONT PARKING AID
SENSORS
E374928
The front parking aid sensors are in the front
bumper.
FRONT PARKING AID AUDIBLE
WARNINGS
A warning tone sounds when there is an
object within 28 in (70 cm) from the front
bumper. As your vehicle moves closer to an
object, the rate of the tone increases.
253
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Parking Aids
The warning tone continuously sounds when
an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the
front bumper.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from your vehicle, visual indication
remains on.
PARKING AID INDICATORS
Parking Aid Indicators Shown When
360 Degree Camera Views are not
Available
E429180
The system provides object distance
indication through the touchscreen.
• As the distance to an object decreases,
the indicators change color. The
indicators for closer objects appear
closer to the vehicle icon.
• The indicators are green when the object
is at the farthest detection point. As the
object gets closer, the indicators turn
amber. When the object is at the closet
detection point, the indicators turn red.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicators are not activated.
The activated visual indicators continue
displaying when your vehicle is stopped in
reverse (R). If stopped in drive (D) or neutral
(N), the activated visual indicators disappear
after four seconds.
Note: If stopped in drive (D) or neutral (N)
with rear camera delay mode showing the
rear camera view, the activated visual
indicators continue displaying.
Parking aids are not available in the following
situations:
• The system is switched off.
• A trailer is connected.
• Sensors are blocked.
• A system fault occurs.
Note: If the parking aids are not available,
the distance indicators do not display. See
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting (page 255).
Note: Front park aid indicators may not be
available.
Parking Aid Indicators Shown in 360
Degree Camera Views (If Equipped)
E429183
The system provides object distance
indication through the touchscreen.
254
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Parking Aids
• As the distance to an object decreases,
the indicators change color.
• The indicators are green when the object
is at the farthest detection point. As the
object gets closer, the indicators turn
amber. When the object is at the closest
detection point, the indicators turn red.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicators are not activated.
The activated visual indicators continue
displaying when your vehicle is stopped in
reverse (R). If stopped in drive (D) or neutral
(N), the activated visual indicators disappear
after four seconds.
Note: If stopped in drive (D) or neutral (N)
with rear camera delay mode showing the
rear camera view, the activated visual
indicators continue displaying.
Parking aids are not available in the following
situations:
• The system is switched off.
• A trailer is connected.
• Sensors are blocked. The distance
indicators appear white.
• A system fault occurs.
Note: If the parking aids are not available,
the distance indicators do not display. See
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting (page 255).
PARKING AIDS – TROUBLESHOOTING
PARKING AIDS – INFORMATION
MESSAGES
If a fault is present in the parking aids, a
warning message appears in the instrument
cluster or the touchscreen.
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. You may be able to resolve by
cleaning the sensors and restarting your vehicle.
Park Aid Fault
Inclement weather, ice, mud, or water is blocking the sensor, causing
the system to become unavailable. You can typically clean the sensor
to resolve.
Parking Sensors Blocked
An electrical trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle.Trailer Connected
255
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Parking Aids
WHAT IS THE REAR VIEW CAMERA
The rear view camera provides a video
image of the area behind your vehicle when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
E332186
You can access the rear view
camera by pressing the button on
the touchscreen.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Objects above the
camera may not be visible. Check the area
behind your vehicle when necessary.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the
liftgate or tailgate is ajar. If the liftgate or
tailgate is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the liftgate or tailgate is ajar. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not switch the camera
features on or off when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage and you might not see
some objects. In some vehicles, the
guidelines may disappear when you connect
the trailer tow connector.
LOCATING THE REAR VIEW
CAMERA
The rear view camera is on the liftgate or
tailgate. It provides a view of the area behind
your vehicle.
256
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear View Camera
REAR VIEW CAMERA GUIDE LINES
E306774
Active guide lines.A
Centerline.B
Fixed guide line: Green zone.C
Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.D
Fixed guide line: Red zone.E
Rear bumper.F
Active guide lines only show with fixed guide
lines. To use active guide lines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guide lines
toward an intended path. If the steering
wheel position changes while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the intended path.
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines do not
display when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Use caution while reversing. Objects in the
red zone are closest to your vehicle and
objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects get closer to your vehicle as they
move from the green zone to the yellow or
red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear
view mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of your vehicle.
Note: Active guide lines and fixed guide lines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if the
active or fixed guide lines are on.
Note: Not all camera modes work properly
without an auxiliary camera.
REAR VIEW CAMERA SETTINGS
ZOOMING THE REAR VIEW CAMERA
IN AND OUT
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Selectable settings for this feature are zoom
in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the symbol on
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is zoom off.
257
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear View Camera
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Zooming in also engages park hold
which applies the electric park brake when
you shift to park (P). When you press the
zoom button, the electronic park hold button
illuminates on the touchscreen. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 348).
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
SWITCHING REAR VIEW CAMERA
DELAY ON AND OFF
1. From the driver assistance menu, press
Rear View Camera.
2. Switch Rear View Camera Delay on or
off.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
SWITCHING THE REAR VIEW CAMERA
VIEW
E310967
Rear normal view provides a view
of what is directly behind your
vehicle. This view is available at all
speeds in reverse (R), drive (D) and neutral
(N). When your vehicle is not in reverse (R),
this view may be displayed with different text
or graphics.
E310974
Rear split view provides a
wide-angle view of what is behind
your vehicle.
E350276
The hitch view provides a
wide-angle view of the area around
the tow hitch. This view is available
at all speeds in reverse (R), drive (D) and
neutral (N).
E311776
Trailer AUX camera shows a view
of what is behind your trailer. This
camera is purchased and installed
separately.
E224485
Zooms in on the view and park
hold is activated when your vehicle
is in park (P). See Connecting a
Trailer (page 348).
258
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear View Camera
WHAT IS THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA
The 360 degree camera system consists of
front, side and rear cameras which provide
visibility around your vehicle.
HOW DOES THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA WORK
The 360 degree camera system consists of
front, side and rear cameras.
The 360 Degree Camera system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in front
of or behind your vehicle.
• Provides a cross traffic view in front of
and behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of the
area outside your vehicle, including the
blind spots and obstacles near your
vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The 360 degree camera
system still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the
windows, and checking the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Use caution when turning
camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
259
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
360 Degree Camera
360 DEGREE CAMERA
LIMITATIONS
Note: Use caution if a door is ajar. The
camera could be out of position and the
image could be incorrect.
LOCATING THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERAS
Rear View Camera
The rear view camera is on the liftgate or
tailgate. It provides a view of the area behind
your vehicle.
Front View Camera
The front view camera is in the grille. It
provides a view of the area in front of your
vehicle.
Side View Camera
The side view camera is on the outside
mirror. It provides a view of the area on the
sides of your vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA GUIDE
LINES
Note: Active guide lines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
E306774
Active guide lines.A
Centerline.B
Fixed guide line: Green zone.C
Fixed guide line: Yellow zone.D
260
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
360 Degree Camera
Fixed guide line: Red zone.E
Rear bumper.F
Active guide lines only show with fixed guide
lines. Turn the steering wheel to point the
guide lines toward an intended path. If the
steering wheel position changes when
reversing, your vehicle could deviate from
the intended path.
The fixed and active guide lines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines do not
display when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects get closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of your
vehicle.
Keep Out Zone
E310341
The keep out zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle.
360 DEGREE CAMERA SETTINGS
SWITCHING THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA ON AND OFF
E332186
The 360 degree camera system
button is located near the
touchscreen and allows you to
toggle the front camera on or off. The front
and rear cameras have multiple screens
which consist of:
• Normal view.
• Normal view with 360.
• Split view.
Note: The rear view camera activates when
you switch into reverse (R). Additional views
are then accessible on the touchscreen.
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only
the front views display when you press the
camera button. When in reverse (R), only the
rear views display when you press the
button.
261
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
360 Degree Camera
Note: The front camera views remain on
when your vehicle is in motion at low speed.
The rear camera views remain on at all
speeds when in reverse (R). Some rear
camera views are available in neutral (N)
and in drive (D) at all speeds.
SWITCHING THE 360 DEGREE
CAMERA VIEW
E422118
Front normal view provides a view
of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.
E422119
Front split view provides a
wide-angle view of what is in front
of your vehicle.
E310996
Normal + 360 degree view
contains the normal camera view
next to a 360 degree camera view.
E310967
Rear normal view provides a view
of what is directly behind your
vehicle. The rear normal view is
available at all speeds in reverse (R ), drive
(D), and neutral (N). When not in reverse (R),
this view may display with differentiating text
or graphics.
E310974
Rear split view provides a
wide-angle view of what is behind
your vehicle.
E350276
The hitch view provides a view of
the area around the tow hitch.
View is available at all speeds in
reverse (R ), drive (D), and neutral (N).
E310965
Trailer reverse guidance shows the
sides of your truck and trailer. See
Trailer Reverse Guidance (page
385).
E425897
50/50 split view provides a view
of both sides of your vehicle and
trailer, if connected. This view is
available at all speeds in park (P), neutral (N),
and drive (D).
E224485
Zooms in on the rear normal view
and park hold activates when you
shift your vehicle to park (P). See
Connecting a Trailer (page 348).
E337359
Provides access to multiple zoom
options by touching the zoom
button on the 360 degree camera
view. View options include the ability to
zoom to your vehicle corners or to the front
or rear of your vehicle. Depending on what
gear and which drive mode you select,
guidelines may be available. See 360
Degree Camera Guide Lines (page 260).
Note: The hitch view, rear camera view, and
50/50 view are available at all speeds.
Automatic Camera Views
When using the turn signals, a view from the
corresponding side camera displays on the
screen.
When front park aid distance indicators reach
the red zone, the front camera automatically
displays a view of the area ahead of your
vehicle.
262
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
360 Degree Camera
When entering off-road drive modes, a front
camera view automatically displays with
vehicle path guidelines.
263
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
360 Degree Camera
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
WORK
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go
uses radar and camera sensors to maintain
a set gap between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you while following it to a
complete stop. Stop and go can also be set
to follow a vehicle directly in front of you and
adjust the set speed, while you are at a
complete stop.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use adaptive
cruise control on winding roads, in heavy
traffic or when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as entering
or leaving a highway, on roads with
intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are unpaved, or steep slopes. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has aftermarket
electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
WARNING: In situations with poor
visibility, such as fog, heavy rain or other
inclement weather, you may need to
override or completely switch off the
system.
When Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle
that is braking, your vehicle does not
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Apply
the brakes when necessary. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
264
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Hilly Condition Usage
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep slopes, for example
in mountainous areas.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS
Sensor Limitations
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: The system may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
E416762
Camera.1.
Radar sensor.2.
The camera is on the windshield behind the
interior mirror.
265
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind
a fascia panel.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot detect
a vehicle ahead and does not function. See
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages (page 281).
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle image does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you. The radar sensor has
a limited field of view. It may not detect
vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than
expected in some situations.
266
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Detection Issues Can Occur:
E71621
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
B With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a clear
view of the road by the windshield camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
E144529
Press the button to activate the
system. When the system
activates, the set speed is equal to
whichever is greater, the current vehicle
speed, or 15 mph (20 km/h). If the speed is
too low, or other conditions are not correct
for adaptive cruise control activation, the
system enters standby mode. When you are
below 15 mph (20 km/h), adaptive cruise
control does not activate unless you are
following another vehicle.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
E144529
Press the button when the system
is active or switch the vehicle off.
267
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Note: When you switch the system off, the
set speed clears.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
The system may cancel and set the parking
brake if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the
driver door after adaptive cruise control
stops your vehicle.
• Adaptive cruise control holds your
vehicle at a stop continuously for more
than three minutes.
The system may deactivate or prevent
activating when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
• The brake temperature is too high.
• There is a failure in the system or a
related system.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
Drive to the speed you prefer.
E417561
E417562
Press either button to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster
display when initially activating adaptive
cruise control.
E392844
After a few seconds, the graphic in the
instrument cluster display changes to show
that adaptive cruise control is active.
E392851
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer can vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
268
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
from a Complete Stop
E417561
E417562
Press the + or - buttons while
keeping the brake pedal fully
depressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 km/h (15 mph).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Note: The system activates from a complete
stop only when it detects a lead vehicle in
close proximity.
Manually Changing the Set Speed
E417561
Press the button to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold the button to
increase the set speed in large increments.
Release the button when the set speed is
equal to the desired speed.
E417562
Press the button to decrease the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold the button to
decrease the set speed in large increments.
Release the button when the set speed is
equal to the desired speed.
You can also press the accelerator or brake
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer.
Press either button to select the current
speed as the set speed.
The system could apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed continuously displays in the
instrument cluster display when the system
is active.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
from Standby Mode
E144529
Press the button from standby
mode to set the cruise control
speed to the current vehicle
speed.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL GAP
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
E417598
Press the button to increase the
gap setting.
E417599
Press the button to decrease the
gap setting.
E392856
269
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
The selected gap appears in the instrument
cluster display as shown by the bars in the
image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and
therefore, the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Gap DistanceGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
SportClosest1
NormalClose2
NormalMedium3
ComfortFar4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain the gap setting.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small,
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow down
your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front of you. The system
only applies limited braking. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to brake.
Take immediate action.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E416864
Press the button or tap the brake
pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
The vehicle speed returns to the previously
set speed and gap setting. The set speed
displays continuously in the instrument
cluster display when the system is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
270
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
Without an Active BlueCruise Service Plan:
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete
stop and remains stationary for less than a
few seconds, your vehicle accelerates from
a stationary position to follow the vehicle
ahead.
E393000
With an Active BlueCruise Service Plan:
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete
stop and remains stationary for less than
approximately three minutes, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
The following conditions must be met before
your vehicle auto-resumes:
• You are facing forward and paying
attention to the road ahead.
• The road is clear of obstacles such as
pedestrians or other vehicles crossing
your path.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete
stop and remains stationary for more than a
few seconds, an indicator and message
displays.
271
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Information Messages
DetailsMessage
(Only available with an active BlueCruise service plan).
The vehicle is stopped behind a lead vehicle and all conditions are
met for the vehicle to accelerate with the lead vehicle once the lead
vehicle begins to accelerate.
Auto-Resume
If the lead vehicle begins to move and all of the auto-resume condi-
tions are not met, you are prompted to press the resume button.
Pay attention to the road ahead and surroundings to make sure that
it is safe to resume.
Press and release the button or use the accelerator pedal to resume
following the lead vehicle.
Press button to resume
Cruise control does not automatically resume when this display is
active. Use the accelerator pedal to resume.
Stopped
Note: If approximately three minutes at a
stop is exceeded, the vehicle cancels
adaptive cruise control and the electric
parking brake is set. The driver is required
to resume control of the vehicle and release
the electric parking brake.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
WARNING: If you override the system
by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does
not automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the set speed
icon changes to gray and the leading vehicle
icon does not appear in the instrument
cluster display.
272
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E402315
Illuminates when you switch
adaptive cruise control on. The
color of the indicator changes to
indicate the system status.
White indicates the system is on but inactive.
Blue indicates that you set the speed and
the system is active.
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Normal cruise control will
not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Cruise Control.
3. Press Normal Cruise Control.
E332905
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not respond
to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains
active to maintain set speed. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
LANE CENTERING
HOW DOES LANE CENTERING WORK
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
uses the vehicle's front radar sensor and
front windshield camera sensor, together
with the steering sensor to operate.
Using these sensors, the system applies
continuous steering assistance towards
driving in the middle of the lane.
Note: The gap setting for adaptive cruise
control with lane centering, operates in the
same way as normal adaptive cruise control.
LANE CENTERING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer or when the vehicle
is loaded to near or over maximum
payload. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
273
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
WARNING: Do not use the system if
any changes or modifications to the
steering, suspension system or wheels and
tires have been made. Any changes or
modifications to the steering, suspension
system or wheels and tires could affect the
functionality and performance of the
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply to
lane centering unless stated otherwise or
contradicted by a lane centering precaution.
See Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions
(page 264).
LANE CENTERING REQUIREMENTS
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
Lane centering only activates when all of the
following occur:
• Adaptive cruise control with lane
centering is enabled in the touchscreen.
See Switching Lane Centering On and
Off (page 275).
• You have adaptive cruise control with
stop and go enabled and set.
• The steering system detects your hands
on the steering wheel.
• The system detects both lane markings
when driving on a straight road.
• Your vehicle is initially centered in the
lane between two visible line markings.
• A trailer is not detected.
Note: If the system does not detect valid
lane line markings, the system remains in
standby until valid line markings are
available.
Note: If the system does not detect your
hands on the steering wheel, apply a slight
force to the steering wheel.
LANE CENTERING LIMITATIONS
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply to
lane centering unless stated otherwise or
contradicted by a lane centering limitation.
See Lane Centering Requirements (page
274).
Lane Centering may not be able to center
your vehicle in the lane in any of the
following conditions:
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The curve in the road is too tight.
• The system does not detect the minimum
required lane markings or when lanes
merge or split.
• When the required steering effort to
maintain lane center exceeds the lane
centering system limit.
• When driving in areas that are under
construction or when road work is in
progress.
• If the front windshield camera and/or the
front radar are blocked.
• When using a spare tire.
274
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
• Inclement weather conditions including,
but not limited to, high wind, heavy rain,
and fog.
• Driving into direct sunlight.
• When modification to the steering system
has been made, including alterations to
the steering wheel.
• When a trailer is detected, the system
disables lane centering. See Lane
Centering Precautions (page 273).
Note: The system steering assistance is
limited and may not have sufficient effort for
all driving situations and/or conditions, such
as driving through tight curves or driving
through curves at high speeds.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
may deviate from the lane center.
SWITCHING LANE CENTERING ON
AND OFF
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E362891
Press the button.
The indicator appears in the instrument
cluster. When the lane centering system is
on, the color of the indicator changes to
indicate the system status.
You can override the system at any time by
steering your vehicle.
Note: The lane centering requirements must
be met before you can enable the feature.
See Lane Centering Requirements (page
274).
Enabling and Disabling Lane Centering
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Cruise Control.
3. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
4. Switch Lane Centering on or off.
LANE CENTERING ALERTS
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
When the system is active and detects no
steering activity for a period of time, the
system alerts you to put your hands on the
steering wheel. If you do not react to the
warnings the system quickly applies and
releases the brakes, activates the hazard
lights, and slows your vehicle to a stop within
the lane of travel while maintaining steering
control. See Lane Centering Automatic
Cancellation (page 275).
The system also alerts you if your vehicle
crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
Note: The system could detect a light grip
or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
driving.
LANE CENTERING AUTOMATIC
CANCELLATION
When an external condition cancels the
system, for example, no lane markings
available, an audible warning sounds and a
message appears in the instrument cluster
display.
275
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
When an external condition cancels the
system, and your hands are not on the
steering wheel, the system immediately
alerts you to take control of the vehicle.
If this alert is ignored, the system quickly
applies and releases the brakes, activates
the hazard lights, and slows your vehicle to
a stop within the lane of travel.
If your vehicle slows down or stops and you
resume control, a message appears to
prompt you to press the accelerator pedal
to allow the system to resume.
Note: If the system detects significant
inactivity, a 'Lane Centering Unavailable'
message displays in the instrument cluster
and lane centering is disabled until the next
time you start your vehicle.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too wide or too
narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings cross over one another.
• The curve of the road is too sharp.
LANE CENTERING MANUAL
CANCELLATION
When you perform the following actions,
adaptive cruise control with lane centering
will cancel:
• The brake pedal is pressed.
• Adaptive cruise control button on the
steering wheel is switched off.
The lane centering system is momentarily
suppressed when either of the following
actions are performed:
• Turn signal indicator is latched or tapped.
• You steer the vehicle out of lane.
LANE CENTERING INDICATORS
E297977
Illuminates when you switch lane
centering on. The color of the
indicator changes to indicate the
system status.
Gray status indicates the system is on but in
standby mode.
Green status indicates the system is enabled
and applying steering assistance to keep the
vehicle in the center of the lane.
Amber status with an audible tone, that then
changes to gray status, indicates a system
automatic cancellation.
LANE CENTERING –
TROUBLESHOOTING
LANE CENTERING – INFORMATION
MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, some messages
can appear different or not at all.
276
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
DetailsMessage
You must return your hands to the steering wheel and provide steering input to cancel the
message.
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
Lane centering is currently not available, due to conditions that prevent the system from becoming
active. To reset the system, when the vehicle is stationary, return the gear selector to park (P)
and turn the vehicle off. Then, restart the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal.
Lane Centering Assist Not Available
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering is about to cancel. You must immediately take full
control of the vehicle.
Resume Control
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering is in standby mode. When safe to do so, you can
resume adaptive cruise control with lane centering by applying pressure on the accelerator
pedal. Alternatively, you can also re-enable adaptive cruise control with lane centering by pressing
the resume button on the steering wheel.
Press Accelerator Pedal to Resume
277
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
HOW DOES PREDICTIVE SPEED
ASSIST WORK
Predictive Speed Assist works with adaptive
cruise control and adjusts the vehicle speed
to the road geometry and to the speed limit
detected by the speed sign recognition
system. As the system identifies curves and
highway exits, the vehicle speed temporarily
decreases ahead of and during the changing
road geometry. When passing new speed
signs, the set speed updates. See Predictive
Speed Assist Precautions (page 278).
There are limitations that affect the accuracy
of the speed sign recognition system and its
ability to determine the current speed limit.
Predictive speed assist and its ability to
determine the current speed limit shares
these limitations. See Speed Sign
Recognition (page 333).
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap setting
operates normally when the feature is
enabled.
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions. You may need
to override the system by pressing the
brake or accelerator pedal if the adjusted
speed becomes higher or lower than
necessary.
WARNING: The system only provides
limited braking. Your vehicle may not
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Apply
the brakes when necessary.
WARNING: The system does not
activate the turn signal.
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply to
predictive speed assist unless stated
otherwise or contradicted by a predictive
speed assist precaution. See Adaptive
Cruise Control Precautions (page 264).
The system only applies limited braking. You
can override the system with the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system by applying the
brakes.
The system may adapt to various factors
such as time of day, lane width. This could
influence speed adjustments and
accelerations.
The system may adapt to various drive
modes. See Drive Mode Control (page 294).
This could influence speed adjustments and
accelerations.
Note: The system does not activate the turn
signal automatically.
278
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
WARNING: The system may not
always adjust vehicle speed in certain road
or weather conditions such as crossing
traffic, yield or stop signs, right of way,
traffic lights, speed bumps, rain, snow, fog.
You must always apply the brake or
accelerator pedal when necessary.
The road geometry and speed limit
information provided by the navigation map
data could be inaccurate or out of date.
The system may not detect and read speed
limit signs with conditional information, for
example, when a sign is flashing, during
specific time ranges, or when children are
present.
Note: The system does not set the vehicle
speed to speed limits shown with a
supplementary traffic sign.
Under certain conditions, the system may
not adjust the vehicle speed until after your
vehicle passes the speed limit.
Detection of road geometry operates only
where related information is available. Road
geometry information may not be available
in some areas.
SWITCHING PREDICTIVE SPEED
ASSIST MODE ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Cruise Control.
3. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
4. Switch Predictive Speed Assist on or off.
ADJUSTING THE SET SPEED
TOLERANCE
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Cruise Control.
3. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
4. Switch Predictive Speed Assist on.
5. Press Tolerance.
6. Adjust the slider to set the tolerance.
Note: You can set tolerance for vehicle
speed adjustment based on speed sign
recognition only.
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST ALERTS
If the speed sign recognition system detects
a speed limit below the minimum adaptive
cruise control set speed, a tone sounds and
the system returns to standby mode.
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST
INDICATORS
A blue marker around the speed sign and a
blue arrow next to the set speed indicates
that the system is active.
279
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed sign indicator
E393027
When the system detects a new speed sign,
a gray indicator appears above the set speed
while the system adjusts the vehicle speed
to the speed limit. When the speed limit is
reached, the set speed updates and the gray
indicator disappears.
Road geometry indicator
When the system detects a curve or highway
exit, the vehicle starts to decelerate, and the
indicator appears and changes color.
Road geometry indicator symbols
E379737
Left curve.
E379738
Right curve.
280
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
PREDICTIVE SPEED ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
Navigation system based speed limit information is not available. If the message continues to
appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Adaptive Cruise Control Speed Sign
Recognition Not Available
The system is going to cancel and you must take control.Driver Resume Control
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
Note: The system could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages depending upon
which cluster type you have.
281
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
DetailsMessage
Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Cruise Control Not Available
You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due to
inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the sensor. You
can typically clean the sensor to resolve this issue.
Adaptive Cruise Control Not Available
Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Due to the nature of sensor technology, it is possible to get a blockage
warning with no actual block. This happens, for example, when driving
in sparse rural or desert environments. A false blocked condition
either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
You have selected normal cruise control. The system does not brake
or react to traffic.
Normal Cruise Active Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel and you
must take control.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive
cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range.
Cruise Control Speed Too Low to Activate
282
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Adaptive Cruise Control
WHAT IS BLUECRUISE
BlueCruise keeps your vehicle centered in
the lane and offers a hands-free driving
mode in certain situations when using
adaptive cruise control.
HOW DOES BLUECRUISE WORK
BlueCruise uses cameras to monitor your
vehicle position within a lane and applies
steering support to keep your vehicle
centered in the lane.
Using the cameras and location information,
BlueCruise allows you to remove your hands
from the steering wheel and offers a
hands-free driving mode in certain areas.
When active, BlueCruise uses a driver facing
camera and infrared lighting to monitor your
eyes and head position to detect if you are
distracted. If the system determines you are
distracted, it alerts you to return your eyes
to the road.
E417002
Lighting and camera area.A
E381702
Steering column too high, camera cannot
see the face.
E381703
283
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
Appropriate position, camera can see the
face.
For the most optimal experience from the
driver facing camera:
• Make sure to not wear any facial
coverings.
• Raise the seating position and/or lower
the steering column so your face is seen
by the driver facing camera.
• Avoid leaning the seat back so the driver
facing camera can see your face.
• Avoid using infrared blocking sunglasses.
• Make sure your hands, arms or other
objects are not blocking the driver facing
camera.
Note: When BlueCruise is active, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, camera data may record through
the vehicle event data recorder. See Event
Data (page 29).
Note: No data records under normal driving
conditions.
BLUECRUISE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
keeping your eyes on the road at all times.
The system is designed to be an aid and
does not relieve you of your responsibility
to drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Obstructions to the driver
facing camera or infrared lighting could
prevent the system from properly
operating. Keep the camera and lighting
areas free from obstruction. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system if
any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
284
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as entering
or leaving a highway, on roads with
intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are unpaved, or steep slopes, railroad
crossings, pedestrian crossings, and school
zones. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system attempts to
keep your vehicle in the center of the lane
as well as maintain speed and gap control.
The system may not be able to perform
these tasks in all situations. Do not use the
system in complex or uncertain driving
conditions. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Your vehicle could drift
out of the lane of travel. Always be
prepared to manually steer your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
BLUECRUISE REQUIREMENTS
BlueCruise only activates when all of the
following occur:
• BlueCruise service plan is active. See
Lincoln.com
(https://www.lincoln.com/connectedservices/)
or the Lincoln mobile app for details.
• Modem is enabled. See Connecting the
Vehicle to a Mobile Network (page 488).
• BlueCruise is enabled in your center
display screen. See BlueCruise Settings
(page 286).
• Adaptive cruise control is switched on.
• Automatic Emergency Braking is
switched on. See Switching Automatic
Emergency Braking On and Off (page
330).
• The driver seatbelt is fastened.
• The system detects both lane markings.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel.
• Your eyes are on the road.
Note: For hands-free mode to work, your
vehicle must be on certain limited access
divided freeways.
Note: The system may require updated
software for hands-free mode. See Vehicle
Software Updates (page 522).
Note: Without an active BlueCruise
subscription, your vehicle is still capable of
lane centering. This system requires you to
keep your hands on the steering wheel at
all times. See Lane Centering Requirements
(page 274).
285
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
BLUECRUISE LIMITATIONS
Any of the following conditions could result
in BlueCruise not correctly operating:
• You do not have your vehicle centered
in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or too wide.
• The system does not detect at least one
lane marking or when lanes merge or
split.
• You are applying a low amount of
steering input.
• You are using the system in areas under
construction.
• If you make any aftermarket modifications
to the steering system.
• You are using a spare tire.
The driver-facing camera may not operate
correctly due to any of the following:
• You have a pre-existing eye condition,
such as an eye misalignment, or have
had eye surgery.
• You cover your facial features by a mask,
hat or other items.
• The lighting conditions change
significantly.
• You are not in the field of view of the
camera.
• You position or tilt yourself to one side.
• You are moving around extensively.
• You are wearing glasses or sunglasses
that are too dark or reflective.
Note: The system has limited steering
assistance and may not be sufficient for all
driving situations.
Note: In exceptional conditions, such as
inclement weather or direct sunlight, the
system could deviate from the center line.
Note: The information provided by the
navigation map data could be inaccurate or
out of date.
BLUECRUISE SETTINGS
Enabling BlueCruise
1. From the driver assistance menu, press
Cruise Control.
2. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
3. Press Lane Centering With Hands Free.
Enabling Activation Prompts
1. From the driver assistance menu, press
Cruise Control.
2. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
3. Press Activation Prompts.
SWITCHING BLUECRUISE ON AND
OFF
Switching BlueCruise On
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Using Activation Prompts
E144529
When the prompt appears, press
the button to switch BlueCruise on.
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster. When the system is on,
the indicator color changes to indicate the
system status.
Note: You must enable activation prompts
in the touchscreen.
286
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
Using Steering Wheel Controls
E144529
Press the adaptive cruise control
button to activate BlueCruise.
Switching BlueCruise Off
E144529
Press the adaptive cruise control
button when the system is active
or in standby mode.
BlueCruise turns off through each ignition
cycle.
BLUECRUISE ALERTS
When BlueCruise is providing hands-on
driving or transitioning to hands-on driving
from hands-free driving and detects no
steering activity for a certain period of time,
the system alerts you with an audible
warning and a message in the instrument
cluster display to put your hands on the
steering wheel.
When BlueCruise is providing hands-on or
hands-free driving and detects you are not
looking at the road for a certain period of
time, the system alerts you to return your
eyes to the road. Depending on where you
are looking, the alert can be a message in
the instrument cluster and an audible
warning.
If you do not react to the warnings, the
system alerts you to take control of your
vehicle, quickly applies and releases the
brakes, activates the hazard lights, and slows
your vehicle to a stop within the lane of travel
while maintaining steering control.
If your vehicle slows down or stops and you
resume control, a message appears to
prompt you to press the accelerator pedal
to allow the system to resume.
Note: If the system detects significant
inactivity, it disables until the next time you
start your vehicle.
BLUECRUISE AUTOMATIC
CANCELLATION
When an external condition cancels
BlueCruise, for example, no lane markings
available, a message appears in the
instrument cluster, and an audible warning
sounds.
If your vehicle starts to slow down,
you must take control by returning
your attention to the road and your
hands to the steering wheel. Then press and
release the button to reactivate BlueCruise.
System cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings cross.
• Your eyes are not on the road or your
hands are not on the steering wheel.
287
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
If you have your hands on the steering wheel
and your eyes are on the road when the
feature is active and a cancellation occurs,
the system displays a canceled graphic in
the instrument cluster and sounds an audible
warning.
If you are not paying attention to the road or
your hands are not on the steering wheel
and a cancellation occurs, the system
displays a message in the instrument cluster,
and sounds an audible warning until you
resume control.
If you do not resume control in time,
BlueCruise quickly activates and releases
the brakes, activates the hazard lights, and
slows your vehicle to a stop within the lane
of travel while maintaining steering control.
If your vehicle slows down or stops and you
resume control, a message appears to
prompt you to press the accelerator pedal
to allow the system to resume.
Note: If the system detects repeated
inactivity, it disables until the next time you
start your vehicle.
BLUECRUISE INDICATORS
E297977
When on, the color of the indicator
changes to indicate the status.
Gray indicates BlueCruise is on but inactive.
Green indicates BlueCruise is active and
applying continuous steering support.
Blue indicates BlueCruise is active and
hands-free driving mode is available.
Hands-On Driving Support Available
E333236
The graphic in the cluster changes to a wheel
with hands on it indicating hands-on driving
mode is active.
When this indicator is present, you must keep
your hands on the steering wheel.
Hands-Free Driving Support Available
E333232
The graphic in the cluster changes to a wheel
without hands on it indicating hands-free
driving mode is available.
When this indicator is present, you can
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
288
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
HOW DOES LANE CHANGE ASSIST
WORK
E420274
Lane change assist can automatically
perform a single lane change when you
request the lane change using the turn signal
lever. This feature is available down to
40 mph (65 km/h).
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the lane
change assist system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. The lane change assist
system is not a replacement for careful
driving.
1. Make sure the lane you are requesting
is clear of traffic or obstacles.
2. Tap or latch the lever in the direction of
your planned lane change.
3. Once the lane change is complete, move
the turn signal lever back to the middle
position if necessary.
Note: When using lane change assist you
can tap or latch the lever.
Lane Change Suggestion
If you are approaching or have been
following a slower moving vehicle, the
system may suggest a lane change to pass
that vehicle using an available passing lane.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST LIMITATIONS
Lane change assist will not perform the
requested maneuver if traffic is identified in
the selected lane.
SWITCHING LANE CHANGE ASSIST
ON AND OFF
1. From the driver assistance menu, press
Cruise Control.
2. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
3. Press Lane Centering with Hands Free.
4. Press Lane Change Assist to toggle the
system on and off.
289
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
CANCELLATION
To cancel lane change assist, manually steer
your vehicle or return the turn signal lever to
the middle position.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING
LANE CHANGE ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The lane you have selected to enter has a vehicle or obstacle.Lane busy
A lane is not recognized or available to perform the requested
maneuver.
No lane seen
The requested lane change is being performed.Changing lanes
If desired, press the turn signal lever in the direction indicated by the
lane change suggestion to initiate the lane change.
Lane change possible
Note: The instrument cluster display may
abbreviate or shorten certain messages.
290
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
IN-LANE REPOSITIONING
HOW DOES IN-LANE REPOSITIONING
WORK
BlueCruise with in-lane repositioning uses
the vehicle's front and corner radar sensors
together with the front windshield camera
sensor to operate.
Using these sensors, the system
automatically adjusts your vehicle’ s position
in the lane based on the current driving
situation.
Note: In-lane repositioning is active only
when BlueCruise is enabled while traveling
on divided highways and when any of the
following occur:
• Passing or being passed by adjacent lane
vehicles in close proximity.
• In a curve.
• Driving in outer lanes.
Note: In certain situations, the vehicle may
bias without showing the indicators.
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
Note: The radar sensor has a limited field of
view. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in some
situations.
SWITCHING IN-LANE REPOSITIONING
ON AND OFF
1. From the driver assistance menu, press
Cruise Control.
2. Press Adaptive Cruise Control.
3. Press Lane Centering with Hands Free.
4. Press In-Lane Repositioning to toggle the
system on or off.
IN-LANE REPOSITIONING INDICATORS
E420279
Biased towards right-hand side of the lane.
E420280
291
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
Biased towards left-hand side of the lane.
BLUECRUISE – TROUBLESHOOTING
BLUECRUISE – INFORMATION
MESSAGES
Depending on your vehicle options and
instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
DetailsMessage
Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and provide
steering input.
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
The system is going to cancel and you must take control by returning
your attention to the road and your hands to the steering wheel.
Resume Control
Return your attention to the road.Watch the Road
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available. If the
message continues to display, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
BlueCruise not available
Press the accelerator pedal and follow the prompts.Press Accelerator Pedal to Resume
Make sure your facial features are visible and in the field of view of
the driver facing camera.
Driver monitor camera cannot detect face See manual
292
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
DetailsMessage
Make sure your hands, arms or other objects are not obscuring the
camera.
Driver monitor camera is blocked See manual
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available. If the
message continues to display, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Driver monitor camera fault See manual
BlueCruise is active, keep your attention on the road.BlueCruise On Watch the road Be prepared to resume control
The system is in standby mode, press the button on the steering wheel
to activate.
BlueCruise available Press {ICON} to activate
Note: The instrument cluster display may
abbreviate or shorten certain messages.
293
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln BlueCruise (If Equipped)
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE CONTROL
This feature connects multiple vehicle
systems through a single interface, providing
you with enhanced vehicle control and
driving dynamics for different driving
scenarios, terrains, weather, or various road
conditions.
HOW DOES DRIVE MODE
CONTROL WORK
When a drive mode is selected it alters
various electrical and mechanical systems
within the vehicle to a predetermined
configuration. The systems altered and
features available will depend on which
mode is selected.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE
E416756
Press the drive mode button located on the
center console to open the drive mode menu
on the center display. Select a drive mode
from the menu on the center display.
Subsequent presses of the drive mode
button deactivates the drive mode selection
menu on the center display.
Note: Drive mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off.
DRIVE MODES
CONSERVE
E295413
This mode decreases accelerator
pedal responsiveness to soften
driver inputs and encourage
efficient driving.
Depending on your vehicle’s options,
adaptive cruise control is slower to return to
the set speed and auto start- stop engages
more often. The system decreases the air
conditioning output to conserve energy when
set to Auto Mode.
Use this mode for fuel efficient driving which
allows for an extended driving range.
Note: Two-wheel drive high (2H) is the
default four-wheel drive mode.
294
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Drive Mode Control
DEEP CONDITIONS
E295420
This mode lowers accelerator
pedal responsiveness and delays
transmission upshifts for improved
vehicle control in low speed off-road
environments. Traction and stability controls
allow the wheels to spin to maintain vehicle
momentum and clear debris from the tires
for improved traction.
Depending on your vehicle’s options, the
system inhibits auto start stop and engages
the rear electronic locking differential.
Use this mode for driving through mud, sand,
and rough, uneven off-road terrains.
Note: Four-wheel drive high (4H) is the
default four-wheel drive mode.
Note: This mode is for Off-Road use only.
Do not use this mode when driving on
pavement or packed snow. Depending on
the four-wheel drive mode selection, this
could cause driveline bind up and damage
the system. See Four-Wheel Drive (page
219).
EXCITE
E392863
This mode increases accelerator
pedal responsiveness and holds
the transmission in lower gears
longer for enhanced acceleration. The
system switches the chassis controls to their
sport settings.
Depending on your vehicle’s options, this
feature sets the exhaust to a louder tone,
inhibits auto-start stop, increases steering
torque buildup, and it adjusts the suspension
for enhanced driver connectivity and
responsive driving dynamics.
Use this mode for a sportier and engaging
driving experience.
Note: Four-wheel drive auto (4A) is the
default four-wheel drive mode.
NORMAL
E225310
This mode adjusts all systems to
their base settings and balances
vehicle performance for all around
drivability. Each time you switch your vehicle
off it defaults to this mode.
Use this mode for everyday driving, such as
city and highway routes or commuting.
Note: Two-wheel drive high (2H) is the
default four-wheel drive mode.
NORMAL 4A
E225310
This mode automatically engages
four-wheel drive auto (4A),
delivering power to all four wheels
as required. All systems excluding the
four-wheel drive mode are adjusted to their
base settings.
Use this mode for normal firm surfaces such
as dry or wet pavement and hard packed dirt
or gravel roads.
Note: Four-wheel drive auto is the default
four-wheel drive mode.
295
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Drive Mode Control
SLIPPERY
E295414
This mode lowers accelerator
pedal responsiveness, adjusts
transmission shift points, and
optimizes traction and stability controls to
help mitigate wheel spin and maintain vehicle
control in slick driving conditions.
Depending on your vehicle’s options, this
feature adjusts all-wheel drive control to
provide optimum traction for slippery
surfaces.
Use this mode for less than ideal road
conditions such as snow and ice covered
roads or for firm surfaces that are covered
with loose or slippery materials.
Note: Four-wheel drive auto (4A) is the
default four-wheel drive mode.
Note: Do not use this mode when driving on
dry pavement. This could cause driveline
bind up and damage the system depending
on the four-wheel drive mode you select.
See Four-Wheel Drive (page 219).
SLOW CLIMB (If Equipped)
E422970
This mode lowers accelerator
pedal responsiveness and holds
the transmission in lower gears to
enhance vehicle control in slow speed
driving environments. The system switches
the traction and stability controls to their slow
climb settings.
Depending on your vehicle’s options, this
feature inhibits auto start stop and engages
the rear electronic locking differential.
Use this mode for climbing steep grades or
crossing uneven terrain where four wheel
drive low (4L) is required.
Note: Four-wheel drive low (4L) is the only
four-wheel drive mode available.
DRIVE MODE CONTROL –
TROUBLESHOOTING
DRIVE MODE CONTROL – WARNING
LAMPS
E130458
Some drive modes reduce traction
and stability control performance
and the indicator illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
296
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Drive Mode Control
DRIVE MODE CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The drive mode selection is temporarily unavailable. The default drive
mode is active.
Drive Mode Not Available
The vehicle has detected a trailer and will automatically change to
normal drive mode. See Auto Tow/Haul (page 357).
Changing to Normal Drive Mode for Improved Towing Performance
297
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Drive Mode Control
DRIVE MODE CONTROL –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why did the system default to normal
mode?
• If a mode is unavailable due to a system
fault, it defaults to normal mode and the
driveline settings remain the same as
prior to the system fault.
Can I switch drive modes while I am
driving?
• In most instances, you can switch drive
modes while you are driving (if you
maintain attention on the road), or while
the vehicle is stationary. However, you
should not switch the vehicle into a drive
mode intended for off-road or track use
while driving on paved, public roads. For
example, while driving on a paved
highway, it would be acceptable to switch
from normal mode to conserve mode,
but not to deep conditions mode.
How long does it take for the vehicle
to switch modes after I make a
selection?
• After switching modes, the new drive
mode will activate within several
seconds, if all the appropriate
pre-conditions are met.
How should I decide which drive mode
to use?
• Selecting a drive mode usually depends
on the driving experience you would like
to have, and the driving conditions. For
example, if you want to have a more
exciting on-road driving experience, you
could switch into excite mode. If you find
yourself driving on slick roads, you could
switch into slippery mode.
Will drive modes impact my vehicle’s
fuel consumption?
• Drive modes can have an impact on your
vehicle’ s fuel consumption. In addition to
the active mode, your driving style will
also affect the fuel consumption.
298
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Drive Mode Control
WHAT IS THE LANE KEEPING
SYSTEM
The lane keeping system alerts you by
providing temporary steering assistance or
steering wheel vibration when it detects an
unintended lane or road departure.
HOW DOES THE LANE KEEPING
SYSTEM WORK
The lane keeping system uses a forward
looking camera mounted on the windshield
to monitor vehicle movement within the lane
of travel.
When the camera detects a drift out of the
lane of travel, the lane keeping system alerts
the driver by vibrating the steering wheel, or
aids the driver by providing a small steering
input to move the vehicle back into the lane
of travel.
The driver can select one of three modes:
• Alert (if equipped)
• Aid
• Alert + Aid
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
299
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
The lane keeping system only operates when
the vehicle speed is greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h).
The system works when the camera can
detect at least one lane marking or the edge
of the road.
Note: When you select Aid or Alert and Aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period of time, the system
alerts you to put your hands on the steering
wheel. The system may detect a light grip or
touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
driving.
The lane keeping system may not correctly
operate in any of the following conditions:
• The lane keeping system does not detect
at least one lane marking or the edge of
the road.
• You switch the turn signal on.
• You apply direct steering, accelerate fast
or brake hard.
• The vehicle speed is less than 40 mph
(64 km/h).
• The anti-lock brake, stability control or
traction control system activates.
• The lane is too narrow.
• Something is obscuring the camera or it
is unable to detect the lane markings due
to environment, traffic or vehicle
conditions.
• Entering or exiting a tight curve when
driving at high speeds.
The lane keeping system may not correct
lane positioning in any of the following
conditions:
• High winds.
• Uneven road surfaces.
• Heavy or uneven loads.
• Incorrect tire pressure.
SWITCHING THE LANE KEEPING
SYSTEM ON AND OFF
E420496
Switch the system on and off by accessing
the lane keeping system icon through the
multi-function button on your steering wheel.
To deactivate the lane keeping system, press
the button again.
Note: When switching the system on or off
a message appears in the instrument cluster
display to show the status.
Note: The system stores the on or off setting
until manually changed by you.
300
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
SWITCHING THE LANE KEEPING
SYSTEM MODE
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Lane-Keeping System.
3. Press Lane-Keeping Mode.
4. Select a mode.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM SETTINGS
Adjusting the Steering Wheel Vibration
Intensity
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Lane Keeping System.
3. Press Lane Keeping Intensity.
4. Select a setting.
Note: This setting is not available in all
modes.
ALERT MODE
WHAT IS ALERT MODE
Alert mode vibrates the steering wheel when
it detects an unintended lane departure.
HOW DOES ALERT MODE WORK
E165515
When in alert mode, the lane keeping system
alerts you by vibrating the steering wheel.
The intensity of the vibration is set through
the lane keeping system menu.
AID MODE
WHAT IS AID MODE
Aid mode provides temporary steering
assistance toward the center of the lane.
HOW DOES AID MODE WORK
E165516
The lane keeping system aids you when an
unintentional lane departure occurs. The
system provides a small steering input to
move the vehicle towards the center of the
lane.
301
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
ALERT AND AID MODE
WHAT IS ALERT AND AID MODE
Alert and aid mode uses multiple features to
keep you in your lane. The system first
provides a small steering input to bring your
vehicle back towards the center of the lane.
If your vehicle moves too far from the center
of the lane the system alerts you with
vibration in the steering wheel.
HOW DOES ALERT AND AID MODE
WORK
E165517
Alert.A
Aid.B
The lane keeping system detects a lane
departure and provides aid when the
vehicles enters B and applies the additional
alert warning if A is entered.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
INDICATORS
E335296
If you switch the lane keeping system on, a
graphic with lane markings appears in the
instrument cluster display.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still
display if adaptive cruise control is enabled.
302
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
While the lane keeping system is on, the
color of the lane markings change to indicate
the system status.
RedOrangeGreen or WhiteGray
Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a
lane keeping alert warning.
Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a
lane keeping aid intervention.
Indicates that the system is avail-
able or ready to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated
side.
Indicates that the system is
temporarily unavailable to provide
a warning or intervention on the
indicated side.
BLIND SPOT ASSIST
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT ASSIST
Blind spot assist is an extension of the lane
keeping system.
It may help you identify adjacent vehicles
during a lane change.
Blind spot assist provides a blind spot
warning and steering assistance to help you
become aware of and steer away from
vehicles in your blind spot during lane
changes.
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT ASSIST
WORK
E420496
Switch the system on and off by accessing
the lane keeping system icon through the
multi-function button on your steering wheel.
During lane changes, the design of the blind
spot assist feature detects vehicles in, or
approaching, your blind spot and provides
a warning, plus steering assistance to direct
your vehicle back into your lane.
When active, this system functions with or
without the use of turn signals and hazard
flashers.
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
303
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
BLIND SPOT ASSIST LIMITATIONS
All system limitations present in the basic
lane keeping system also apply to blind spot
assist.
Blind spot assist does not function under the
following conditions:
• No lane markings are detected.
• One or both rear radar sensors become
blocked or faulty.
• Attaching bike or cargo racks could
cause false alerts due to obstruction of
the sensor.
Blind spot assist may have difficulty detecting
hazards under the following conditions:
• If a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent
lane at a speed higher than your vehicle.
• Bad weather obstructing the sensors.
BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH TRAILER
COVERAGE
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH
TRAILER COVERAGE
Blind spot assist with trailer coverage is an
extension of the lane keeping system.
It may help you identify adjacent vehicles
during a lane change.
Blind spot assist provides a blind spot
warning and steering assistance to help you
become aware of and steer away from
vehicles in your blind spot during lane
changes.
When attaching a trailer, ensure you have
properly set up the trailer coverage settings.
See Blind Spot Information System With
Trailer Coverage (page 312).
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH
TRAILER COVERAGE WORK
E420496
Switch the system on and off by accessing
the lane keeping system icon through the
multi-function button on your steering wheel.
During lane changes, the design of the blind
spot assist feature detects vehicles in, or
approaching, your blind spot and provides
a warning, plus steering assistance to direct
your vehicle back into your lane.
304
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
If a supported trailer is connected, the
function is reduced to only detecting vehicles
on both sides of your vehicle and trailer,
extending rearward from the exterior mirrors
to the end of your trailer. See Blind Spot
Information System With Trailer Coverage
(page 312).
When active, this system functions with or
without the use of turn signals and hazard
flashers.
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH TRAILER
COVERAGE LIMITATIONS
All system limitations present in the basic
lane keeping system also apply to blind spot
assist.
Blind spot assist does not function under the
following conditions:
• No lane markings are detected.
• One or both rear radar sensors become
blocked or faulty.
• You have not configured the attached
trailer correctly in the trailer tow menus
or you attached an unsupported trailer.
The system only supports certain trailer
shapes and dimensions.
Note: Blind spot assist with trailer coverage
could have reduced performance if any of
the above limitations are present.
Blind spot assist may have difficulty detecting
hazards under the following conditions:
• If a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent
lane at a relative speed much higher than
your vehicle.
• Bad weather conditions are present that
obstruct the sensors.
• Attaching bike or cargo racks could
cause false alerts due to obstruction of
the sensor.
305
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH TRAILER COVERAGE INDICATORS
E310089
Diagram 1: Vehicle A uses its left turn signal
preparing to change from the right lane to
the middle lane. Vehicle B is already in the
middle lane and just entered Vehicle A's
blind spot causing the blind spot information
system alert indicator to flash on the exterior
mirror.
Diagram 2: The driver of Vehicle A begins
to steer into the center lane not aware of
Vehicle B.
Diagram 3: Blind spot assist counter steers
to help alert the driver of Vehicle A to direct
their vehicle back into the right lane to help
avoid a possible collision with Vehicle B.
The lane keeping aid warning lamp or yellow
lane marking in your instrument cluster
display indicate blind spot assist activation.
In addition, the blind spot information system
alert indicator flashes on the exterior mirror
on the same side as the detection. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 310).
306
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
Blind Spot Assist Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle with the blind spot information system switched off
or you have not configured the trailer.
Blind Spot Assist Not Available Trailer
Attached
Displays if your blind spot information system sensors are blocked.Blind Spot Assist Not Available Side
Sensor Blocked
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Blind Spot Assist System fault
Lost communication with the trailer module. Blind spot assist is disabled until the failure is fixed.Trailer Brake Module Fault
Lost communication with the trailer module. Blind spot assist is disabled until the failure is fixed.Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual
Front camera fault. Blind spot assist is disabled until the failure is fixed.Front Camera Fault Service Required
307
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to
be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the
windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Front Camera Malfunction Service Required
The system requests that you keep your hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
308
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why is the feature not available (lane
markings are gray) when I can see the
lane markings on the road?
• Your vehicle speed is less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
• The sun is shining directly into the
camera lens.
• A quick intentional lane change has
occurred.
• You are driving your vehicle too close to
the lane markings for an extended
interval of time.
• Driving at high speeds in curves.
• The last alert warning or aid intervention
occurred a short time ago.
• Ambiguous lane markings, for example,
in construction zones.
• Rapid transition from light to dark, or from
dark to light.
• Sudden offset in lane markings.
• ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
• There is a camera blockage due to dirt,
grime, fog, frost or water on the
windshield.
• You are driving too close to the vehicle
in front of you.
• Transitioning between no lane markings
to lane markings, or vice versa.
• There is standing water on the road.
• Faint lane markings, for example, partial
yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
• Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
• You have not calibrated the camera after
a windshield replacement.
• Driving on roads with tight curves or
uneven surfaces.
Why does the vehicle not come back
toward the middle of the lane, as
expected, in the Aid, or Aid + Alert
mode?
• High cross winds are present.
• There is a large road crown.
• Rough roads, grooves or shoulder
drop-offs.
• Heavy, uneven loading of the vehicle or
improper tire inflation pressure.
• You changed the tires or modified the
suspension.
309
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lane Keeping System
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
Blind spot information system detects
vehicles that may have entered the blind
spot zone.
HOW DOES BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM WORK
Blind spot information system uses sensors
on both sides of your vehicle, detecting
rearward from the exterior mirrors to
approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear
bumper. The detection area extends to
approximately 59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear
bumper when the vehicle speed is greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
E255695
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. The blind spot information
system is not a replacement for careful
driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
Note: Blind spot information system does
not prevent contact with other vehicles. It
does not detect parked vehicles,
pedestrians, animals or other infrastructure.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Blind spot information system does not
operate in park (P) or reverse (R).
The system may not alert you if a vehicle
quickly passes through the detection zone
while overtaking.
Note: For vehicles without the trailer
coverage feature, we recommend that you
switch the blind spot information system off
when you attach a trailer.
310
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Blind Spot Information System
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Blind spot information system turns on when
all the following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
SWITCHING BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM ON AND
OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Switch Blind Spot Information System on
or off.
When you switch blind spot information
system off, a warning lamp illuminates. When
you switch the system on or off, the alert
indicators flash twice. A telltale remains
illuminated in the instrument cluster when
the blind spot information system is switched
off in the settings menu.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
LOCATING THE BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear fascia on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
We recommend switching the feature off
when using a bike or cargo rack.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
See Blind Spot Information System –
Information Messages (page 314). The alert
indicators illuminate but the system does not
alert you.
311
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Blind Spot Information System
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM
WITH TRAILER COVERAGE
WHAT IS BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM WITH TRAILER COVERAGE
A
A
E293525
Trailer coverage detection zone.A.
Blind spot information system detects
vehicles that may have entered the blind
spot zone. The detection area is on both
sides your vehicle and trailer, extending
rearward from the exterior mirrors to the end
of your trailer.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM
WITH TRAILER COVERAGE
LIMITATIONS
Trailer coverage only supports conventional
trailers.
Make sure the trailer width is less than or
equal to 8.5 ft (2.6 m) and the length is less
than 33 ft (10.1 m).
Some trailers could cause a slight change in
system performance:
• Large box trailers, including v-nose or
horse trailers, could cause false alerts to
occur when driving next to infrastructures
or near parked cars. A false alert could
also occur while making a 90° turn.
• Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a total
length greater than 20 ft (6 m) could
cause delayed alerts when a vehicle is
passing at high speeds.
• Box trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front could cause
early alerts when you pass a vehicle.
• Clam shell or v-nose box trailers with a
width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the
front could cause delayed alerts when a
vehicle traveling the same speed as your
vehicle merges lanes.
SETTING A TRAILER LENGTH
C
A
B
E293526
Trailer length.A
Trailer width.B
Trailer hitch ball.C
312
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Blind Spot Information System
You can set-up a trailer to work with the blind
spot information system through the
touchscreen by using the add trailer menu.
1. Input the trailer name and trailer type,
conventional, gooseneck or fifth wheel,
then save to continue trailer setup.
Note: The system only supports conventional
trailers.
2. Trailer width measurement. Measure the
width at the front of the trailer. It is not
measured at the widest point of the
trailer. The maximum width at the front
of the trailer the system can support is
8.5 ft (2.6 m).
Note: If the trailer is a bike rack or cargo
rack with electrical lighting, enter a length
of around 3 ft (1 m). Cross traffic alert remains
on for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or
less.
Note: The system requires proper
measurement and measure entry to properly
function.
SELECTING A TRAILER
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the trailer set up menu appears in the
touchscreen. This menu allows you to set up
a new trailer or choose from a previously set
up trailer. A warning message appears and
the system turns off if you do not choose or
add a new trailer.
Note: The warning message may not appear
until your vehicle reaches 22 mph (35 km/h).
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM INDICATORS
E309137
E249861
E249861
When blind spot information
system detects a vehicle, an alert
indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side from which the vehicle is
approaching. If you turn the turn signal on
for that side of your vehicle, the alert
indicator flashes.
313
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Blind Spot Information System
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Blind Spot System Fault
Something is blocking the sensors. Clean the sensors.Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual
The system automatically turns off and displays this message when
you connect a trailer to your vehicle under any of the following
conditions:
- Your vehicle does not have blind spot information system with trailer
coverage.
- You switch the blind spot information system off through the touch-
screen.
- Your trailer exceeds the limits for the system. See Setting a Trailer
Length (page 312). Only appears if your vehicle has blind spot
information system with trailer coverage.
Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer Attached
314
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Blind Spot Information System
Note: When connecting a trailer, the system
may detect the trailer and turn the system
OFF. If the system does not automatically
turn OFF, manually switch the blind spot
information system OFF. If your vehicle has
the blind spot information system with trailer
coverage, the system prompts you to set up
a trailer that allows the feature to function,
if your trailer meets the requirements of the
system.
315
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Blind Spot Information System
WHAT IS EXIT WARNING
Exit warning is designed to provide a visual
and audible alert when a vehicle occupant
opens a door into approaching traffic. It uses
radar sensors to alert you to traffic objects
approaching your open door.
HOW DOES EXIT WARNING WORK
Exit warning detects traffic objects such as
vehicles, cyclists, scooters and motorcycles
that approach your vehicle from the rear and
cross into the exit warning zone. The exit
warning zones are along the left and right
sides of your vehicle and extend slightly past
a fully open door. The exit warning system
becomes active once you have started your
vehicle and the vehicle is not moving. Exit
warning operates in any gear position.
E371193
Note: The system cannot detect animals,
slow moving pedestrians or any type of
stationary object.
EXIT WARNING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The system is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Always pay attention to
the traffic situation and the area around
the vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive, stop and park with due care and
attention. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Exit Warning may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always open doors with due
care and attention. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury or
property damage.
316
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exit Warning
EXIT WARNING LIMITATIONS
Exit warning shuts off approximately three
minutes after you switch your vehicle off, or
immediately after you lock your doors. When
your vehicle switches off to conserve battery
power on a low battery, exit warning also
shuts off. When exit warning turns off, a
message appears in the instrument cluster
display.
Note: Do not use exit warning as a
replacement for paying attention when
exiting your vehicle.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles by automatically closing
the doors.
Note: The system may not inform or alert
you if a traffic object is approaching too
quickly or if the parking position prevents
detection.
Exit Warning and Power Child Lock (If
Equipped)
Power child lock remains active and must be
manually deactivated. A visual warning
occurs if you attempt to switch it off at the
same time exit warning detects an
approaching traffic object.
A visual warning occurs in this situation.
Note: The driver can override the exit
warning with power child lock function by
quickly pressing the power child lock
deactivation button twice within 5 seconds.
Note: When the exit warning and power child
lock function is activated, the doors can still
be opened from the outside.
EXIT WARNING INDICATORS
E309137
When exit warning detects an approaching
traffic object on one side, the corresponding
alert indicator in the exterior mirror is
illuminated. If exit warning alert or the
optional exit warning prevention are active,
the same alert indicator flashes. See Blind
Spot Information System Indicators (page
313).
In addition to the mirror indicator there is also
visual indicator in the information display
noting what side a traffic object has been
detected on.
317
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exit Warning
SWITCHING EXIT WARNING ON
AND OFF
You can switch off the exit warning system
using the touchscreen.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
LOCATING THE EXIT WARNING
SENSORS
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer or bike rack.
EXIT WARNING – TROUBLESHOOTING
EXIT WARNING – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ReasonMessage
Left/Right exit warning alert or exit warning prevention is active.Left/Right Side Check surroundings before exiting
Displays when the exit warning system turns off or shuts down.Exit Warning turning off. Exit safely
Displays when the exit warning system detects any system error.Exit Warning System Fault
318
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exit Warning
If exit warning detects a fault, the system
deactivates and a System Fault message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
319
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Exit Warning
WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
The system is designed to alert you of road
users and traffic objects approaching from
the rear sides and from behind your vehicle
when you shift into reverse (R).
If you continue to reverse after the system
alerts you, the system is designed to apply
the brakes if it still detects approaching road
users or traffic objects. If the system applies
the brakes, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Note: There could be instances when
unexpected or unwanted braking occurs.
You can override this by firmly pressing the
accelerator pedal.
HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT WORK
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect road
users or traffic objects approaching above a
minimum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). Coverage
can decrease when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed.
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand
side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage
on that side is severely reduced.
Note: Slowly reversing helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
The system only applies the brakes for a
short period of time when an event occurs.
Take action as soon as you notice the system
applying the brakes in order to remain in
control of your vehicle, the system does not
do this for you.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
320
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Cross Traffic Alert
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air
brakes, external motors and fans may
affect the correct operation of the sensing
system. This may cause reduced
performance or false alerts.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection, for
example, inclement weather,
unconventional vehicle types and
pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with accessories that extend beyond the
front or rear of your vehicle, for example a
trailer hitch or bike rack. The system is not
able to make corrections for the additional
length of the accessories.
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The cross
traffic alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.
Note: Certain add-on devices around the
bumper or fascia may cause unexpected
system behavior. For example, large trailer
hitches, bicycle or surfboard racks, license
plate brackets, fuel containers, bumper
covers or any other device may block the
normal detection zone of the system.
Remove the add-on device to prevent
unexpected system behavior.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned or
bent, it could alter the sensing zone causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or
false alerts.
Note: Vehicle loading and suspension
changes can impact the angle of the sensors
and may change the normal detection zone
of the system resulting in inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alerts.
Note: You may experience reduced system
performance on road surfaces that limit
deceleration. For example, roads with ice,
loose gravel, mud or sand.
321
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Cross Traffic Alert
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
LIMITATIONS
The system may not correctly operate when
any of the following occur:
• Something is blocking the sensors.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are
obstructing the sensors.
• Traffic objects approach at speeds less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater than
37 mph (60 km/h).
• Your vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
• If you switch the traction system off, cross
traffic alert does not apply the brakes.
Note: The system does not alert for small
stationary and moving objects.
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations with a
Trailer Attached
The system remains on when you attach a
trailer to vehicles with blind spot information
system with trailer coverage under the
following conditions:
• You connect a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m) in
the touchscreen.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a trailer
greater than 3 ft (1 m). For vehicles with an
aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar,
we recommend that you switch the system
off when you attach a trailer.
SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Cross Traffic Alert.
3. Switch the feature on or off.
When you switch the system on or off, the
alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system switches on every time
you switch the ignition on.
LOCATING THE CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT SENSORS
E205199
The sensors are located at the rear corners
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
322
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Cross Traffic Alert
Note: Blocked sensors may affect system
accuracy.
If something is blocking the sensors, a
message may appear in the information
display.
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
We recommend switching the feature off
when using a bike or cargo rack.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
INDICATORS
E268294
When the system detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone
sounds, an alert indicator
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror and
arrows appear in the touchscreen to show
from which side the vehicle is approaching.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you or apply the brakes, even
when there is nothing in the detection zone,
for example a vehicle passing further away
from your vehicle.
323
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Cross Traffic Alert
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
Displays when the system detects a vehicle. Check for approaching
traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Displays if the cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. Clean
the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer Attached
Displays if the system applies the brakes. Check for approaching
traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert Applying Brakes
Note: If your vehicle has reverse brake
assist See Reverse Brake Assist –
Information Messages (page 237).
324
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Cross Traffic Alert
WHAT IS PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
Pre-collision assist detects and warns of
approaching hazards in the roadway. The
system provides multiple levels of assistance
to help avoid a collision if your vehicle is
rapidly approaching another stationary
vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same
direction as yours, or a pedestrian or cyclist
within your driving path.
HOW DOES PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST WORK
The system warns the driver of potential
hazards by providing three levels of
assistance.
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
potential hazards the system provides the
following levels of functionality:
1. Alert.
2. Brake support.
3. Automatic emergency braking.
E329466
Alert: When active, a flashing
visual warning appears and an
audible warning tone sounds.
Brake Support: The system helps reduce
the impact speed by preparing the brakes
for rapid braking. The system does not
automatically apply the brakes. If you press
the brake pedal, the system may apply
additional braking up to maximum braking
force, even if you lightly press the brake
pedal.
Automatic Emergency Braking: Automatic
emergency braking may activate if the
system determines that a collision is
imminent.
Note: If the pre-collision assist alerts are too
frequent or disturbing, you can reduce the
alert sensitivity. Setting the low sensitivity
results in fewer and later warnings of a
potential forward collision. The manufacturer
recommends using the high sensitivity
setting where possible.
Note: Automatic emergency braking
performance is not affected by the sensitivity
setting.
Each system has various levels of detection
capabilities. See Pre-Collision Assist
Limitations (page 327).
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system only provides
limited braking. Your vehicle may not
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Apply
the brakes when necessary.
325
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead to
a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may operate
with reduced function during cold and
inclement weather conditions. Snow, ice,
rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the
system. Keep the front camera and radar
free of snow and ice. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system may not
function properly if your vehicle is fitted
with a replacement windshield not
approved by us.
WARNING: Do not perform
windshield repairs around the rear-view
mirror. Failure to follow this instruction
could limit sensor performance.
WARNING: System performance
could be reduced in situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability. These situations include but are
not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
or cyclists with complex backgrounds,
running pedestrians or fast moving cyclists,
partly obscured pedestrians or cyclists,
pedestrians or cyclists that the system
cannot distinguish from a group. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system cannot help
prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.
WARNING: Take additional care if
your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are
towing a trailer. These conditions could
result in reduced performance of this
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Note: Automatic emergency braking may
activate when a collision is imminent. The
system cannot prevent all crashes, but may
reduce crash severity. Do not test automatic
emergency braking or forward collision
warning. Testing this system must only be
conducted by authorized test facilities using
specialized equipment. Do not use automatic
emergency braking to replace normal
braking for any reason. Relying on automatic
emergency braking to stop your vehicle may
cause an unexpected accident which could
lead to serious injury or death.
Note: The system does not detect animals.
326
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Pre-collision assist depends on the detection
ability of its camera and sensors. Any
obstructions or damage to these areas can
limit detection or prevent the system from
functioning. See Locating the Pre-Collision
Assist Sensors (page 329).
The system is active at 3 mph (5 km/h) and
above.
Note: The pre-collision assist system
automatically disables if your vehicle has
the following drive modes and you select
four-wheel drive low or manually disable
AdvanceTrac™ and rock crawl mode.
Note: Brake support and automatic
emergency braking can detect other vehicles
up to the maximum speed of your vehicle.
Pedestrian Detection Limitations
Pedestrian detection is active at speeds up
to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Pedestrian detection operates optimally
when detected hazards are clearly
identifiable. The system can have reduced
performance in situations where pedestrians
are running, partly obscured, have a complex
background, or when the system cannot
distinguish them from a group.
Cyclist Detection Limitations
Cyclist detection is active at speeds up to
50 mph (80 km/h).
Cyclist detection functions optimally when
detected hazards are clearly identifiable. The
system can have reduced performance in
situations where cyclists are fast-moving,
partly obscured, have a complex
background, or where the system cannot
distinguish them from a group.
Intersection Assist
The system operates when you turn across
the path of an oncoming vehicle, or a
pedestrian or cyclist crossing the road.
Detection of oncoming vehicles is active if
you are driving your vehicle at speeds up to
19 mph (30 km/h). Detection of crossing
pedestrians or cyclists at an intersection is
active if you are driving your vehicle at
speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h). The system
also operates when you approach the path
of a crossing vehicle. Detection of crossing
vehicles is active if you are driving your
vehicle at speeds up to 40 mph (65 km/h).
Note: In the following intersection scenarios,
your vehicle is represented in yellow.
E406606
327
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
The previous image shows potential
intersection scenarios from the perspective
of the yellow vehicle. The system may detect
the red vehicles if you encounter them within
the appropriate detection speed.
E406607
The previous image shows potential
motorcycle, bicycle, and pedestrian
intersection scenarios from the perspective
of the yellow vehicle. The system may detect
these threats if you encounter them within
the appropriate detection speed.
Pre-Collision Assist - Oncoming
Vehicles
This feature expands the function of
pre-collision assist to oncoming vehicles
within your same lane. The system can help
to reduce the severity of a crash by providing
a warning to you as well as automatically
applying the brakes. Detection of oncoming
vehicles is active if you are driving your
vehicle above 19 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST ON AND OFF
You cannot switch the system off.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the touchscreen controls in the
pre-collision assist menu:
• Change alert sensitivity to one of three
possible settings.
• If required, switch automatic emergency
braking on or off.
• If required, switch evasive steering assist
on or off.
Note: Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist automatically turn on
every time you start your vehicle.
Note: If you switch automatic emergency
braking off, evasive steering assist switches
off.
328
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
LOCATING THE PRE-COLLISION
ASSIST SENSORS
E416762
Camera.Top:
Radar sensor.Bottom:
Corner radar (if equipped).Sides:
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or
camera appears in the instrument cluster
display, something is obstructing the radar
or front windshield camera. The radar sensor
is behind the fascia in the center of the lower
grille. With a blocked sensor or camera, the
system may not function, or performance
may reduce. See Pre-Collision Assist –
Information Messages (page 331).
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Repair
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view.
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, and
something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar sensing zone
could change. This may cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Have your vehicle
serviced to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
instrument cluster display indicating
temporary sensor unavailability. When
operational conditions are correct, the
message disappears. For example, when
the ambient temperature around the sensor
decreases or the sensor successfully
recalibrates.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
WHAT IS FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING
A warning flashes and an audible warning
sounds if your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle to warn you of the risk of a
crash with the vehicle in front of you.
ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY OF
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
329
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
2. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
3. Press Alert Sensitivity.
4. Select a setting.
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY
BRAKING
Automatic emergency braking may activate
if the system determines that a collision is
imminent. The system may help to reduce
impact damage or completely avoid the
crash.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY
BRAKING ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
3. Press Auto Emergency Braking.
4. Switch the feature on or off.
Note: A telltale remains illuminated in the
instrument cluster when automatic
emergency braking is switched off using the
settings menu.
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
WHAT IS EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road
user, evasive steering assist helps you steer
around the road user.
After you turn the steering wheel in an
attempt to avoid a crash with the road user,
the system applies additional steering torque
to help you steer around the road user. After
you pass the road user, the system applies
steering torque when you turn the steering
wheel to steer back into the lane. The system
deactivates after you fully pass the road user.
Note: Road users are defined as pedestrians
or bicyclists in your vehicle's path or another
stationary vehicle in the same lane or a
vehicle traveling in the same lane in the
same direction as you. See Pre-Collision
Assist Precautions (page 325).
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
LIMITATIONS
Evasive steering assist only activates when
all the following occur:
• Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist are on.
• The system detects a road user ahead
and starts to apply the brakes.
• You significantly turn the steering wheel
to steer around a road user.
Note: Evasive steering assist does not
automatically steer around a road user. If
you do not turn the steering wheel, evasive
steering assist does not activate.
Note: Evasive steering assist does not
activate if the distance to the road user
ahead is too small and the system cannot
avoid a crash.
SWITCHING EVASIVE STEERING
ASSIST ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Pre-Collision Assist.
330
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
3. Press Evasive Steering Assist.
4. Switch the feature on or off.
Note: If you switch automatic emergency
braking off, evasive steering assist turns off.
Note: Automatic emergency braking and
evasive steering assist turn on every time
you start your vehicle.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – WARNING
LAMPS
E335612
A telltale illuminates in the
instrument cluster display to
indicate if the system is disabled,
unavailable, or temporarily degraded due to
external environmental conditions.
Note: If the telltale illuminates without a
corresponding information message, make
sure the setting for automatic emergency
braking is switched on. See Switching
Automatic Emergency Braking On and Off
(page 330). No action is needed unless an
information message appears. See
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions (page 325).
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in
front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
331
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
What should I do if the windshield in
front of the camera is dirty or
obstructed?
• Clean the outside of the windshield in
front of the camera.
What if the windshield in front of the
camera is clean, but the message
remains in the instrument cluster
display?
• Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the camera to detect that
there is no obstruction.
What should I do if the surface of the
radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed?
• Clean the grille surface in front of the
radar or remove the object causing the
obstruction.
What if the surface of the radar in the
grille is clean, but the message remains
in the instrument cluster display?
• Wait a short time. It could take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
Can weather or road conditions
interfere with the radar signals?
• Yes, weather such as heavy rain, spray
or fog as well as water, snow or ice on
the surface of the road can interfere with
the radar signals. In these situations, the
system temporarily disables this feature.
Pre-collision assist reactivates a short
time after the weather conditions
improve.
What if the radar is out of alignment
due to a front end impact?
• Have your vehicle serviced to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
332
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Pre-Collision Assist
WHAT IS SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION
Speed sign recognition detects speed limit
signs to inform you of the current speed limit.
Detected speed signs appear in the
instrument cluster display.
HOW DOES SPEED SIGN
RECOGNITION WORK
Speed sign recognition uses the front
windshield camera to detect speed signs.
If your vehicle has speed sign recognition
with Map Data, stored speed sign data may
influence the indicated speed limit value.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: Do not perform
windshield repairs around the rear-view
mirror. Failure to follow this instruction
could limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
Ford.
WARNING: Not all traffic signs can
be recognized by the system and
displayed correctly.
Note: Always fit our original parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
reduce system performance.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
LIMITATIONS
Speed sign recognition may not detect the
correct speed due to:
• Construction zones.
• Outdated map data.
333
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Speed Sign Recognition
• Incorrect recognition of speed limits by
the sensor of signs on parallel roads or
exit ramps.
• Missed recognition of faded, dirty, or
distorted signs.
Note: The system may not detect all speed
signs and may incorrectly read signs.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
INDICATORS
E430728
When the system detects a speed limit sign,
it appears in the instrument cluster display.
Note: Sign indicator image may vary based
on your vehicle's display type.
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION
SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press driver
assistance.
2. Press Speed Limit Assist.
You can adjust the following settings:
• Switch the speed warning on or off.
• Set the speed limit tolerance (if
equipped).
E366956
If you see this icon next to a menu
option, press it for more
information.
334
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Speed Sign Recognition
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION – TROUBLESHOOTING
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The traffic sign data provided by the Map Data is unavailable due to
weak or no signal. Wait for a short period of time for the signal to
improve. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See Manual
335
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Speed Sign Recognition
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why does the speed limit change
without any sign on the road?
• The speed limit changes due to the
speed limit data stored in the map data.
Why does speed sign recognition show
a wrong speed limit?
• The system shows a wrong speed limit
due to incorrect and outdated map data
or due to incorrect recognition of the
speed limits by the camera.
336
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Speed Sign Recognition
WHAT IS DRIVER ALERT
Driver alert alerts you if it determines that
you are becoming drowsy or if your driving
deteriorates.
HOW DOES DRIVER ALERT WORK
Driver alert determines your alertness level
based on your driving behavior in relation to
the lane markings and other factors using
the front windshield camera.
E309385
DRIVER ALERT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may
result in the system warning you even if
you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
Note: If something is blocking the camera
or damaged the windshield, Driver Alert may
not function.
337
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Driver Alert
DRIVER ALERT LIMITATIONS
Driver alert may not function correctly if:
• The sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
• Your vehicle's speed is less than
approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
SWITCHING DRIVER ALERT ON
AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
Assistance.
2. Press Driver Alert.
3. Switch the feature on or off.
DRIVER ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING
DRIVER ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
338
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Driver Alert
LOAD CARRYING PRECAUTIONS
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides
maximum return of vehicle design
performance. Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
and Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WARNING: The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the
maximum payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss
of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification label vehicle
weight limits can adversely affect the
performance and handling of your vehicle,
cause vehicle damage and can result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use replacement
tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher
limit than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle
weight rating can adversely affect the
performance and handling of your vehicle,
cause vehicle damage and can result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle differently
than unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating.
339
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Load Carrying
LOCATING THE SAFETY
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
LABELS
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
E423210
The Safety Compliance Certification label is
located on the door pillar, door latch post,
or the door edge that meets the door latch
post, next to the driver seat.
WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE
WEIGHT RATING
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that
a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These
numbers are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE
WEIGHT RATING
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all
options, equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
WHAT IS THE GROSS COMBINED
WEIGHT RATING
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating,
not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should be used
for safe control of towed vehicles and for
trailers where the Gross Combined Weight
of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the
towing vehicle. See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 358).
340
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Load Carrying
CALCULATING PAYLOAD
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload is the combined weight of cargo and
passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The
maximum payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The label is
either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver
door. Vehicles exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and loading
label. Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb” for maximum payload.
The payload listed on the Tire and Loading
Information label is the maximum payload
for your vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional equipment
on your vehicle, you must determine the new
payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on the
Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer
tongue weight or king pin weight is also part
of payload.
CALCULATING THE LOAD LIMIT
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
341
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Load Carrying
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity.
You decide to go golfing. Is there enough
load capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You and four
friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms)
each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The
calculation would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x
30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes,
you have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your golf
bags. In metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) - (5 x
13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5
kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity.
You and one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home improvement
store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past two years. Measuring
the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat
folded down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you and your
friend each weigh 220 pounds (99
kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = -
240 pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load weight by
at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation would
be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load
capacity to transport the cement and your
friend home. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms)
- (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that the
loads are positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload the front or
the rear gross axle weight rating specified
for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
ROOF RACK
ROOF RACK PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Read and follow the
manufacturer's instructions when you are
fitting a roof rack.
342
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Load Carrying
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle differently
than unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
Note: If you use a roof rack, the fuel
consumption of your vehicle will be higher
and you may experience different driving
characteristics.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
You must place loads directly on the
crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails.
When using the roof rack system, we
recommend that you use genuine Ford
accessory crossbars specifically designed
for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
ROOF RACK LOAD CAPACITIES
Maximum Recommended LoadDescription
100 lb (45 kg)Vehicles with a glass roof.
175 lb (79 kg)Vehicles without a glass roof.
Note: The maximum roof load is based on
evenly distributing the load on the crossbars.
Note: When using a roof rack system, you
must subtract the weight of the roof rack
system from the maximum recommended
load to determine your actual maximum
cargo load. See the roof rack system
manufacturer for more information.
343
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Load Carrying
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Make sure that you
properly secure objects in the luggage
compartment. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects on
the luggage cover. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the
maximum payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss
of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
maximum front and rear axle loads for your
vehicle.
Note: When loading long objects into your
vehicle, for example pipes, timber or
furniture, be careful not to damage the
interior trim.
INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT CARGO
NET
WARNING: This net is not designed
to restrain objects during a collision or
heavy braking.
E275127
1. Fold down the hooks on the top of the
rear quarter trim panel.
344
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Luggage Compartment
E275126
2. Attach the loop end of the net to the
upper hook. Use one prong on the hook
for the net attachment.
E275125
3. Attach the bottom of the net to the lower
anchor point.
E275124
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side
of your vehicle.
ADJUSTING THE LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT LOAD FLOOR
Short Wheelbase Load Floor
E417176
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges. This allows you to put it in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.
345
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Luggage Compartment
E417177
To close, lower the cover.
Long Wheelbase Load Floor
The load floor provides access to two
separate storage compartments.
E417611
Lift up on the handle and fold the cover back
to access the first storage compartment.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges. This allows you to put it in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.
E417612
To access the second storage compartment,
fold the rear cover.
To close, lower the covers.
ADJUSTING THE LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT DIVIDER
Advanced Luggage Compartment
Divider (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not load any objects
on the shelf that may obstruct your vision
or strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING: Do not place people or
pets on or under the parcel shelf.
Forward Divider
E250828
346
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Luggage Compartment
To move the board into the divider position,
lift up on the handle and position the board
vertically at a 90° angle.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges. This allows you to put it in any
position between 0–90° angle.
Cargo Shelf
E250829
To move the board into the shelf position,
lift the board and move it to the horizontal
position. Once the board is horizontal, insert
the forward-facing nubs into the hooks on
either side.
For the short wheelbase, raise the second
panel toward the front of the vehicle when
you have the seats folded down.
For the long wheelbase, raise the second
panel toward the front of the vehicle.
Note: Before moving the board into the shelf
position, you may need to flip down the
hooks.
Note: Do not put more than 35 lb (15 kg) on
the shelf.
Rear Barrier (Bulkhead Position)
E250830
To move the board into the rear barrier or
bulkhead position, lift the board and move it
to the vertical position. Once the board is
vertical, insert the rearward facing nubs into
the hooks on either side.
Note: Before moving the board into the rear
barrier or bulkhead position, you may need
to flip down the hooks.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ANCHOR
POINTS
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ANCHOR
POINT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Make sure that you
properly secure objects in the luggage
compartment. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
347
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Luggage Compartment
CONNECTING A TRAILER
PRECAUTIONS
Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation and
adjustment specifications.
Service your vehicle more frequently if you
tow a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 530).
If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Account for the trailer coupler weight as part
of your vehicle load when calculating the
total vehicle weight.
Do not exceed the load limits. See
Calculating the Load Limit (page 341).
HITCHES
INSTALLING A HITCH
WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld or
modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer
hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You must
distribute the load in your trailer so that
10-15% of the total weight of the trailer is on
the tongue. Do not exceed the tongue load
rating indicated on the hitch receiver.
Trailer Hitch Cover
Your vehicle has a removable trailer hitch
cover. To remove the trailer hitch cover:
E268259
1. Grab the trailer hitch cover at the bottom
and pull towards the rear of the vehicle
until the bottom of the trailer hitch cover
unsnaps from the bumper.
2. Grab the trailer hitch cover at the edge
and rotate until the top of the trailer hitch
cover unsnaps from the bumper, then
remove the trailer hitch cover.
To install the trailer hitch cover:
348
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connecting a Trailer
E268260
1. Line up the snaps on the trailer hitch
cover to the holes on the bumper and
push forward until it snaps into place.
HOOKING UP A TRAILER USING A
WEIGHT-DISTRIBUTING HITCH
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is
higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
A weight-distributing hitch helps distribute
tongue load to all towing vehicle and trailer
wheels. For more information, visit the links
in the following table.
WebsiteMarket
https://www.fordpro.com/en-us/fleet-vehicles/manuals-and-guides/United States of America
https://www.fordpro.ca/en-ca/fleet-vehicles/manuals-and-guides/Canada (English)
https://www.fordpro.ca/fr-ca/fleet-vehicles/manuals-and-guides/Canada (French)
349
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connecting a Trailer
CONNECTING A TRAILER
Recognizing a Trailer
1. Attach the trailer and wiring connector
to your vehicle.
2. Switch on your vehicle.
3. Set up a profile for the trailer using the
touchscreen.
Note: If your vehicle does not recognize the
trailer, press and hold the brake pedal for a
few seconds.
Note: Trailer profiles store trailer types,
dimensions, preferences, trailer specific
mileage and fuel economy.
Note: Disabling the trailer detection
notification makes the default trailer profile
active when a connection is detected.
Note: Trailer profiles allows you to setup
several trailer maintenance reminders and
maintenance intervals for multiple trailer
components by specifying miles and months
in service.
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Trailer Light Check
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring;
this may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Most towed vehicles require trailer lamps.
Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn
signals and hazard lights are working.
Safety Chains
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer hitch
as recommended by the manufacturer. Cross
the chains under the trailer coupler and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
E265060
350
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connecting a Trailer
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure to fully close the latch.
TRAILER LIGHTING CHECK
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring;
this may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Perform a trailer light illumination sequence
to confirm that all lights are functioning by
using the Lincoln mobile app or the vehicle's
touchscreen.
Note: The Lincoln mobile app allows one
person to confirm that all lights are
functioning.
Performing the Trailer Lighting Check
Using the Touchscreen
1. Open the towing app using the app
menu.
2. Open the towing settings.
3. Press Trailer Light Check.
4. Press Start.
TRAILER BATTERY CHARGE/ TRAILER
POWER FEED
This feature allows the trailer’s battery to
charge under the following situations:
• Your vehicle is in the accessory or engine
run position
• If the vehicle’s battery voltage is in
optimum condition, above 12.5 volts, and
the trailer’ s battery can still hold a charge,
or is not too old.
Note: The trailer battery charge status
appears in the instrument cluster display.
See Instrument Cluster (page 134).
The trailer power feed feature allows for a
12 volt power output on a 7-pin connector
when the system detects a trailer.
Note: Trailer power feed can provide a
maximum output rate of 15 amps.
Note: Never place more demand than 15
amps of power on the trailer power feed, this
may damage the trailer lighting.
351
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connecting a Trailer
CONNECTING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
CONNECTING A TRAILER – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The system senses a trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
There are certain faults in the vehicle wiring, trailer wiring or brake
system.
Trailer Wiring Fault
The vehicle battery voltage is low, there is a fault with the trailer battery
or the trailer battery voltage is below 8 V.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure.Trailer Tire Low Specified:
Displays when one or more tires on the trailer is above the recom-
mended temperature.
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Capability Not Detected
352
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connecting a Trailer
DetailsMessage
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not Setup See Manual
353
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connecting a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit
of your vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
lowest rating capacity for your vehicle
or trailer hitch. Overloading your
vehicle or trailer hitch can impair your
vehicle stability and handling. Failure
to follow this instruction could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure that the
vertical load on the tow ball is between
the minimum and maximum
recommended weight at all times.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld
or modify the trailer hitch. Modifying
the trailer hitch could reduce the hitch
rating.
WARNING: The anti-lock brake
system does not control the trailer
brakes.
TRAILER BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
WARNING: Do not tow a trailer fitted
with electric trailer brakes unless your
vehicle is fitted with a compatible
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controller. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death. For
additional information and assistance, we
recommend that you contact an authorized
dealer.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
354
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined weight
rating.
Certain states require functioning trailer
brakes for trailers over a specified weight.
Be sure to check state regulations for this
specified weight.
Ford Motor Company recommends separate
functioning brake systems for trailers
weighing more than 1,500 lb (680 kg) when
loaded.
TOWING A TRAILER LIMITATIONS
The vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer also depends on
additional systems present in your
vehicle. See Lane Centering
Precautions (page 273). See Adaptive
Cruise Control Precautions (page 264).
Note: Your vehicle could have reduced
performance when operating at high
altitudes and when heavily loaded or
towing a trailer. When driving at
elevation, to match driving performance
as perceived at sea level, reduce gross
vehicle weight and gross combination
weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation.
LOADING YOUR TRAILER
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight. The trailer
tongue weight should never exceed
10% of the maximum towing capacity.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
TRAILER TOWING HINTS
Towing a trailer places an extra load on your
vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes,
tires and suspension. Periodically inspect
these components during and after any
towing operation.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight
takeoff vibration or shudder may be present
due to the increased payload weight.
355
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle may have a temporary or
conventional spare tire. A temporary spare
tire is different in diameter or width,
tread-type, or is from a different manufacturer
than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult
information on the tire label or Safety
Compliance label for limitations when using.
When towing a trailer:
• Obey country specific regulations for
towing a trailer.
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off when you are towing on
long, steep slopes.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not continuously
apply the brakes, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
• If your transmission has Grade Assist or
Tow/Haul, use this feature when towing.
This provides engine braking and helps
eliminate excessive transmission shifting
for optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Your vehicle has AdvanceTrac with roll
stability control. When towing a trailer,
additional loads could cause the
AdvanceTrac system to engage during
cornering maneuvers. Reduce cornering
speeds to make sure that you can
maintain control of the vehicle and trailer
if the AdvanceTrac system engages.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
gradually brake.
• Avoid parking on a slope. However, if
you must park on a slope, turn the
steering wheel to point your vehicle tires
away from traffic flow, set the parking
brake, place the transmission in park (P)
and place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels.
Note: Chocks are not included with your
vehicle.
LAUNCHING OR RETRIEVING A
BOAT OR PERSONAL
WATERCRAFT
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
356
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
Exceeding 6 in (15 cm) could allow water to
enter vehicle components, causing internal
damage to the components and affecting
driveability, emissions and reliability.
Note: Replace the rear axle lubricant
anytime the rear axle has been submerged
in water.
Note: Disconnect the trailer wiring connector
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the trailer wiring connector
after removing the trailer from the water.
AUTO TOW/HAUL
HOW DOES AUTO TOW/HAUL WORK
This mode helps keep the engine at the best
RPM range by changing shift points,
providing sufficient power for acceleration,
and reducing the frequency of transmission
shifting. This mode also provides engine
braking in all forward gears, which slows your
vehicle and assists you in controlling your
vehicle when descending a slope. The
amount of downshift braking provided varies
based on the amount you press the brake
pedal. The system tunes the steering and
suspension to enhance driving comfort when
towing or carrying heavy loads.
Note: This mode does not default to a
certain four-wheel drive mode and maintains
the previous selection. The system tunes the
steering and suspension to enhance driving
comfort when towing or carrying heavy
loads.
Switching Auto Tow/Haul On and Off
1. From the settings menu, press Towing.
2. Press settings.
3. Switch Auto Tow/Haul on or off.
357
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
TOWING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
WebsiteMarket
https://www.fordpro.com/en-us/fleet-vehicles/manuals-and-
guides/
United States of America
https://www.fordpro.ca/en-ca/fleet-vehicles/manuals-and-
guides/
Canada (English)
https://www.fordpro.ca/fr-ca/fleet-vehicles/manuals-and-guides/Canada (French)
358
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM LOADED
TRAILER WEIGHT
The maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow.
CALCULATING THE MAXIMUM
LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT FOR YOUR
VEHICLE
1. Start with the gross combined weight
rating for your vehicle model and
axle ratio.
2. Subtract all of the following that
apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, for example
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded trailer
weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for your
vehicle. Reduce the total payload by the
final trailer tongue weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not
sure.
359
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
TOWING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING
TOWING A TRAILER – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The left-hand trailer turn lamp requires service.Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
The right-hand trailer turn lamp requires service.Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
The vehicle battery voltage is low, there is a fault with the trailer battery
or the trailer battery voltage is below 8 V.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
The system detects a short created by the trailer lamps. Inspect and
repair the trailer wiring, or have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual
The trailer stoplamps require service.Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check Lamps
Verify the trailer brake connections are secure and that the aftermarket
trailer brake controller device is correctly installed. Perform a trailer
brake and trailer light check if possible. If the message persists, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Trailer brake system fault See manual
Perform a trailer brake and trailer light check if possible. If the message
persists, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Trailer brake module fault
The trailer sway control detects trailer sway. Reduce the vehicle's
speed.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
360
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
DetailsMessage
Displays when one or more tires on the trailer is above the recom-
mended temperature.
Trailer Tire Over Temperature
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure.Trailer Tire Low Specified:
A trailer tire pressure sensor requires service. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system requires service. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system.Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Capability Not Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not Setup See Manual
361
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing a Trailer
WHAT IS THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
The trailer brake controller assists in smooth
and effective trailer braking based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE
CONTROLLER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Use the integrated trailer
brake controller to properly adjust the
trailer brakes and check all connections
before towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as application
during trailer sway, could cause instability
of trailer or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of the
trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock up
on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed item.
Ford is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to
misuse or customer installation.
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
Note: Make sure to set the integrated trailer
brake controller gain to 0 if you are using
an aftermarket trailer brake controller.
USING THE INTEGRATED TRAILER
BRAKE CONTROLLER
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover issues with
your trailer.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
Note: Select default mode if the trailer has
surge brakes, or no brakes at all. The system
has no effect on the braking performance of
the trailer in either of these cases.
Note: If a trailer is connected by a four-pin
connector, the trailer braking function will
not be supported.
362
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a message
confirming connection appears in the
information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment to find the
desired starting point. A gain setting of
6.0 is a good starting point for heavier
loads.
Note: Use the following steps to adjust the
gain setting whenever road, weather and
trailer, or vehicle loading conditions, change
from when you initially set the gain.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface and squeeze
the manual control lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by
squealing tires, reduce the gain setting.
If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase
the gain setting. Repeat Steps 5 and 6
until the gain setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a
heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up may
not be attainable even with the maximum
gain setting of 10.
Note: Only perform this procedure at speeds
of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
Note: The trailer brake controller reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph
(18 km/h) so that trailer and vehicle braking
is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only
available when applying the brakes using
your vehicle's brake pedal, not the controller.
Note: Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work independently of
each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of
your vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
Note: With the proper electrical connection,
pressing your vehicle brake pedal or using
the manual control lever illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Note: When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the display
and module shut down. The controller
module and display turn on when you switch
the ignition on.
Adjusting the Trailer Brake Gain
E333154
Increase or decrease the amount
of gain in set increments.
A
Slide the control to engage the
trailer brakes.
B
Note: Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
363
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
Note: The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer wheels
may lead to trailer instability.
Note: Setting adjustments are saved when
a trailer profile is selected.
ADJUSTING THE INTEGRATED
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER
MODE
Select the correct integrated trailer brake
controller mode option using the
touchscreen.
Note: Trailer brake gain settings are saved
to the active trailer profile.
Selecting the Trailer Brake Type
1. Press Default for trailers with
electromagnetic drum brake systems or
press Electric over Hydraulic for trailers
with electrically actuated hydraulic brake
systems.
2. Press Save.
Selecting the Trailer Brake Effort
1. Select a setting for your trailer.
Note: The default value is Low and is the
recommended setting for most trailers.
Select a different setting if your trailer's
brakes require more initial voltage, or you
prefer more aggressive trailer braking.
2. Press Save.
364
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER – TROUBLESHOOTING
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER – INFORMATION MESSAGES
ActionMessage
The system detects a correct trailer connection during a given ignition
cycle.
Trailer Connected
The system detects the trailer wiring connection is disconnected,
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The system detects an electrical fault in the trailer brake circuit. If this
message appears without a trailer attached, see your authorized
dealer. If a trailer is attached, inspect and repair the trailer wiring.
Trailer Wiring Fault
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0}
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake when you do not
have a trailer connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} No Trailer
365
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE
CONTROLLER – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
How do I determine if there is an issue
with the wiring on my vehicle?
• A message displays accompanied by a
single tone, when no trailer is connected.
This indicates that the issue is between
the trailer brake controller and the 7-pin
connector at the bumper.
How do I determine if there is an issue
with the wiring on my trailer?
• A message only displays with a trailer
connected. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance.
366
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
HOW DOES TRAILER SWAY
CONTROL WORK
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine torque
to aid vehicle stability.
If the trailer begins to sway, the stability
control lamp flashes and the message Trailer
Sway Reduce Speed appears in the
information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Check the vertical weight on the tow ball
and trailer load distribution.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature only activates when
significant trailer sway occurs.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple times,
gradually reducing vehicle speed.
SWITCHING TRAILER SWAY
CONTROL ON AND OFF
1. From the settings menu, press Towing.
2. Press settings.
3. Switch Trailer Sway Control.
The system turns on each time you start your
vehicle.
367
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Sway Control
WHAT IS TRAILER HITCHING
ASSISTANCE
Trailer hitching assistance helps the driver
align the vehicle hitch ball to a trailer coupler.
HOW DOES TRAILER HITCHING
ASSISTANCE WORK
Trailer hitching assistance uses the following
to detect your trailer:
• Rear view camera.
• Radar.
• Parking aid sensors.
• External rear lighting.
This feature also controls the following to
align the hitch ball with the trailer coupler:
• Steering.
• Shifting.
• Braking and acceleration.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance. Do not cover the sensors with
bumper stickers, tape, repair compound or
other objects.
E383821
TRAILER HITCHING ASSISTANCE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system is not
designed to detect cyclists, motorcyclists,
pedestrians or animals. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
368
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Hitching Assistance
Note: Trailer hitching assistance only works
with conventional trailers, couplers and hitch
balls.
Note: The hitch ball must be properly
installed on the vehicle for the system to
function as intended. An improperly installed
hitch ball could result in damage to your
vehicle or trailer.
Note: Certain aftermarket modifications such
as oversized tires or lift kits could make
trailer hitching assistance fail or not work as
intended.
Note: Keep the sensors and camera free
from snow, ice and dirt.
Note: Clean the camera lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
TRAILER HITCHING ASSISTANCE
LIMITATIONS
The system could not function, or could
function with reduced performance, during
the following:
• When using trailer hitching assistance in
tall grass and weeds.
• When safety chains, cables or wiring are
dangling near the coupler.
• When using trailer hitching assistance on
slippery surfaces.
• When using hitches that raise the hitch
ball more than 4 in (10 cm), lower the
hitch ball by more than 6 in (16 cm) or
extend the hitch ball away from the
vehicle more than 12 in (30 cm).
• When using hitches that are less than
10 in (25 cm) from the ground.
• When using objects taller than 8 in
(20 cm), such as large blocks under the
jack stand.
• When you park the trailer on surfaces
that are similar in color to the trailer
coupler and hitch ball.
• A black coupler or hitch ball over a
dark asphalt surface.
• A light color coupler or hitch ball over
a light concrete surface.
• When there are low or no light sources,
such as at night.
• The system may not work accurately
during cold weather conditions. If this
occurs, allow the vehicle to reach optimal
temperature to resume operation.
For additional information, refer to the Ford
Support website.
369
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Hitching Assistance
SWITCHING TRAILER HITCHING
ASSISTANCE ON AND OFF
E420801
Press the button to switch the system on and
off. You can also switch the system off
through the touchscreen.
USING TRAILER HITCHING
ASSISTANCE
Before switching on the system, make sure
that your vehicle:
• Is within 20 ft (6 m) of the trailer and no
closer than 7 ft (2 m).
• Is less than a 30° approach angle to the
trailer.
• Is within 3 ft (1 m) of the front of the trailer
facing the same direction.
• Is clear of obstacles or other vehicles
within 6 ft (1.8 m) on either side of your
vehicle or the trailer.
• Has the liftgate in the fully closed
position.
• Has radar, sensor, and camera free from
snow, ice and dirt.
• Has parking aid sensors switched on in
the touchscreen.
E420801
1. Press the Pro Trailer button.
Note: Press the Pro Trailer button to switch
the system on and off.
370
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Hitching Assistance
E417096
2. Select when asked, Is a trailer connected
on the touchscreen to activate the
system.
3. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Pressing the Pro Trailer button other
than when prompted turns off the system.
TRAILER HITCHING ASSISTANCE
INDICATORS
E317892
The white indicator represents the
system searching for the trailer.
Continue moving the vehicle until
the trailer coupler is inside this indicator. The
indicator turns green once the trailer coupler
is in the correct position.
E317891
The bracket shows you the
estimated location of your trailer.
E317893
The yellow indicator represents
that you have positioned your
vehicle too close to the trailer and
you need to pull away from the trailer until
the indicator turns green.
Trailer Hitching Assistance Audible
Indicators
A tone sounds as part of normal operation
of the system to alert the driver that an action
needs to be taken or an event has been
completed.
371
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Hitching Assistance
WHAT IS TRAILER BACKUP
ASSISTANCE
Trailer backup assistance utilizes the control
knob on the instrument panel to help you
steer a trailer. Turn the control knob in the
direction you want the trailer to go and the
system steers the vehicle.
HOW DOES TRAILER BACKUP
ASSISTANCE WORK
Trailer backup assistance uses a sticker to
detect the trailer angle relative to the towing
vehicle and provides instructions, graphics
and camera views on the touchscreen.
TRAILER BACKUP ASSISTANCE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: This system does not
automatically brake your vehicle. This
system is an extra driving aid. It does not
replace your attention and judgment, or
the need to apply the brakes. If you do not
apply the brakes when necessary, you may
collide with another vehicle or other
objects.
Note: The system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices. Always be aware of your
vehicle and trailer combination, and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or prevent
your vehicle or trailer from making contact
with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: The front end of your vehicle swings
out when changing the direction of the
trailer.
Note: In certain conditions, the trailer could
turn faster or the trailer angle could increase
more than anticipated. Always monitor the
clearance between the trailer and vehicle
and the surroundings.
372
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
SETTING UP THE TRAILER BACKUP
ASSISTANCE FOR A CONVENTIONAL
TRAILER
CONFIGURING THE TRAILER
You must configure a trailer in the system to
use the trailer reversing aids. This is a
one-time setup process per trailer and the
trailer information is saved in the system for
the next time you use that trailer.
The system only works with conventional
trailers. It does not work with other types
including gooseneck and fifth-wheel. The
following illustration shows examples of
conventional trailers on the left-hand side.
E209766
Positioning the Trailer
Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect
the electrical wiring harness. Check to make
sure that the wiring is working.
E247482
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle.
E247481
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle
are in line with each other. You can do this
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and
pulling straight forward.
373
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
Configuring the Trailer in the
Touchscreen
E417096
1. Press the button to switch the system on.
2. Press Add Trailer on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the directions on the touchscreen
to enter the trailer name, then proceed
to the sticker setup. See Applying the
Trailer Reversing Aid Sticker (page 374).
APPLYING THE TRAILER REVERSING
AID STICKER
Place the sticker in an area visible by the rear
view camera. The entire sticker must be
within 4–19 in (10–48 cm) from the center of
the hitch ball, as shown in the following
illustration.
E333148
Use the sticker placement card and a tape
measure to determine the appropriate area
to place the sticker. Make sure the entire
sticker is within the green zone between the
two arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the rear view camera
display.
Once you have found the correct location,
place the sticker.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker such
as a jack handle or wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry, and
clean horizontal surface. For best results,
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after placing
them. Do not reuse any stickers if removed.
Note: You can purchase additional stickers
through your authorized dealer.
CALIBRATING THE SYSTEM
Calibrating the system requires driving
forward and turning left or right. Follow the
instructions on the touchscreen to complete
the calibration process.
374
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
E352329
Note: To calibrate the system, you need an
area where you can safely drive forward and
turn left or right. An open parking lot is an
ideal place to perform the calibration.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight when
instructed to by the touchscreen. If the
steering wheel is in a turned position during
this instruction, the calibration pauses.
Note: During calibration, the system
determines the trailer length. The system
supports trailer lengths of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m) distance from the hitch point
to the center of the axle or axles. The system
is designed to work with drawbars that have
a license plate to hitch ball center
measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when
installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars or
trailers that have a length outside of this
range as the system performance degrades
and could cause improper system function.
Note: The touchscreen shows if you are
going too slow or fast. Calibration pauses if
the speed is outside the required range of
2–9 mph (4–15 km/h).
Note: You need to complete at least a 90°
turn, and longer trailers could require a 180°
turn. Camera trailer tracking requires the
system to locate the hitch ball as well as
determine the trailer length. Some trailers
could require you to drive straight then turn
multiple times before calibration completes.
The touchscreen provides instructions and
notifies you when calibration completes.
Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
system at night when calibrating.
SWITCHING TRAILER BACKUP
ASSISTANCE ON AND OFF
E417096
Press the button and use the touchscreen
to select the connected trailer.
Note: A trailer must be configured to use
trailer backup assistance.
375
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
Note: If you use the steering wheel when
using trailer backup assistance, the system
turns off and a message displays in the
touchscreen.
Note: If the trailer was connected just prior
to turning the system on, you may need to
drive forward to initialize the system. Follow
the instructions on the touchscreen to
activate the system.
USING THE TRAILER BACKUP
ASSISTANCE CONTROLLER
Use the control knob to steer the trailer. Take
your hands off the steering wheel and turn
the control knob instead. The control knob
acts as the steering control for the trailer.
E417144
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make the
trailer go left.
E417145
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
E417146
Release the knob when the trailer is moving
in the direction you want.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the knob
results in a jerky movement of the vehicle.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.
376
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
Note: If you want the trailer to turn sharper
you can change the trailer angle limit. See
Using the Trailer Backup Assistance Views
(page 377).
USING THE TRAILER BACKUP
ASSISTANCE VIEWS
Up to three camera views could be available
when using trailer backup assistance. Use
the view that helps you the most when
reversing your vehicle and trailer.
E310996
360° camera view. Shows a 360°
view on the right-hand side of the
touchscreen with a rear camera
view on the left-hand side of the
touchscreen.
E310967
Rear view camera view. Shows
your trailer hitch or what is directly
behind your vehicle.
E310965
Trailer reverse guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
your vehicle and the trailer. In auto
mode, this view moves as the trailer moves
so that you do not have to adjust the camera
as you turn. Left and right arrows let you see
other camera views.
E315644
Auto. Press to return to auto view.
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
Hitch Angle Graphic
The hitch angle graphic shows a small
representation of your vehicle and trailer with
visual feedback to help you monitor the
trailer. The graphic shows two different
colored lines for the trailer hitch angle. A
black line shows you where your trailer is in
relation to your vehicle. The white line
represents the amount the trailer can turn
based on knob input.
The graphic shows a yellow and red zone
for the hitch angle to warn you of a high
angle condition that could require you to pull
forward to reduce the hitch angle. The angle
limits for each zone vary based on the trailer
length.
The yellow zone indicates you are
approaching the maximum controllable trailer
angle for the system. When the trailer enters
this zone, it is more difficult to reduce the
trailer turn when backing up. It may be
necessary to put your vehicle back into drive
(D) and pull forward to get your vehicle and
trailer back to an in-line position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded
the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Immediately stop reversing. Put
your vehicle into drive (D) and pull forward
until the trailer is no longer in the red zone.
Setting the Trailer Angle Limit
1. Press Features on the touchscreen.
2. Press Towing.
3. Press Manage trailers.
377
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
4. Press the saved trailer you want to
change.
5. Press Pro Trailer Backup Assist.
6. Press Trailer Angle Limit.
7. Press a setting.
Normal Control Angle
Default setting. This provides a balanced limit
that returns from a turn to straight backing
with minimal change to the trailer direction.
Max Control Angle
Increases the trailer angle limit close to the
maximum controllable angle to allow sharper
turns but also causes more change in the
trailer direction when straightening out from
a turn.
378
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
TRAILER BACKUP ASSISTANCE – TROUBLESHOOTING
TRAILER BACKUP ASSISTANCE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system turns on and is initializing.Detecting Trailer Please Wait…
A condition exists that prevents the system from turning on. If the
message continues to display, visit your authorized dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not Available
The steering system needs to learn internal parameters to fully enable
the feature. Drive your vehicle straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving Required to Initialize Steering Press
Knob to Exit
Displays when you reach the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get the
truck and trailer back to an in-line position.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer angle Press
Knob to Exit
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the
trailer calibration. Delete the trailer from the system and repeat the
setup and calibration process.
379
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
DescriptionMessage
Displays when you exceed the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get your
vehicle and trailer back to an in-line position, then activate the system
by selecting the connected trailer and following the instructions on
the touchscreen.
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the
trailer setup and calibration. Delete the trailer from the system and
repeat the setup and calibration process.
Stop now. Deactivated by trailer angle.
Displays when the system can no longer steer the vehicle and you
must take over steering.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control of Steering Wheel
These messages display when the system does not detect the trailer.
Make sure the rear camera is clean, and the sticker is clearly visible
in the camera image. You can also move the trailer forward or back-
ward to change the trailer position and lighting conditions
If these messages continue to display, visit your authorized dealer to
have your vehicle checked.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not Detected. Shift to Park Press
Knob to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not Detected. Refer to Owner's
Manual. Press Knob to Exit
380
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
DescriptionMessage
Display when the camera system cannot detect the trailer and requires
trailer movement to enable trailer detection. Drive forward above
2 mph (3 km/h) to initialize the system.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not Detected Pull Forward to
Initialize Press Knob to Exit
Displays when your vehicle is backing up but the system is not activ-
ated. Select the connected trailer on the touchscreen and follow the
instructions to activate the system.
This message also displays when you back up during the calibration
process.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now System Not Active Press Knob
to Exit
Displays when the system turns on and is available to use.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Backup Slowly Turn Knob to Steer Press
Knob to Exit
381
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
TRAILER BACKUP ASSISTANCE –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why does the trailer not reverse
straight?
• Verify the sticker is correctly applied.
Other factors such as the hitch
connection, road camber, road slope and
trailer suspension could influence how
straight the system can reverse the trailer
when the control knob is not turned. You
can compensate for the trailer drifting to
the right or left by slowly turning the knob
until the trailer is following your desired
path and holding the knob in that
position. Check that the correct trailer is
selected in the touchscreen. Verify the
sticker is correctly applied and check that
the drawbar and the trailer dimensions
are within the allowed range. If the trailer
consistently does not reverse straight,
delete the trailer from the system and
repeat the setup process to calibrate the
trailer.
What does it mean if the system
remains on one message for an
extended time during calibration?
• The camera could need to be cleaned,
the sticker could be blocked, the drawbar
could be outside the allowed range of
9–18 in (23–46 cm) or you could need to
move to a different area to change the
lighting and background. Verify the
sticker is in the proper location. See
Applying the Trailer Reversing Aid
Sticker (page 374). You can move to a
different area or change the direction you
are driving or set up the system at a
different time of day. Some trailers are
not compatible with the sticker and
camera system.
What does it mean if the system
pauses during calibration?
• There could be steering input or trailer
movement during the straight drive
portion of the calibration process.
What does it mean if the system
displays hold steering steady during
turn?
• Part of the calibration process for the
sticker setup requires a steady turn. If
you are continually moving the steering
wheel during the turn, this delays the
calibration process. To enable the
calibration process, hold the steering
wheel at the same position when turning.
What does it mean if the system
displays that it is not available?
• There could be a sub-system that the
system uses that is not correctly
operating or there could be a battery
voltage issue. If the system continues to
display it is not available, visit your
authorized dealer to have your vehicle
checked.
382
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
What does it mean if the system
displays that driving is required to
initialize steering?
• The steering system needs to learn
internal parameters to fully turn on the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes. This could also
occur when your vehicle is new, there is
a battery voltage issue or if the steering
system has been serviced.
What does it mean if the trailer is at its
maximum angle or the system
deactivated by trailer angle?
• You are at the maximum controllable
trailer angle for the system. Place your
vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to
get the truck and trailer back to an in-line
position. If this message consistently
displays, this could indicate the sticker is
incorrectly applied, the trailer needs to
be recalibrated or the drawbar or the
trailer dimensions are outside of the
supported range. The system is designed
to work with drawbars that have a license
plate to hitch ball center measurement
of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when installed. The
system is designed to work with trailers
that have a hitch point to center of the
axle or axles measurement of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m). Do not attempt to use
drawbars or trailers that have a length
outside of this range as the system
performance degrades and could cause
improper system function. Check that the
correct trailer is selected on the
touchscreen. Verify the sticker is
correctly applied and check that the
drawbar and the trailer dimensions are
within the allowed range. Then, delete
the trailer from the system and repeat
the setup process to calibrate the trailer.
What does it mean when the system
tells you to take control of the steering
wheel?
• The system is no longer steering the
vehicle and you must take over steering.
There are four reasons the system could
display this message. The first reason the
system could display this message is that
you have touched the steering wheel
when the system is steering. The second
reason the system could display this
message is that you have exceeded the
maximum speed for the feature. The third
reason the system could display this
message is that the trailer is not
detected. The final reason the system
could display this message is that an
internal condition for system operation
is not met that requires your vehicle to
return to manual control of the steering.
What does it mean if the system does
not detect a trailer?
• The system requires a clear view of the
sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean
for the system to correctly operate. If the
system cannot initially detect the trailer,
it could be necessary for you to change
the lighting conditions by moving your
vehicle and trailer or waiting until the
conditions change. See Applying the
Trailer Reversing Aid Sticker (page 374).
Some trailers are not compatible with the
sticker and camera system.
383
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
you choose the trailer from the touchscreen.
When using a different drawbar or a different
pinhole on drawbars with more than one,
connecting the drawbar to your vehicle
affects the trailer position and you may need
to repeat the trailer setup and calibration
process.
384
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Backup Assistance
WHAT IS TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE
Trailer reverse guidance provides views and
graphics on the touchscreen to help you
steer your vehicle when you backup a trailer.
HOW DOES TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE WORK
Trailer reverse guidance uses a sticker to
detect the trailer angle relative to the towing
vehicle and provides instructions, graphics
and camera views on the touchscreen.
TRAILER REVERSE GUIDANCE
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: This system does not
automatically brake your vehicle. This
system is an extra driving aid. It does not
replace your attention and judgment, or
the need to apply the brakes. If you do not
apply the brakes when necessary, you may
collide with another vehicle or other
objects.
Note: The system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices. Always be aware of your
vehicle and trailer combination, and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or prevent
your vehicle or trailer from making contact
with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: The front end of your vehicle swings
out when changing the direction of the
trailer.
Note: In certain conditions, the trailer could
turn faster or the trailer angle could increase
more than anticipated. Always monitor the
clearance between the trailer and vehicle
and the surroundings.
SETTING UP TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE FOR A CONVENTIONAL
TRAILER
CONFIGURING THE TRAILER
You must configure a trailer in the system to
use trailer reverse guidance. This is a
one-time setup process and the trailer
information is saved in the system for the
next time you use that trailer.
The system only works with conventional
trailers. It does not work with other types
including fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers.
The following illustration shows examples of
conventional trailers on the left-hand side.
385
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Note: Trailer reverse guidance camera views
are available with no trailer setup. However,
complete functionality including graphics
and automatic view switching is enabled by
setup. Setup is required to enable trailer
backup assistance.
E209766
Positioning the Trailer
Hitch the trailer to your vehicle and connect
the electrical wiring harness. Check to make
sure that the wiring is working. See
Connecting a Trailer (page 348).
E247482
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. See Connecting a Trailer
(page 348).
E247481
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle
are in line with each other. You can do this
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and
pulling straight forward.
Configuring the Trailer in the
Touchscreen
1. Shift to reverse (R).
2. Press the camera view button.
3. Press the trailer view icon.
4. Press Add Trailer.
5. Follow the directions on the touchscreen
to enter the trailer name, then proceed
to the sticker setup. See Applying the
Trailer Reverse Aid Sticker (page 386).
APPLYING THE TRAILER REVERSE AID
STICKER
Place the sticker in an area visible by the rear
view camera. The entire sticker must be
within 4–19 in (10–48 cm) from the center of
the hitch ball, as shown in the following
illustration.
386
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
E333148
Use the sticker placement card and a tape
measure to determine the appropriate area
to place the sticker. Make sure the entire
sticker is within the green zone between the
two arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the rear view camera
display.
Once you have found the correct location,
place the sticker.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker such
as a jack handle or wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry, and
clean horizontal surface. For best results,
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after placing
them. Do not reuse any stickers if removed.
Note: You can purchase additional stickers
through your authorized dealer.
CALIBRATING THE SYSTEM
Calibrating the system requires driving
forward and turning left or right. Follow the
instructions on the touchscreen to complete
the calibration process.
E352329
Note: To calibrate the system, you need an
area where you can safely drive forward and
turn left or right. An open parking lot is an
ideal place to perform the calibration.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight when
instructed to by the touchscreen. If the
steering wheel is in a turned position during
this instruction, the calibration pauses.
387
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Note: During calibration, the system
determines the trailer length. The system
supports trailer lengths of 6–33 ft
(1.85–10.05 m) distance from the hitch point
to the center of the axle or axles. The system
is designed to work with drawbars that have
a license plate to hitch ball center
measurement of 9–18 in (23–46 cm) when
installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars or
trailers that have a length outside of this
range as the system performance degrades
and could cause improper system function.
Note: The touchscreen shows if you are
going too slow or fast. Calibration pauses if
the speed is outside the required range of
2–9 mph (4–15 km/h).
Note: You need to complete at least a 90°
turn, and longer trailers could require a 180°
turn. Camera trailer tracking requires the
system to locate the hitch ball as well as
determine the trailer length. Some trailers
could require you to drive straight then turn
multiple times before calibration completes.
The touchscreen provides instructions and
notifies you when calibration completes.
Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
system at night.
SWITCHING TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE ON AND OFF
Shift into reverse (R), press the rear camera
button to expand the menu, press the trailer
icon and use the touchscreen to select the
connected trailer.
Note: If the trailer was connected just prior
to turning the system on, you may need to
drive forward to initialize the system. Follow
the instructions on the touchscreen to
activate the system.
USING TRAILER REVERSE
GUIDANCE VIEWS
Up to three camera views could be available
when using trailer reverse guidance. Use the
view that helps you the most when reversing
your vehicle and trailer.
E310996
360° camera view. Shows a 360°
view on the right-hand side of the
touchscreen with a rear camera
view on the left-hand side of the
touchscreen.
E310967
Rear view camera view. Shows
your trailer hitch or what is directly
behind your vehicle.
E310965
Trailer reverse guidance view.
Shows you a view of the sides of
your vehicle and the trailer. In auto
mode, this view moves as the trailer moves
so that you do not have to adjust the camera
as you turn. Left and right arrows let you see
other camera views.
E224484
Straight backup mode. Shows
which way to turn your steering
wheel to keep the trailer straight.
Use this view when you want to keep your
trailer completely in line with your vehicle.
Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle
into drive (D), pull forward and straighten out
the vehicle and trailer before engaging
straight backup mode.
388
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
E224486
This takes you back to the 360°
camera system and out of the
trailer reverse guidance feature.
E315644
Auto. Press to return to auto view.
Note: Auto mode is the default setting.
Hitch Angle Graphic
The hitch angle graphic shows a small
representation of your vehicle and trailer with
visual feedback to help you monitor the
trailer. The graphic shows two different
colored lines for the trailer hitch angle. A
black line shows you where your trailer is in
relation to your vehicle. The white line
represents the amount the trailer can turn
based on steering wheel position.
The graphic shows a yellow and red zone
for the hitch angle to warn you of a high
angle condition that could require you to pull
forward to reduce the hitch angle. The angle
limits for each zone vary based on the trailer
length.
The yellow zone indicates you are
approaching the maximum controllable trailer
angle for the system. When the trailer enters
this zone, it is more difficult to reduce the
trailer turn when backing up. It may be
necessary to put your vehicle back into drive
(D) and pull forward to get your vehicle and
trailer back to an in-line position.
The red zone indicates you have exceeded
the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Immediately stop reversing. Put
your vehicle into drive (D) and pull forward
until the trailer is no longer in the red zone.
389
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
TRAILER REVERSE GUIDANCE – TROUBLESHOOTING
TRAILER REVERSE GUIDANCE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system turns on and is initializing.Detecting Trailer Please Wait…
A condition exists that prevents the system from turning on. If the
message continues to display, visit your authorized dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
Trailer Reverse Guidance System is Not Available
The steering system needs to learn internal parameters to fully enable
the feature. Drive your vehicle straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving Required to Initialize Steering Press
OK to Exit
Displays when you exceed the maximum controllable trailer angle for
the system. Place your vehicle in drive (D) and pull forward to get your
vehicle and trailer back to an in-line position, then activate the system
by selecting the connected trailer and following the instructions on
the touchscreen.
Stop now. Deactivated by trailer angle.
If this message consistently displays, you may need to repeat the
trailer setup and calibration. Delete the trailer from the system and
repeat the setup and calibration process.
390
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
DescriptionMessage
Displays when the system does not detect the trailer. Check that the
sticker is correctly applied and the trailer length is within the allowed
range. You can also move the trailer forward or backward to change
the trailer position and lighting conditions.
If these messages continue to display, visit your authorized dealer to
have your vehicle checked.
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not Detected. Refer to Owner's
Manual. Press OK to Exit
Displays when your vehicle has not moved after switching on the
system or extended operation below 1 mph (1 km/h). Drive forward
above 2 mph (3 km/h) to initialize the system.
Trailer Reverse Guidance Trailer Not Detected Pull Forward to Initialize
Press OK to Exit
391
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
TRAILER REVERSE GUIDANCE –
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
What does it mean if the system
remains on one message for an
extended time during calibration?
• The camera could need to be cleaned,
the sticker could be blocked, the drawbar
could be outside the allowed range of
9–18 in (23–46 cm) or you could need to
move to a different area to change the
lighting and background. Verify the
sticker is in the proper location. See
Applying the Trailer Reverse Aid Sticker
(page 386). You can move to a different
area or change the direction you are
driving or setup the system at a different
time of day. Some trailers are not
compatible with the sticker and camera
system.
What does it mean if the system
pauses during calibration?
• There could be steering input or trailer
movement during the straight drive
portion of the calibration process.
What does it mean if the system
displays hold steering steady during
turn?
• Part of the calibration process for the
sticker setup requires a steady turn. If
you are continually moving the steering
wheel during the turn, this delays the
calibration process. To enable the
calibration process, hold the steering
wheel at the same position when turning.
What does it mean if the system
displays that it is not available?
• There could be a sub-system that the
system uses that is not correctly
operating or there could be a battery
voltage issue. If the system continues to
display it is not available, visit your
authorized dealer to have your vehicle
checked.
What does it mean if the system
displays that driving is required to
initialize steering?
• The steering system needs to learn
internal parameters to fully turn on the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes. This could also
occur when your vehicle is new, there is
a battery voltage issue or if the steering
system has been serviced.
What does it mean if the system does
not detect a trailer?
• The system requires a clear view of the
sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean
for the system to correctly operate. If the
system cannot initially detect the trailer,
it could be necessary for you to change
the lighting conditions by moving your
vehicle and trailer or waiting until the
conditions change. See Applying the
Trailer Reverse Aid Sticker (page 386).
Some trailers are not compatible with the
sticker and camera system.
392
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
you choose the trailer from the touchscreen.
When using a different drawbar or a different
pin hole on drawbars with more than one,
connecting the drawbar to your vehicle
affects the trailer position and you may need
to repeat the trailer setup and calibration
process.
393
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Trailer Reverse Guidance
BREAKING-IN
Your vehicle requires a break-in period. For
the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km), avoid driving at
high speeds, heavy braking, aggressive
shifting or using your vehicle to tow. During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Note: Do not tow to maximum capacity
before 2,500 mi (4,024 km).
DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
The following helps to improve fuel
consumption:
• Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
anticipate the road ahead to avoid heavy
braking.
• Regularly check your tire pressures and
make sure that they are inflated to the
correct pressure.
• Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule and carry out the
recommended checks.
• Plan your journey and check the traffic
before you set off. It is more efficient to
combine errands into a single trip
whenever possible.
• Avoid idling the engine in cold weather
or for extended periods. Start the engine
only when you are ready to set off.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
• Do not add unnecessary accessories to
the exterior of your vehicle, for example
running boards. If you use a roof rack,
remember to fold it down or remove it
when not in use.
• Do not shift into neutral when you are
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
down.
• Shut all windows when driving at high
speeds.
• Switch off all electric systems when not
in use, for example air conditioning. Make
sure that you unplug any accessories
from the auxiliary power points when not
in use.
DRIVING IN COLD WEATHER
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected at
temperatures below approximately -13°F
(-25°C).
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end
of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
On ice and snow, you should drive more
slowly than usual. Your vehicle has a four
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump
the brake pedal. See Anti-Lock Braking
System Limitations (page 228).
394
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Driving Hints
In snow and ice, all-wheel drive vehicles have
advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles
but can still skid. When driving on snowy or
icy roads, should you start to slide, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide
until you regain control.
On snow and ice, avoid suddenly applying
power and avoid quick change of direction.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a stop.
Avoid sudden braking. An all-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice.
However, an all-wheel drive vehicle will not
stop any faster, as braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident to
road conditions.
DRIVING THROUGH MUD AND
WATER
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even all-wheel drive and four-wheel
drive vehicles can lose traction in mud. If
your vehicle slides, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of your
vehicle. After driving through mud, clean off
residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess residue can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: If your vehicle gets stuck in mud, it
could be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Water
If you must drive though water approach it
cautiously. See Driving Through Shallow
Water (page 396).
DRIVING ON HILLY OR SLOPING
TERRAIN
WARNING: Extreme care should be
used when steering the vehicle in reverse
down a slope so as not to cause the
vehicle to swerve out of control.
Although natural obstacles could make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should try to drive
straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle rollover.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you can use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
395
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Driving Hints
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power causes the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, and you
could lose control of your vehicle. When
descending a steep hill, do not descend the
hill in neutral. Avoid sudden hard braking to
keep the front wheels rolling and to maintain
your vehicle's steering.
Note: Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,
apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
DRIVING IN SAND
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Steadily drive through the terrain. Apply the
accelerator slowly and avoid excessive
wheel slip. Do not drive your vehicle in deep
sand for an extended period of time. This
could overheat the system. A message
appears in the instrument cluster display.
Note: If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, it
could be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator pedal in each gear.
DRIVING THROUGH SHALLOW
WATER
WARNING: Do not attempt to cross
a deep or flowing body of water. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction could
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
396
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Driving Hints
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move
freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats that have eyelets,
position the floor mat eyelet over the
retention post and press down to lock in
position. Repeat for all eyelets on the floor
mat.
To remove the floor mats, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make
sure they are secure.
397
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you have a vehicle concern, Lincoln offers
a complimentary roadside assistance
program. This program is separate from the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi (110,000 km),
whichever comes first, for subsequent
owners.
Knowing your vehicle's VIN, mileage and
your specific location allows help to get to
you faster.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare. For
vehicles with an unusable tire inflation
kit, we provide towing service.
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance - key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility.
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (160 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client is
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (160 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle
is operational but the trailer is not, then
the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-521-4140 or contact
Roadside Assistance using the Lincoln Way
mobile app.
398
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
on your own, Lincoln reimburses a
reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
Lincoln dealership within 100 mi (160 km). To
obtain reimbursement information, United
States clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Clients
need to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
If you have a vehicle concern, Lincoln offers
a complimentary roadside assistance
program. This program is eligible within
Canada or the continental United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, beginning from
the original warranty start date and lasts the
life of the vehicle for the original owner.
Subsequent owners receive coverage that
is concurrent with the 6 years or 70,000 mi
(110,000 km), whichever occurs first,
powertrain warranty coverage period.
Note: Canadian roadside coverage and
benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details,
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-844-665-2007,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
Download the Sykes4Lincoln Roadside
Assistance App for access to your roadside
assistance services. For more information,
scan here:
E398727
If you purchased your vehicle in Canada and
require roadside assistance, please call
1-844-665-2007 or contact Roadside
Assistance using the Lincoln Way mobile
app.
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Roadside Assistance
at any time. Certain restrictions apply to
Roadside Assistance benefits.
For further details, call
1-800-521-4140 (United States)
1-844-665-2007 (Canada)
SWITCHING THE HAZARD
FLASHERS ON AND OFF
E75790
The hazard flasher button is on the
instrument panel. Press the button
to switch the hazard flashers on if
your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for
other road users.
When you switch the hazard flashers on, all
front and rear direction indicators flash.
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the
ignition is in any position, or if the key is not
in the ignition. The battery loses charge and
could have insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
Press the button again to switch them off.
399
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
JUMP STARTING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
WARNING: Make sure that the cables
are clear of any moving parts and fuel
delivery system parts.
WARNING: Connect batteries with
only the same nominal voltage.
WARNING: Using the jump leads
incorrectly or completing the jump start
procedure incorrectly can cause the
battery to explode, which can lead to
severe injuries.
WARNING: All work on the vehicle
battery and the electrical system can cause
serious chemical burns, fire or electric
shocks. Always read the warnings and
safety information before carrying out any
kind of work on the battery
WARNING: Never charge a 12-volt
vehicle battery once it has been frozen.
Discharged 12-volt vehicle batteries can
even freeze at temperatures of
approximately 0°C (+32°F).
WARNING: The battery should be
replaced if it is or has ever been frozen.
WARNING: A highly explosive
mixture of gases is given off when the
vehicle battery is jump started. Always
keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit
cigarettes away from the vehicle battery.
Never use a mobile telephone when the
jump leads are being connected or
disconnected.
WARNING: Only charge the battery
in a well-ventilated space as the battery
emits a highly explosive mixture of gases
when the vehicle is being jump started.
WARNING: Never confuse the
negative and positive terminals or connect
the jump leads incorrectly.
WARNING: Observe the jump lead
manufacturer's instructions.
400
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
WARNING: If the engine is running
while the hood is open, stay clear of
moving engine components. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Do not attempt to push-start an automatic
transmission vehicle. This could cause
transmission damage.
Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled
vehicle. This could damage your vehicle's
electrical system.
PREPARING THE VEHICLE
Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part of
your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: If you are using a jump pack or booster
box, follow the manufacturer's instructions.
E355173
1. Pull the red rubber boot backward.
Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
401
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) jumper cable to an exposed metal part
of the disabled vehicle's engine, as
shown in the following illustration, away
from the battery and fuel injection
system, or connect the negative (-)
jumper cable to a ground connection
point if available.
E421347
Starting the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and moderately rev the engine, or gently
press the accelerator to keep the engine
speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as
shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on when
disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage
could blow the bulbs.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
WHAT IS THE POST-CRASH ALERT
SYSTEM
The system helps draw attention to your
vehicle in the event of a serious impact.
HOW DOES THE POST-CRASH ALERT
SYSTEM WORK
The system is designed to turn the hazard
flashers on, turn the courtesy lamps on,
intermittently sound the horn and unlock all
doors in the event of a serious impact that
deploys an airbag or the seatbelt
pretensioners.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
Depending on applicable laws in the country
your vehicle was built for, the horn does not
sound in the event of a serious impact.
402
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
SWITCHING THE POST-CRASH ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
Press the hazard flasher switch, the unlock
button on the remote control, the panic
button on the remote control or cycle the
ignition to switch the system off.
Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle
battery runs out of charge.
POST-COLLISION BRAKING
How Does Post-Collision Braking Work
In the event of a moderate to severe crash,
the braking system reduces the vehicle’s
speed to prevent or reduce the impact of a
potential secondary crash.
Post-Collision Braking Limitations
Post-collision braking does not activate if any
of the following occur:
• The anti-lock braking system is damaged
during the collision.
• Electronic stability control is disabled.
Overriding Post-Collision Braking
You can override post-collision braking by
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
Post-Collision Braking Indicators
E138639
It flashes when a post-collision
braking event is occurring.
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC CRASH
SHUTOFF
The automatic crash shutoff is designed to
stop the fuel going to the engine in the event
of a moderate or severe crash.
Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff.
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
RE-ENABLING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Attempt to start your vehicle.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle does not start after the
third attempt, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
403
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
RECOVERY TOWING (IF EQUIPPED)
ACCESSING THE FRONT TOWING
POINT
WARNING: Using recovery hooks is
dangerous and should only be done by a
person familiar with proper vehicle
recovery safety practices. Improper use of
recovery hooks may cause hook failure or
separation from the vehicle and could
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Slowly remove the slack
from the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce significantly
higher loads which can cause the recovery
hooks to break off, or the recovery strap
to fail which can cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never link two straps
together with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Switch the ignition off
before removing the recovery hook. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
WARNING: The recovery hook can
become hot. Let the recovery hook cool
down before removing it. Failure to do so
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has frame-mounted front
recovery hooks.
Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery
hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle
weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are secure
and capable of withstanding the applied
load.
• Do not use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to three
times the gross vehicle weight of the
stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and
place it over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the strap
breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded
heavier than its gross vehicle weight
rating specified on the certification label.
404
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
• Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle
in a straight line, within 10 degrees.
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the
length of the recovery strap. This helps
avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery
hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle
lurching into their path.
Note: Use towing equipment that is properly
rated for your vehicle. Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the equipment manufacturer.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or your roadside
assistance service provider.
Your manufacturer produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Vehicle damage could occur if towed
incorrectly, or by any other means.
Front-wheel and rear-wheel drive vehicles
must have their designated drive wheels off
the ground regardless of towing direction.
Use tow dollies to prevent damage to the
transmission.
All-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicles require
that all wheels be off the ground using a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment.
This prevents damage to the transmission
and drive system.
Note: You need to switch on the ignition to
unlock the steering.
405
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
Note: Make sure you check the steering
column before towing. It could lock if the
battery is dead.
FAIL-SAFE COOLING
WHAT IS FAIL-SAFE COOLING
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs due to
overheating.
The fail-safe distance depends on outside
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
HOW DOES FAIL-SAFE COOLING
WORK
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates,
however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine.
Note: Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible to minimize engine damage.
DRIVING WHEN FAIL-SAFE MODE IS
ACTIVATED
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
406
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine may
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend that
you contact your roadside assistance
service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
period of time for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
FAIL-SAFE COOLING INDICATORS
E103308
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone.
E67028
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
instrument cluster display.
407
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Crash and Breakdown Information
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
PRECAUTIONS
Use the following guidelines when towing
your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in vehicle damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s
configuration, contact an authorized dealer.
RECREATIONALLY TOWING YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
battery when recreationally towing your
vehicle. This prevents the transfer case
from shifting properly and could cause the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in park (P).
WARNING: Placing the transfer case
in its neutral position could cause your
vehicle to freely roll. Make sure you press
and hold the brake pedal and the vehicle
is in a secure, safe position when you place
the transfer case in its neutral position.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure that you do not
damage the transmission.
You can only tow your vehicle with all wheels
on the ground by placing the transfer case
in its neutral position and engaging the
recreational tow feature. Perform the
following steps after positioning your vehicle
behind the tow vehicle and properly securing
them together.
Note: Switch your climate control system to
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle.
Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its
neutral position can damage vehicle
components.
Note: You can check the towing status at
any time by opening the driver door or
turning the ignition to the accessory or on
position. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave
Transmission in Neutral appears in the
instrument cluster display to confirm you can
recreationally tow your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft alarm,
make sure you switch perimeter sensing on
when towing. See Arming the Anti-Theft
Alarm System (page 98).
Switching Neutral Tow On
1. Start your vehicle.
2. Make sure your vehicle is in Normal 2H
mode. See Selecting a Drive Mode (page
294).
3. Place your vehicle in temporary neutral
mode. See Temporary Neutral Mode
(page 214).
408
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing Your Vehicle
4. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
push button ignition switch once. A
message appears in the instrument
cluster display.
5. Switch your vehicle to accessory mode
by pressing the push button ignition
switch once without pressing the brake
pedal.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Access the Vehicle menu in the
touchscreen.
8. Press and hold Neutral Tow until a
confirmation message appears.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral. This
indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with
all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see a confirmation
message in the instrument cluster display,
you must perform the procedure again from
the beginning.
Note: You may hear noise as the transfer
case shifts into its neutral position. This is
normal.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and switch your vehicle off by pressing
the push button ignition switch once
without pressing the brake pedal.
Note: For vehicles with electric brake
booster, enabling neutral tow deactivates
the brake booster. The red brake lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster
indicating the brake booster is deactivated.
Switching Neutral Tow Off
1. With your vehicle properly secured to the
tow vehicle, press and hold the brake
pedal and start the engine.
2. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
push button ignition switch once and
release the brake pedal.
3. Place your vehicle in accessory mode by
pressing the push button ignition switch
once without pressing the brake pedal.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift into park (P).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled.
Note: You must perform the switching
neutral tow on and switching neutral tow off
procedures again from the beginning if the
indicator light and message do not display.
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This is
normal.
7. Apply the parking brake, then disconnect
your vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift into drive (D) to make
sure the transfer case is out of the neutral
tow position.
9. If the transfer case does not successfully
shift out of its neutral position, set the
parking brake. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive Forward
Message
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start your vehicle.
409
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing Your Vehicle
3. Shift into neutral (N).
4. With the vehicle running, shift into drive
(D) and let the vehicle roll forward up to
3 ft (1 m).
Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer
case shifts out of its neutral position. This is
normal.
5. Make sure the instrument cluster displays
Neutral Tow Disabled.
EMERGENCY TOWING
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DescriptionMessage
The transfer case is in the neutral position and your vehicle is safe to tow with all four wheels
on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission
in Neutral
There is a transfer case gear tooth blockage present. With your vehicle on, shift the transmission
into drive (D) and let the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
Shift Delayed Drive Forward
The transfer case is not in the neutral position and your vehicle is not safe to tow with all four
wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
410
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Towing Your Vehicle
FUSE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher
amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE UNDER HOOD FUSE
BOX
E348205
ACCESSING THE UNDER HOOD FUSE
BOX
E348206
411
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
E420403
412
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Body control module ignition 1 supply line.30 A1
Body control module ignition 2 supply line.30 A2
Body control module permanent power supply
line.
30 A3
Brake booster module.60 A4
Driver heated seat module.30 A6
Brake booster module.60 A7
Trailer brake control module.30 A8
Trailer tow module.25 A10
Four wheel drive control module.40 A13
Powertrain control module relay.5 A14
Powertrain control module ignition.20 A15
Vehicle power supply 2.25 A16
Vehicle power supply 3.20 A17
Vehicle power supply 4.20 A18
Transmission control module.15 A19
413
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Right headlamp.30 A22
Left headlamp.30 A23
Starter motor.30 A24
Fuel pump control module.30 A26
Power outlet 1.20 A27
Power outlet 2.20 A28
Cargo USB charging port.10 A29
Media bin USB charging port.
Front wiper motor.30 A31
Rain sensor module.5 A32
Body control module permanent power supply
line.
30 A36
Trailer brake control module.20 A42
Trailer tow module.
Interior power distribution box.30 A43
Not used (spare).15 A47
Digital sound processor.30 A48
414
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Amplifier.
Brake booster module.5 A49
Powertrain control module.10 A50
Air quality sensor module.10 A51
Rear seat control module.20 A53
Rear window heater module.40 A54
Horn.20 A59
Trailer parking lamp.30 A60
Blower motor.40 A62
Trailer backup lamp.10 A63
Power steering.5 A69
Smart data link connector.10 A70
Rear wiper motor.20 A73
Electric cooling fan 1.50 A75
Electric cooling fan 2.50 A76
Smart headlamp control module.5 A79
415
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
In-vehicle cooler.10 A81
Interior power distribution box run/start.5 A82
Fuel injectors.15 A84
Rear blower motor.40 A88
Windshield washer motor.20 A90
Brand logo lamp.5 A104
Second row seat motor - left.30 A112
Second row seat motor - right.30 A113
Intercooler fan.40 A147
Ambient lighting.5 A172
Driver seat USB charging port.15 A173
Passenger seat USB charging port.
Rear entertainment system.15 A174
Left roof marker light.5 A175
Right roof marker light.5 A176
416
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Driver door module.60 A178
Passenger door module.60 A179
Passenger heated seat module.30 A180
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE INTERIOR FUSE BOX
E420405
ACCESSING THE INTERIOR FUSE BOX
E420406
417
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE INTERIOR FUSE BOX
E420407
418
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Wireless charger control module.7.5 A3
Gear shift module.10 A7
Telematics control module.7.5 A8
Rear climate control module.5 A9
Keypad.
Front multi-contour seat module.20 A10
Climate control module.15 A12
Steering wheel control module.7.5 A13
Bluetooth low energy module.5 A19
Headlamp module.5 A20
Glass roof control module.30 A24
USB charging port 3.15 A30
USB charging port 4.
Central gateway module.10 A31
Terrain management gateway module.
Roof mounted remote receiver.
Audio control module.20 A32
419
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Instrument cluster control module.20 A33
Center console control module.10 A35
Digital scent module.
Center stack display.
Interior air particulate sensor.5 A36
Driver state monitor control module.5 A39
Integrated control panel.20 A42
Voice control module.
Power splitgate control module.50 A43
Front driver seat motor.30 A44
Front passenger seat motor.30 A45
Splitgate assembly.7.5 A50
Trailer brake switch.5 A52
Electrochromatic rear view mirror.15 A55
Driver power window switch.10 A56
Glass roof.10 A60
Rear seat entertainment.
420
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
Protected ComponentRatingItem
Center console slide switch.5 A61
Driver assistance system control module.20 A70
Wireless charger control module.7.5 A73
Rear multi-contour seat module.20 A75
Steering wheel control module.15 A80
Center console slide motor.30 A81
Media connector.10 A82
421
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING
FUSES – FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
When do I need to check a fuse?
• If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working.
When do I need to replace a fuse?
• If a fuse has blown.
How do I identify a blown fuse?
• You can identify a blown fuse by a
broken wire within the fuse.
422
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Fuses
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Service your vehicle regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications.
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material, such as cigarettes, away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Set the parking brake, shift the
transmission to park (P) and block the
wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
latch the hood before driving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
E337831
1. Pull the hood release handle under the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E190266
423
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
2. Pull the secondary release lever under
the front of the hood near the center of
your vehicle.
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make sure
that it fully latches.
Warning Lamps and Indicators
Hood Ajar
E246598
It illuminates when the ignition is
on and the hood is not completely
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
E372162
424
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 112).A
Engine compartment fuse box. See Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box (page 411).B
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 438).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 426).D
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 426).E
Brake fluid reservoir. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 228).F
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 430).G
Engine coolant reservoir.H
425
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK OVERVIEW
E354437
C
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off after
warm up and wait 15 minutes for the oil
to drain into the oil pan.
Note: Checking the oil level too soon could
result in an inaccurate reading.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it is
fully seated.
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the
oil level.
Note: Read both sides of the dipstick and
use the lowest oil level as the correct
reading.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark,
immediately add oil.
7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is fully
seated.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Note: Increases in oil level can occur from
frequent short trips that do not allow the
engine to get to operating temperature, as
well as frequent idling or low speed driving
for long periods of time.
Note: If oil levels are continuously noted
above the maximum mark, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
ADDING ENGINE OIL
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
WARNING: Do not add engine oil
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
426
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that the vehicle
warranty may not cover.
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Engine Oil (page
426).
4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage
with an absorbent cloth.
INTELLIGENT OIL LIFE MONITOR
Under certain conditions the vehicle’s
intelligent oil life monitor may determine your
oil requires replacement prior to your general
service. Should this occur it is recommended
you replace your oil within two weeks or
500 mi (800 km) of being alerted.
Your authorized dealer will be able to advise
you whether only an engine oil and filter
change is recommended or whether you
should complete your general service
inclusive of oil and oil Filter.
RESETTING THE INTELLIGENT OIL LIFE
MONITOR
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle.
2. Press and hold the Oil Life button until
the system reset confirmation appears.
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Use oil that meets the defined specification
and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
427
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that display the API Certification Mark
for gasoline engines. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C961-A1Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil / Huile moteur SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP, XO-5W30-Q1FS(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6, CXO-5W30-LFS6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
use the following engine oil in climates
where the ambient temperature reaches
-22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
428
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C963-A1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
E240523
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above
the altitude of 5,000 ft (1,524 m) and under
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is
recommended to use the alternative engine
oil.
429
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
ENGINE AIR FILTER
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
Change the engine air filter element at the
proper intervals. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 530).
When changing the engine air filter, use only
the air filter element listed. See Motorcraft
Parts (page 445).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not
allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system.
E248801
1. Release the two clamps that secure the
cover to the air filter housing. Push the
air filter cover toward the front of the
vehicle and up slightly to release it.
2. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
3. Install the new air filter element.
E248800
4. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not to
crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing and cover, and make
sure that you properly align the tabs on
the edge into the slots.
430
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
COOLANT
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at the
intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 530).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
This is normal.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C).
Coolant concentration should be checked
using a refractometer. We do not recommend
the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips
for measuring coolant concentration.
ADDING COOLANT
WARNING: Do not add coolant when
the vehicle is on or the cooling system is
hot. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
431
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable.
It is very important to use prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification in order
to avoid plugging the small passageways in
the engine cooling system. Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with deionised or distilled
water. Using water that has not been
deionised may contribute to deposit
formation, corrosion and plugging of the
small cooling system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the
correct specification.
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach
the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. Operating an
engine with a low level of coolant can result
in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
432
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
coolant.
CHANGING THE COOLANT
For coolant change, see your authorized
dealer.
Changing the coolant is necessary at specific
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 530).
MANAGING THE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long or
steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.
WARNING: If you continue to drive
your vehicle when the engine is
overheating, the engine could stop without
warning. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power in order
to manage the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on vehicle loading, grade and
outside temperature. If this occurs, there is
no need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive. See Fail-Safe Cooling
(page 406).
The air conditioning may automatically turn
on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant temperature
decreases to the normal operating
temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully
into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine soon
messages appear in your information display,
do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift
into park (P) or neutral (N).
433
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after several
minutes, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the
engine and continue.
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
15.5 qt (14.7 L)Standard duty trailer tow.
15.85 qt (15 L)Heavy duty trailer tow.
434
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant / Antigel/liquide de refroidissement
prédilué jaune Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
COOLANT – WARNING LAMPS
E103308
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone.
E67028
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
information display.
COOLANT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Description and ActionMessage
Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so, switch the engine off and allow it to cool.
If the problem persists, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
See Checking the Coolant Level (page 431).
High engine temperature Stop safely
435
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that
integrates with the fuel tank. It does not need
regular maintenance or replacement.
DRIVE BELT ROUTING OVERVIEW
E347332
Note: The long drive belt is on the inner
groove closest to the engine. The short drive
belt is on the outer groove farthest from the
engine.
12V BATTERY
12V BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands after
handling.
436
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery does
not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement is
different. You must replace the battery with
one of exactly the same specification.
WHAT IS THE BATTERY
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life.
HOW DOES THE BATTERY
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WORK
If excessive battery drain is detected, the
system temporarily disables some electrical
systems to protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message could appear in the information
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. This message is only for
notification that an action is taking place, and
not intended to indicate an electrical problem
or that the battery requires replacement.
BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time, your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system
could temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
437
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it could adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This could also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
The battery is in the engine compartment.
See Maintenance (page 423).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free battery.
It does not require additional water during
service.
If the vehicle battery has a cover and vent
hose, make sure you correctly install it after
cleaning or replacing the battery.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the battery
terminals. If any corrosion is present on the
battery or terminals, remove the cables from
the terminals and clean with a wire brush.
You can neutralize the acid with a solution
of baking soda and water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid unintended connection or
arcing.
If you disconnect or replace the battery and
your vehicle has an automatic transmission,
it must relearn its adaptive strategy. Because
of this, the transmission may shift firmly when
first driven. This is normal operation while
the transmission fully updates its operation
to optimum shift feel.
Removing the Battery
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
Note: The engine management system has
a power hold function and remains powered
for a period of time after you switch the
ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and
adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting
the battery without waiting can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
4. Disconnect and isolate the negative
battery cable terminal.
5. Disconnect and isolate the positive
battery cable terminal.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
battery, you must reset the following
features:
• Window bounce-back. See What Is
Window Bounce-Back (page 126).
• Clock Settings.
• Pre-set radio stations.
438
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
Replacing the Battery
Note: Before reconnecting the battery, make
sure the ignition remains switched off.
You must replace the battery with one of
exactly the same specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Note: Make sure that you correctly install
the battery terminal covers, battery cover
and battery cable terminals.
RESETTING THE BATTERY SENSOR
When you install a new battery, reset the
battery sensor by doing the following:
1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
engine off.
Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
seconds.
2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
times, ending with the high beams off.
3. Press and release the brake pedal three
times.
The battery warning lamp flashes three times
to confirm that the reset is successful.
RECYCLING AND DISPOSING OF THE
12V BATTERY
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of old
batteries in an environmentally
friendly way. Seek advice from
your local authority about recycling old
batteries.
12V BATTERY – TROUBLESHOOTING
12V BATTERY – WARNING LAMPS
E67021
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a charging system error.
Switch off all unnecessary
electrical equipment and have your vehicle
immediately checked.
439
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
12V BATTERY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
1
Charging System Service Soon
The charging system needs servicing. Have your vehicle immediately checked.
1
Charging System Service Now
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. The system clears this message once
you start your vehicle and the battery state of charge recovers. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads allows for a faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
440
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
DetailsMessage
Displays when the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition. The
system disables various vehicle features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage recovers,
the disabled features will operate again as normal.
1
Electrical Power Saver Active Some
Features Turned Off See Manual
The battery management system determines that the 12V battery is at a low state of charge.
Start the engine to charge the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery charger.
Always use the vehicle ground point when connecting the negative cable of the external battery
charger. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 401). This message clears once you restart your
vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Do not switch on the ignition when a
battery charger is in use to charge the battery. To resolve the issue after the battery reset, start
and stop the vehicle three times. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 191).
2
12V battery State of charge low
1
Check Brake System message may also display.
2
Check Brake System message may also display. Start and stop the vehicle three times or charge the battery to clear the message. If the
message still appears, have the system checked as soon as possible.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam checked
by an authorized dealer.
441
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
E142592
8 ft (2.4 m)A
Ground to the center of the
headlamp high beam bulb
B
25 ft (7.6 m)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall or
screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp beam bulb
and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) long horizontal
reference line on the wall or screen at
this height.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center line of
the headlamp beam bulb.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps and
open the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe a
flat zone of high intensity light located at
the top of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the flat zone of high intensity
light is not on the horizontal reference
line, adjust the aim of the headlamp
beam.
E432689
442
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
5. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn the
adjuster clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps.
EXTERIOR BULBS
EXTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
Warning Lamps and Indicators
Exterior Bulb Failure
E181350
It illuminates when the ignition is
on and there is an exterior bulb
failure.
INTERIOR BULBS
INTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART
Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
443
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Maintenance
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
SpecificationEngine
10.5:1Compression ratio.
213.4 in³ (3,497 cm³)Displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
444
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
See note below.
2
Battery.
1
FP-90Cabin air filter.
FL-500-S
Engine oil filter.
3
WW-1114Rear window wiper blade.
SP-596Spark plug.
WW-2998Windshield wiper blade.
1
Configure your vehicle’ s battery management system to match the replacement battery. Failure to use an appropriate configuration for your
battery management system could result in shortened battery life, features not working correctly, or your vehicle not starting. Consult your
local dealer or service provider for further details.
2
See your dealer for the most current part number.
3
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that aligns to SAE/USCAR – 36 Performance Specifications. Filter Type C.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.parts.ford.com. We engineer these parts for your
vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty
could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
445
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Specifications
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-F/M (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
446
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
PRECAUTIONS
Immediately remove fuel spillages, additive
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits
and road tar. These may damage your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: If you intend to park your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning, drive it
for few minutes before parking. This reduces
the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake
pads and linings.
CLEANING HEADLAMPS AND REAR
LAMPS
We recommend that you only use cold or
lukewarm water containing car shampoo to
clean the headlamps and the rear lamps.
Do not scrape the lamps.
Do not wipe lamps when they are dry.
CLEANING WINDOWS AND WIPER
BLADES
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner.
Note: When cleaning the interior of the
windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner
on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. This
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
447
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Care
CLEANING WHEELS
Only use a recommended wheel and tire
cleaner to clean the wheels. For additional
information and assistance, we recommend
that you contact an authorized dealer.
1. Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust.
2. Rinse well after cleaning.
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
If you intend to park your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels,
drive it for few minutes before parking. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove debris from
the screen area below the windshield.
Note: If you are not familiar with the parts
around the engine do not wash the engine
compartment. Avoid frequent engine
washes.
When washing the engine compartment:
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
shampoo and degreaser.
• Spray an approved engine shampoo and
degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and rinse with water.
Note: Follow the manufacturer's instructions
for using engine shampoo and degreaser.
CLEANING STRIPES OR GRAPHICS
It is recommended to wash your vehicle by
hand however, pressure washing may be
used under the following conditions:
• Use a spray with a minimum of 40° wide
spray angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle 12 in (30 cm) and at a
90° angle to your vehicle.
• Do not use water pressure higher than
1,000 psi (6,895 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 73°F (23°C).
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away.
CLEANING CAMERA LENSES AND
SENSORS
We recommend that you only use lukewarm
or cold water and a soft cloth to clean the
camera lens and sensors.
Note: Do not pressure wash camera lens
and sensors.
448
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free from packed dirt.
Rear suspension components may require
regular cleaning with a power washer or a
thorough rinse with a strong stream of water
if the vehicle is operated in dusty or muddy
environments. Rear leaf springs or other
suspension components may emit squeaking
or popping noises while operating the
vehicle if particles, such as dirt, rocks, or
other debris, are present in the components.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
We recommend that you only clean the
instrument panel and cluster lens with a
damp soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
Note: Avoid cleaners or polishes that
increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
CLEANING PLASTIC
We recommend that you only use a mild
soap and water solution on a soft cloth. Dry
the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING DISPLAYS AND SCREENS
We recommend that you only use a
microfiber cloth in a circular motion to clean
off the fingerprint or dust.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
CLEANING FABRIC
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
We recommend that you only clean fabric in
the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry
the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
449
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Care
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a ring
forms on the fabric, clean the entire area
immediately, but do not oversaturate or the
ring could set.
CLEANING LEATHER
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
We recommend that you only clean the
leather surfaces in the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry
the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. Make sure the leather is dry, then apply
a small amount of conditioner to a clean,
dry cloth.
4. Rub the conditioner into the leather until
it disappears. Allow the conditioner to
dry, then repeat the process for the entire
interior. If a film appears, wipe it off with
a dry, clean cloth.
5. For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING VINYL
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
We recommend that you only clean vinyl
surfaces in the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry
the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING CARPETS AND FLOOR
MATS
We recommend that you only clean your
carpets in the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry
the area with a clean, soft cloth.
3. For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a ring
forms on the fabric, clean the entire area
immediately, but do not oversaturate or the
ring could set.
We recommend that you only clean your
floor mats in the following way:
1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
450
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Care
2. Wash rubber floor mats using mild soap
and lukewarm or cold water.
3. Completely dry the floor mat before
placing them back in your vehicle.
CLEANING SEATBELTS
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
1. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry
the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING GLASS ROOF TRACKS
1. Remove debris from the tracks with a
vacuum cleaner.
2. Wipe the bulb seal and mating painted
roof metal surface with a soft, damp cloth
and a mild soap and water solution.
Note: The glass roof rail tracks are greased
to maintain proper functionality. Do not wipe
off the grease.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
We recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer to identify your vehicle
color code. Authorized dealers have
touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
WAXING YOUR VEHICLE
Wax the high-gloss painted surface of your
prewashed vehicle once or twice a year.
We recommend that you only use an
approved quality wax that does not contain
abrasives. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions to apply and remove the wax.
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Note: Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss
black colored parts, they discolor over time.
451
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Care
PREPARING YOUR VEHICLE FOR
STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, the following maintenance
recommendations makes sure your vehicle
stays in good operating condition.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve your vehicle.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and weather damage.
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminants which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear wheel housings and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Rewax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
452
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Storing Your Vehicle
12 Volt Battery
• When storing your vehicle for longer than
30 days the battery state of charge
should be approximately 50%.
Additionally, we recommend to
disconnect the 12v battery to reduce
system loads on the battery, or you can
use a trickle charger for longer storage
periods.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery cables.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
• To minimize flat spots on the tires, inflate
all four tires to the recommended cold
pressures listed on the Safety
Compliance Certification label or Tire
Label affixed to your vehicle. When the
vehicle is taken out of storage, reset the
tire pressures as necessary to the
recommended levels listed on the Safety
Compliance Certification label or Tire
Label affixed to your vehicle.
Note: If you store your vehicle in a location
with low ambient temperatures, follow the
instructions for care of summer tires.
Brakes
Make sure the brakes and parking brake fully
release.
Note: If you intend to park your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning, drive it
for few minutes before parking. This reduces
the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake
pads and linings.
REMOVING YOUR VEHICLE FROM
STORAGE
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check the underhood for any foreign
materials such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
materials.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Corroded
brake rotors could cause brake noise.
Drive your vehicle and gently apply and
release the brakes repeatedly over a
10-minute drive to reduce the corrosion
from the brakes.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
453
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Storing Your Vehicle
LOCATING THE TIRE LABEL
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
See Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels (page 340).
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give you
the following information about tire
grades exactly as the government has
written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
454
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
INFORMATION ON THE TIRE
SIDEWALL
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
455
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (300 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
Speed ratingLetter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (160 km/h)Q
106 mph (170 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
456
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
Speed ratingLetter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (300 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
457
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
458
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
459
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
GLOSSARY OF TIRE
TERMINOLOGY
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
460
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
TIRE REPLACEMENT
REQUIREMENTS
AGE
WARNING: Tires degrade over
time depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels that are
the same size, load index, speed
rating, and type as those originally
provided for your vehicle. The
recommended tire and wheel sizes
can be found on the Tire Label on the
driver side door frame or the edge of
the driver door. If this information is
not found in those locations, or for
additional options, contact your
authorized dealer. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended, could affect
the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
461
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
WARNING: If your vehicle has
275/50R22 tires, replace them with
the exact original brand, and size. Use
of any other wheel or tire
combinations, even with identical size
ratings, could result in insufficient
running clearances, tire rubbing and
eventual puncture. Failure to follow
tire replacement recommendations
can lead to tire failure, loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: If your vehicle has
285/40R24 tires, replace them with
the exact original brand, and size. Use
of any other wheel or tire
combinations, even with identical size
ratings, could result in insufficient
running clearances, tire rubbing and
eventual puncture. Failure to follow
tire replacement recommendations
can lead to tire failure, loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If
the beads do not seat at the maximum
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure,
a Ford dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate steel
carcass tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from
the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating the
tire for mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire sidewall,
the following precautions must be
taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
• Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
• Use both eye and ear protection.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair if the worn tires still
have usable depth.
462
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
To avoid potential Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) malfunction or (4WD) system
damage, it is recommended to replace
all four tires rather than mixing
significantly worn tires with new tires.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended may affect the operation
of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains
on snow-free roads.
WARNING: Only fit snow chains to
specified tires.
WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted
with wheel trims, remove them before
fitting snow chains.
WARNING: If you choose to install
snow tires on your vehicle, they must be
the same size, construction, and load range
as the original tires listed on the tire
placard, and they must be installed on all
four wheels. Mixing tires of different size
or construction on your vehicle can
adversely affect your vehicle's handling
and braking, and may lead to loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING: Wheels and tires must
be the same size, load index and speed
rating as those originally fitted on the
vehicle. Use of any other tire or wheel can
affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels can
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. Follow
the recommended tire inflation pressures
463
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification label, or the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
or personal injury or death.
Only use snow chains on rear wheels. Install
snow chains in pairs. Do not use
self-tensioning snow chains.
Only use snow chains on the following
specified tire sizes. Only install chains that
are 15mm or less (SAE Class S chains).
• 265/70R17
• 275/65R18
We recommend you use steel wheels of the
same size and specification if snow chains
are required because chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Purchase snow chains from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions.
• When driving with snow chains do not
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow
chains rub or bang against the vehicle,
stop and tighten them. If this does not
work, remove the snow chains to prevent
vehicle damage.
• Remove the snow chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use snow
chains on dry roads.
• If a temporary spare wheel is mounted
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains
on the axle with the temporary spare
wheel.
464
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
E292547
Use snow chains that fit against the sidewall
of the tire to prevent the chains from
touching the wheel rims or suspension. Refer
to the previous illustration.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains, please contact your authorized
dealer.
465
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Wheel and Tire Information
CHECKING THE TIRE PRESSURES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge. Inflate all
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure. See Inflating the Tires (page
466).
INFLATING THE TIRES
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire cracking,
tread separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation
increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
and internal damage to the tire. It also
may result in unnecessary tire stress,
irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
Inflate your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure even if it is less than
the maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You can
find the tire label with the recommended
tire inflation pressure next to the tire size
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door.
The recommended tire inflation pressure
is also found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch on
the B-pillar, or on the edge of the driver
door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
Checking Pressure when tires are hot:
If pressures are checked after tires have
been driven for more than three minutes
or more than 1 mile, (2 km) the tires
become hot and the pressures will
increase by approximately 4 psi (27.6
kPa). Therefore when the tire pressure
is adjusted under these conditions, it
should be increased to a gauge reading
of 4 psi (27.6 kPa) greater than the
recommended cold inflation pressure.
After inflating the tires while hot, make
sure to recheck tire pressure later once
the tires are cold.
466
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
For Example Only
33 psi (230 kPa)Gauge reading of
hot tire
32 psi (220 kPa)If recommended,
cold inflation pres-
sure is
The hot tire pressure is only 1 psi (10
kPa) greater than the recommended
cold inflation pressure. Therefore, add
3 psi (20 kPa) more to increase the hot
pressure to 4 psi (30 kPa) over the
recommended cold inflation pressure.
36 psi (250 kPa)New hot pressure
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR WEAR
E142546
When the tread is worn down to 2/32
inch (1.6 mm), tires must be replaced to
help prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look like
narrow strips of smooth rubber across
the tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 2/32 inch (1.6
mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves.
INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR
DAMAGE
Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking,
cuts, bruises and other signs of damage
or excessive wear. If internal damage to
the tire is suspected, have the tire
dismounted and inspected in case it
needs to be repaired or replaced. For
your safety, tires that are damaged or
show signs of excessive wear should
not be used because they are more
likely to blow out or fail.
467
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage, such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall. If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected by a
tire professional.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is
stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires
can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little
as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a passenger
or bystander.
HIGH SPEED DRIVING CAN BE
DANGEROUS
Correct inflation pressure is especially
important. However, at high speeds,
even with the correct inflation pressure,
a road hazard for example is more
difficult to avoid and if contact is made,
has a greater chance of causing tire
damage than at a lower speed.
Moreover, driving at high speed reduces
the reaction time available to avoid
accidents and bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
If you see any damage to a tire or wheel,
replace it with the spare at once and visit
a participating Tire Retailer.
Exceeding the maximum speeds shown
on the following page for each type of
tire will cause the tire to build up
excessive heat which can cause tire
damage that could result in sudden tire
destruction and rapid air loss. Failure to
control a vehicle when one or more tires
experience a sudden air loss can lead
to an accident.
In any case, you should not exceed
reasonable speeds as indicated by the
legal limits and driving conditions.
DO NOT OVERLOAD: DRIVING ON
ANY OVERLOADED TIRE IS
DANGEROUS
The maximum load rating of your tires
is molded on the tire sidewall. Do not
exceed this rating. Follow the loading
instructions of the manufacturer of your
vehicle and this will ensure that your
tires are not overloaded. Tires which are
loaded beyond their maximum allowable
loads for the particular application will
build up excessive heat that may result
in sudden tire destruction. Do not
exceed the gross axle weight rating for
any axle on your vehicle.
468
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
TIRE ALTERATIONS
Do not make or allow to be made any
alterations on your tires. Alterations may
prevent proper performance, leading to
tire damage which can result in an
accident. Tires which become
unserviceable due to alterations such
as truing, whitewall inlays, addition of
balancing or sealant liquids, or the use
of tire dressing containing petroleum
distillates are excluded from warranty
coverage.
REPAIRS - WHEREVER POSSIBLE, SEE
YOUR TIRE RETAILER AT ONCE
If any tire sustains a puncture, have the
tire demounted and thoroughly
inspected by a tire retailer for possible
damage that may have occurred. A tread
area puncture in any passenger or light
truck tire can be repaired provided that
the puncture hole is not more than 1/4”
in diameter, not more than one radial
cable per casing ply is damaged, and
the tire has not been damaged further
by the puncturing object or by running
underinflated. Tire punctures consistent
with these guidelines should only be
repaired by following the US Tire
Manufacturers Association (USTMA)
recommended repair procedures.
Plug-only repairs done on-the-wheel are
considered improper and therefore, not
recommended. Such repairs are not
reliable and may cause further damage
to the tire.
STORAGE
Tires contain waxes and emollients to
protect their outer surfaces from ozone
and weather checking. As the tire rolls
and flexes, the waxes and emollients
continually migrate to the surface,
replenishing this protection throughout
the normal use of the tire. Consequently,
when tires sit unused for long periods
of time (a month or more) their surfaces
become dry and more susceptible to
ozone and weather checking and the
casing becomes susceptible to flat
spotting. For this reason, tires should
always be stored in a cool, dry, clean,
indoor environment. If storage is for
one month or more, eliminate the
weight from the tires by raising the
vehicle or by removing the tires from
the vehicle. Failure to store tires in
accordance with these instructions
could result in damage to your tires or
premature aging of the tires and
sudden tire failure.
When tires are stored, be sure they are
placed away from sources of heat and
ozone such as direct sunlight, hot pipes
and electric generators. Be sure that
surfaces on which tires are stored are
clean and free from grease, gasoline or
other substances, which could
deteriorate the rubber. Failure to store
tires in accordance with these
instructions could result in damage to
your tires or premature aging of the tires
and sudden tire failure.
469
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
FOLLOW THESE MOUNTING
RECOMMENDATIONS
Tire changing can be dangerous and
must be done by professionally trained
persons using proper tools and
procedures as specified by the US Tire
Manufacturers Association (USTMA).
Single or dual assemblies must be
completely deflated before
demounting.
Your tires should be mounted on wheels
of correct size and type and which are
in good, clean condition. Wheels that
are bent, chipped, rusted (steel wheels)
or corroded (alloy wheels) may cause
tire damage. The inside of the tire must
be free from foreign material. Have your
retailer check the wheels before
mounting new tires. Mismatched tires
and rims can explode during mounting.
Also, mismatched tires and rims can
result in dangerous tire failure on the
road. If a tire is mounted by error on the
wrong-sized rim, do not remount it on
the proper rim - scrap it. It may have
been damaged internally (which is not
externally visible) by having been
dangerously stretched and could fail on
the highway.
Old valves may leak. When new
tubeless tires are mounted, have new
valves of the correct type installed.
Tubeless tires must only be mounted
on wheels designed for tubeless tires
i.e., wheels which have safety humps
or ledges.
It is recommended that you have your
tires and wheels balanced. Tires and
wheels, which are not balanced, may
cause steering difficulties, a bumpy ride,
and irregular tire wear.
Be sure that all your valves have
suitable valve caps. The valve cap is
the primary seal against air loss.
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRES
When using any temporary spare tire,
be sure to follow the vehicle
manufacturer’s instructions.
REMEMBER... TO AVOID DAMAGE TO
YOUR TIRES AND POSSIBLE
ACCIDENT:
• CHECK TIRE PRESSURE AT LEAST
ONCE EACH MONTH WHEN TIRES
ARE COLD AND BEFORE LONG
TRIPS.
• DO NOT
UNDERINFLATE/OVERINFLATE.
• DO NOT OVERLOAD.
• DRIVE AT MODERATE SPEEDS,
OBSERVE LEGAL LIMITS.
• AVOID DRIVING OVER POTHOLES,
OBSTACLES, CURBS OR EDGES OF
PAVEMENT.
• AVOID EXCESSIVE WHEEL
SPINNING.
• IF YOU SEE ANY DAMAGE TO A
TIRE, REPLACE WITH THE SPARE
AND VISIT ANY AUTHORIZED
RETAILER AT ONCE.
• IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS,
CONTACT YOUR AUTHORIZED
RETAILER.
470
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there
is always the possibility that you could
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This could further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel
and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause,
have the vehicle towed to the nearest
repair facility or tire dealer to have the
vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are driving,
the wheels could be out of alignment.
Have an authorized dealer check the
wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
INSPECTING THE WHEEL VALVE
STEMS
Check the valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that could permit air leakage.
TIRE ROTATION
WARNING: If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the front
and rear tires and the vehicle has a
tire pressure monitoring system, then
you need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always perform
the system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the system,
it may not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Note: If your tires show any uneven
wear have the alignment checked by
an authorized dealer before rotating
tires.
Note: If you have a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly, it is intended
for temporary use only and should not
be used in a tire rotation.
471
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Tire Rotation Diagram
Follow the diagram indicating the correct
tire locations for rotating the tires.
E142548
472
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Care
WHAT IS THE TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
E139232
The tire pressure monitoring
system measures the vehicle's tire
pressures. A warning lamp
illuminates if one or more tires are
significantly underinflated or if there is a
system malfunction.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in
heat buildup and internal damage to the
tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire
stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
WARNING: To determine the
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
473
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Note: The use of tire sealants can damage
the tire pressure monitoring system.
Note: If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged it may not function.
474
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
When the outside temperature drops
significantly, the tire pressure could decrease
and activate the low tire pressure warning
lamp.
The warning lamp could also illuminate when
you use a spare wheel, or tire sealant from
the inflator kit.
Note: Regularly checking the vehicle tire
pressures can reduce the possibility for the
warning lamp to illuminate due to outside
air temperature changes.
Note: After you inflate the tires to the
recommended pressure it could take up to
two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h)
for the warning indicator to turn off.
VIEWING THE TIRE PRESSURES
E224333
Using the instrument cluster display
arrow keys navigate to the truck info
section where you can view the tire
pressures.
RESETTING TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING: To determine the
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire
Label on the driver or passenger side
B-pillar, or the edge of the driver door.
You must reset the tire pressure monitoring
system after each tire rotation on vehicles
that require different recommended tire
pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires.
Note: To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the system
reset procedure at least three feet, one
meter, away from another vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure at
the same time.
475
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or the
system can time-out and you need to repeat
the entire procedure on all four wheels.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, then
park in a safe location where you can
easily get to all four tires and have access
to an air pump.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Switch the ignition on but do not start the
engine.
4. Switch the hazard flashers on then off
three times.
Note: You must accomplish this within 10
seconds. If you successfully enter the reset
mode, the horn sounds once, the system
indicator flashes and a message shows in
the information display.
Note: If the system does not enter reset
mode, try again starting at Step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset mode,
the horn does not sound, the system
indicator does not flash and no message
shows in the information display, contact
your authorized dealer.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone confirms that the
sensor identification code has been learned
by the module for this position. If the horn
sounds twice, the reset procedure was
unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
7. Repeat the previous step on the right rear
tire and then on the left rear tire.
8. Switch the ignition off.
Note: If the horn sounds twice again after
switching the ignition off, and repeating the
procedure, contact your authorized dealer
and have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
9. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM – WARNING LAMPS
E139232
The low tire pressure warning lamp
has combined functions, as it
warns you when your tires need
air, and when the system is no longer
capable of functioning as intended.
476
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Action RequiredPossible CauseWarning Lamp
After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the tire label, on the edge of driver door
or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
One or more tires are significantly under
inflated
Solid warning lamp
On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system
must be retrained following every tire rotation.
Tire rotation without sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and refit it to your vehicle
to restore operation of the system.
Temporary spare wheel in useSolid warning lamp or flashing
warning lamp
If the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressures and
the temporary spare wheel is not in use, the system detected a
fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction
477
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES
DetailsMessage
After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire
Label, on the edge of the driver door or the B-Pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes
over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Tire Pressure Low
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The system has detected a fault that requires service or a spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
478
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed, hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have the flat serviced by an authorized
dealer to prevent damage to the system
sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 473). Replace the spare tire
with a road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.
Note: Only use tire sealants in roadside
emergencies as they may cause damage to
the tire pressure monitoring system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator illuminates when the spare tire is
in use. To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, all road wheels
with tire pressure monitoring sensors must
be mounted on this vehicle.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the other road tires and wheels on your
vehicle.
Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in four-wheel
drive.
• Engage four-wheel drive unless the
vehicle is stationary.
• Use four-wheel drive on dry pavement.
Using a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly can compromise the effectiveness
of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
479
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles with a camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
swivel wrench and lug wrench are in the
following locations:
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper.Spare tire
Under the access panel located in the floor compartment behind the
rear seat.
Jack and tool kit bag
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating, and type as those
originally provided for your vehicle. The
recommended tire and wheel sizes can be
found on the Tire Label on the driver side
door frame or the edge of the driver door.
If this information is not found in those
locations, or for additional options, contact
your authorized dealer. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended, could affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
480
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel, place
an appropriate block or wheel chock on
the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Only use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
WARNING: Only use the spare wheel
carrier to stow wheels provided with your
vehicle.
WARNING: Ensure screwthread is
adequately lubricated before use.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P), switch the ignition off
and remove the key before you leave your
vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Only use the specified
jacking points. If you use any other
locations you could damage vehicle
components, such as brake lines.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change
a tire on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to not obstruct the flow of traffic and avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level ground and
activate the hazard flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, place the
transmission in park (P) and switch the
ignition off.
3. Block the wheels diagonally opposite the
flat tire, for example, if the left front tire
is flat, block the right rear wheel.
E175447
Removing the Jack and Tools
1. Open the liftgate and lift the load floor
behind the third row seat. If your vehicle
has an access panel, unlatch and remove
this panel.
2. Loosen the straps and remove the tool
bag from the jack.
3. Loosen the jack screw to remove the
preload .
481
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
4. Remove the wing nut by turning it
counterclockwise, then remove the jack
from the bracket.
E252435
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the jack and tool kit bag, because it needs
to be reinstalled after changing the tire.
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the swivel wrench from the tool
kit bag, open the spare tire winch access
plug at the bottom of the compartment
for the jack and tools tray.
2. Insert the swivel wrench through the
access hole in the floor to engage the
winch. Turn the handle counterclockwise
until the tire lowers to the ground and
the cable is loose.
E417814
3. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.
Note: If your wheel nuts are hidden, use the
tool provided in the jack kit to remove the
wheel trim to access the wheel nuts.
4. Loosen each wheel lug one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is off the ground.
E358685
482
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
Jacking the Vehicle
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
a flat tire in an emergency. Do not attempt
to do any other work on your vehicle when
it is supported by the jack, as your vehicle
could slip off the jack. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
E166722
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
a flat tire in an emergency. Do not attempt
to do any other work on your vehicle when
it is supported by the jack, as your vehicle
could slip off the jack. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The jack should be used
on level firm ground wherever possible.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle
that is being jacked.
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: The jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the life of your vehicle.
Note: Both the front and rear jacking points
are on the frame rails. The correct locations
on the frame rails are marked with an arrow
punched into the frame rail. Jack at the
specified locations to avoid damaging your
vehicle.
Front jacking point
483
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
E360356
Rear jacking point
E360357
1. Position the jack at the jacking point
indicator arrow closest to the flat tire
location. Assemble the jack drive
extension to the lug wrench as shown
and use it to turn the jack drive clockwise
to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
E325278
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.
3. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
4. Completely lower the vehicle by turning
the jack drive counterclockwise.
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. See Wheel Nuts
(page 485).
484
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
E166719
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. You may have to
remove the wheel center cap prior to
pushing the retainer through the center
of the wheel. To remove the center cap,
press it off with the jack tool from the
inner side of the wheel. Pull on the cable
to align the components at the end of the
cable.
3. Using the swivel wrench, insert it through
the access hole behind the third row seat
and engage the winch.
4. Turn the swivel wrench clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
becomes harder to turn and the spare
tire winch ratchets or slips when the tire
is raised to maximum tightness. A clicking
sound can be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Carefully place all tools back into the tool
kit bag.
6. Reinstall the tool kit bag on the jack and
tighten the straps.
7. Reinstall the jack properly on the bracket
and secure with the wing nut.
8. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.
9. If the vehicle has an access panel,
reinstall.
10. Unblock the wheel.
WHEEL NUTS
WARNING: When you install a wheel,
always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the
wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure
any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub so they do not interfere with the
mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing
wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces
can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and
the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle
control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)
1
Bolt Size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt
threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our
recommended replacement wheel nuts and
or wheel bolts.
485
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
Retighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel
disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
Hub pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
486
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Changing a Road Wheel
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
LOCATING THE VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E311767
In the graphic, XXXX is representative of
your vehicle identification number.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
OVERVIEW
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifier.A
Brake system, gross vehicle weight
rating, restraint devices and their
locations.
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
C
Engine or motor type.D
Check digit.E
Model year.F
Assembly plant.G
Production sequence number.H
487
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Identification
WHAT IS A CONNECTED VEHICLE
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile
network and for you to access a range of
features. When used in conjunction with the
Lincoln mobile app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further, for
example checking the tire pressures and the
vehicle location. For additional information,
refer to the local Lincoln website.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network.
Some remote features require additional
service activation. Log in to your Lincoln
account for details. Some restrictions, third
party terms and message or data rates may
apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or
regulations could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO A
MOBILE NETWORK
WHAT IS THE MODEM
The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
MODEM
1. From the settings menu, press Network
& Internet.
2. Switch Vehicle Connectivity on or off.
CONNECTING LINCOLN WAY TO THE
MODEM
1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the Lincoln Way app on your
device and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
4. Select the option to activate your vehicle.
5. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your Lincoln
Way account.
6. Confirm that your Lincoln Way account
is connected to the modem.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO A
WI-FI NETWORK
1. From the settings menu, press Network
& Internet.
2. Press Wi-Fi.
3. Switch Wi-Fi on.
4. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
488
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connected Vehicle
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SETTINGS
From the settings menu, press Privacy and
Data Sharing.
You can adjust several settings, such as:
• Share vehicle data.
• Share vehicle location.
• Share driving data.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, different
options may be available.
Note: Editing connectivity settings could
result in some features not operating
correctly or at all. When you edit connectivity
settings, pop-up messages may appear to
notify you that services will not work without
that setting. If you switch a feature on,
pop-up messages could appear informing
you of the settings that will be turned on.
Some features, for example driver assistance
features, use map data. We recommend
having all connected vehicle settings
enabled to allow the map content to be
updated to the latest version.
E366956
Press the button next to a menu
option for more information.
CONNECTED VEHICLE –
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONNECTED VEHICLE – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
Why is my Lincoln mobile app not
connecting to my vehicle?
• The modem is not enabled. Switch
vehicle connectivity on.
• The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
489
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connected Vehicle
Why can I not connect to a Wi-Fi
network?
• You entered the wrong network
password. Enter the correct password.
• The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to a
place where the network signal is not
obstructed.
• There are multiple access points in range
with the same network name. Choose a
unique name for your network. Do not
use the default name unless it contains
a unique identifier, for example as part
of the MAC address.
Why does the Wi-Fi connection
disconnect after successful
connection?
• The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to a
place where the network signal is not
obstructed.
What can I do if I am close to a Wi-Fi
router but the network signal strength
is weak?
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield,
position your vehicle so that the
windshield is not facing the Wi-Fi router.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the
windows but not on the windshield,
position your vehicle so that the
windshield is facing the Wi-Fi router or
open the windows that are facing the
router.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the
windows and the windshield, open the
windows that are facing the router.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you
have the garage door closed, open the
garage door as it could block the signal.
Why can I not see a network I expect
to see in the list of available networks?
• The network is hidden. Make the network
visible and try again, or manually add a
network in the Wi-Fi settings menu.
• Some network security types are not
supported, for example WEP.
Why do software downloads take too
long?
• The network signal is weak. Move your
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to a
place where the network signal is not
obstructed.
• Wi-Fi network is in high demand or has
a slow Internet connection. Use a more
reliable Wi-Fi network.
490
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connected Vehicle
Why does the software not update
when the system seems to connect to
a Wi-Fi network and the signal strength
is excellent?
• No software update is available at this
time.
• Select automatic updates option in the
settings menu to enable automatic
software update or contact an authorized
dealer.
• There could be a connection problem.
Test the network using another device.
491
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Connected Vehicle
SETTING UP A VEHICLE HOTSPOT
With a data plan, your hotspot can provide
devices in and around your vehicle with Wi-Fi
data.
Note: A mobile device is required to
complete hotspot setup.
1. From the apps menu, press Hotspot.
2. Connect your device to the vehicle
hotspot by scanning the code on the
touchscreen with your device or following
the text instructions on the touchscreen.
Activating a Trial or Purchasing a Data
Plan
1. Connect a device to your vehicle hotspot.
The vehicle network carrier’s service
activation website opens on your device.
Note: If the website does not open, open a
new website and it redirects to the vehicle
network carrier’s website.
2. Follow the instructions on the carrier
portal to purchase a plan or start a trial.
Note: Visit the vehicle network carrier’s
website to purchase more data.
Note: Hotspot services are subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
VEHICLE HOTSPOT SETTINGS
You can change the following in the vehicle
hotspot settings menu:
• Vehicle hotspot name or password.
• Vehicle hotspot frequency.
Changing the Vehicle Hotspot Name
or Password
The hotspot information can only be updated
once you activate the hotspot.
1. From the apps menu, press Hotspot.
2. Press settings.
3. Press Network name.
4. Enter your required network name.
5. Press Enter.
6. Press Password.
7. Enter your required password.
8. Press Enter.
Changing the Vehicle Hotspot
Frequency
The vehicle hotspot frequency band is
selectable depending upon your device
capabilities. You cannot connect your device
to the vehicle hotspot if it does not support
the selected frequency band.
1. From the apps menu, press Hotspot.
2. Press settings.
3. Press Frequency.
4. Select a frequency.
492
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Hotspot
VEHICLE HOTSPOT –
TROUBLESHOOTING
VEHICLE HOTSPOT – FREQUENTLY
ASKED QUESTIONS
Why can I not see the vehicle hotspot
name when I search for Wi-Fi networks
on my cell phone or other device?
• Make sure the vehicle hotspot is
switched on.
• Make sure hidden network is switched
off under the hotspot security menu.
• Check what frequency the hotspot is
transmitting in the vehicle hotspot
settings menu. If the frequency is 5 GHz
and your device cannot see the network,
change the frequency to 2.4 GHz.
How do I remove the vehicle from the
vehicle network carrier's account?
• Contact your vehicle network carrier.
493
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Hotspot
AUDIO SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Listening to loud audio for long periods of
time could damage your hearing.
SWITCHING THE AUDIO UNIT ON
AND OFF
Press the button on the volume
control.
SELECTING THE AUDIO SOURCE
Home Screen View
From the apps menu, press your preferred
audio source.
Note: Available audio sources are listed on
the Apps menu.
Now Playing View
Press the Audio Source dropdown menu and
scroll through the audio sources.
MEDIA CONTROL BUTTONS
Press to play a track. Press again
to pause the track.
Note: Not all sources can be paused.
Press the button to skip to the next
track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press the button once to return to
the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind
through the track.
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch shuffle
mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode.
Press the button on the
touchscreen to change repeat
mode.
Note: Not all sources have repeat mode.
494
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Some vehicles may be able to adjust the
volume using buttons on the steering wheel.
SETTING A MEMORY PRESET
1. Select a station or channel.
2. Press the memory preset button on the
touchscreen.
Note: The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the preset and returns once it
is stored.
Note: You can save presets from multiple
sources to the memory preset bar.
LOCKING THE REAR PASSENGER
AUDIO CONTROLS
To access the rear audio lockout menu:
1. From the controls menu, press Parental
controls.
2. Switch Rear audio lock or unlock.
ADJUSTING THE SOUND
SETTINGS
1. From the settings menu, press Sound.
From the menu, you can adjust the following:
• Tone.
• Balance and fade.
• Speed compensated volume.
• Occupancy mode/Sound mode.
• Volume settings.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
not all settings are available.
SETTING THE CLOCK AND DATE
Clock Settings
To access clock settings:
1. From the settings menu, press System.
2. Press Time.
From the menu you can do the following:
• Have the system automatically set the
time zone.
• Manually select a time zone.
• Switch the displayed time between 12 or
24-hour formats.
Note: Manual time zone selection is only
available if automatic time zone is switched
off.
495
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
AM/FM RADIO
AM/FM RADIO LIMITATIONS
The further you travel from an AM or FM
station, the weaker the signal and the weaker
the reception.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the
reception.
When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the
audio system muting.
SELECTING AN AM/FM RADIO
STATION
Manually Selecting a Radio Station
E356421
Press the button on the radio tuner
to go up the frequency band.
E356422
Press the button on the radio tuner
to go down the frequency band.
Using Seek
Press to seek the next station up
the frequency band.
Press and hold to quickly seek up the
frequency band.
Press to seek the next station
down the frequency band.
Press and hold to quickly seek down the
frequency band.
Using the Station List
1. Press the search button on the radio
screen.
2. Press a radio station from the list.
DIGITAL RADIO
WHAT IS DIGITAL RADIO
HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio.
For additional information, visit
www.HDRadio.com.
HD Radio Technology is manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of XPERI. The vehicle manufacturer and
XPERI are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content
may be changed, added or deleted at any
time at the station owner's discretion.
HOW DOES DIGITAL RADIO WORK
Your system has a special receiver that
allows it to receive digital broadcasts in
addition to analog broadcasts.
496
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in both analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations are only
available digitally and could contain new or
different content.
Note: When the system first receives an HD1
station, it plays the station in the analog
version until it verifies the station is an HD
Radio station. Then it shifts to the digital
version.
Note: There is an audio mute delay when
switching to an HD2 or HD3 station because
the system has to reacquire and decode the
digital signal.
DIGITAL RADIO LIMITATIONS
If you are outside the reception area, the
system could not work.
If you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station could mute due to weak signal
strength.
Note: If you are listening to HD1, the system
changes back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again. If
you are listening to any other multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted
unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
Depending on the station quality, you could
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes between analog and digital audio.
You cannot access a saved HD station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
SWITCHING DIGITAL RADIO
RECEPTION ON AND OFF
1. From the apps menu, press AM or FM.
2. Press Settings.
3. Switch HD radio on or off.
DIGITAL RADIO INDICATORS
HD Radio Indicator
The indicator appears when HD Radio is on
and you tune to a station broadcasting HD
Radio technology.
E142616
The color of the indicator changes to indicate
the system status.
Gray indicates the system is acquiring a
digital station.
Orange indicates digital audio is playing.
Multicast Indicator
The multicast indicator appears if the current
station is broadcasting multiple digital
broadcasts. The highlighted numbers
indicate additional digital channels available.
497
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
Note: For stations that have more than one
HD multicast, the HD indicator and radio text
appears as a button. Press the button to
cycle through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
WHAT IS SATELLITE RADIO
Your factory-installed SiriusXM radio system
includes a limited subscription term, which
begins on the date of sale or lease of your
vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For additional information about extended
subscription terms, visit www.SiriusXM.com
in the United States, www.SiriusXM.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
SATELLITE RADIO LIMITATIONS
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible. Placing
luggage over the antenna may reduce
performance. Factory-installed and
aftermarket vehicle structures including, but
not limited to, roof racks and soft top roofs
in a partially open position could reduce
reception performance.
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking
garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and could result
in the audio system muting. Your display
could show an error message to indicate the
interference.
LOCATING THE SATELLITE RADIO
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
2. Tune to channel 0.
SELECTING A CHANNEL
Manually Selecting a Channel
E328569
E328570
Press the button to find the
previous or next available radio
channel.
498
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
Linear Tuner
The linear tuner is displayed when manually
selecting a channel. You can swipe left or
right on the linear tuner carousel to navigate
through the channel list. Tap on a channel
title to listen to it.
Using Direct Tune
1. Press the channel up or down button to
open the linear tuner screen.
2. Press Direct Tune to open the number
pad.
3. Enter the channel you prefer.
Using Seek
Press either button.
Using the Channel List
1. Press Browse.
2. Select a channel.
SATELLITE RADIO SETTINGS
Subscription
Your subscription status is displayed. You
can subscribe or manage your subscription
directly from the touchscreen.
SiriusXM Favorites
While you are listening to SiriusXM, you can
save favorites by:
• Tapping the currently tuned channel or
show logo on the SiriusXM audio screen.
• Tuning to a channel or show you want to
save as a favorite. Navigate to the
SiriusXM Favorites screen and press the
Add Current button. The currently tuned
channel or show is saved as a favorite.
• Saving a radio preset. This saves the
currently tuned SiriusXM channel or show
as a favorite
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
to use.
Listening History
Listening history is a list of recently listened
to SiriusXM content. You can view, manage
and reset the listening history using the
controls on the touchscreen.
Note: Requires a trial or active subscription
to use.
Help and Support
You can contact SiriusXM Customer Care
directly from the operating system and view
information required to manage your
SiriusXM account.
499
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING
AUDIO SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES (If Equipped)
Satellite Radio Troubleshooting
Recommended ActionPotential EffectsError Message
Internet connectivity is turned off. See
Connected Vehicle (page 488).
Internet streaming and On Demand shows are
unavailable and some SiriusXM features are
disabled.
Connectivity Disabled
Operating system attempts to connect. See
Satellite Radio Limitations (page 498). Switch
to a satellite connection for the current
channel if the option is available.
Audio system may mute. Switch to Satellite
button may be displayed on the SiriusXM
audio screen if the channel is also available
via satellite.
No Internet
Antenna may be obstructed or satellite
reception is weak in your location. See
Satellite Radio Limitations (page 498). Switch
to an internet connection for the current
channel if the option is available.
Audio system may mute. Switch to Internet
button may be displayed on the SiriusXM
audio screen if the channel is also available
via streaming.
No Satellite Signal
Allow some time for the audio to load or tune
to a different channel.
Audio system may mute while the audio
attempts to load.
Slow Network Connection
500
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
Recommended ActionPotential EffectsError Message
A temporary update may be in progress. Allow
some time before retrying to tune to the
channel. If the issue continues, the channel
may no longer be available.
Audio system may mute. Radio may tune to a
different channel.
Channel Unavailable
A temporary update may be in progress. Allow
some time before retrying to play the episode.
If the issue continues, the episode may no
longer be available.
Audio system may mute. Radio may tune to a
different channel.
Episode Unavailable
Allow some time and retry the action.Audio system may mute. Radio may tune to a
different channel.
Something went wrong
Your subscription has expired or you have not
yet subscribed for access to the listed content.
Navigate to Subscription under the Satellite
Radio Settings menu. If you have an active
subscription which includes the listed channel
or content and you see this error, you may
need to refresh your radio. To refresh your
SiriusXM radio, visit www.siriusxm.com/refresh
in the US, or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh in
Canada.
You may need to provide your SiriusXM Radio
identification number. See Locating the
Satellite Radio Identification Number (page
498).
Cannot listen to selected content. Content
may appear grayed out and some features
may be disabled.
Subscribe to Listen
501
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
Recommended ActionPotential EffectsError Message
Your subscription does not include access to
the listed content. You may need to upgrade
your subscription. Navigate to Subscription
under the Satellite Radio Settings menu. If you
have an active subscription which includes
the listed channel or content and you see this
error, you may need to refresh your radio. To
refresh your SiriusXM radio, visit www.siri-
usxm.com/refresh in the US, or www.siri-
usxm.ca/refresh in Canada.
You may need to provide your SiriusXM Radio
identification number. See Locating the
Satellite Radio Identification Number (page
498).
Cannot listen to selected content. Content
may appear grayed out and some features
may be disabled.
Upgrade to Listen
Content is not available in your location or
SiriusXM is unable to determine your location.
Tuning to a different channel may resolve the
issue.
Audio may mute. Not available in your location
or Unable to determine your location may be
displayed.
Location Restricted Content
The Block Explicit Content filter is turned on.
Navigate to Listener Settings under the Satel-
lite Radio Settings menu to access the Block
Explicit Content filter. Navigate to Listener
Settings. See Satellite Radio Settings (page
499).
Audio may mute. Radio may tune to a different
channel.
Channel Blocked
502
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
Recommended ActionPotential EffectsError Message
If issue persists, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Audio may mute. Access to SiriusXM features
may be unavailable.
Antenna Problem or Hardware Problem
Allow SiriusXM some time to complete
updating.
Audio may mute.SiriusXM Updating...
No action necessary. If loading time is longer
than usual, See Satellite Radio Settings (page
499).
Audio may mute. Content may be temporarily
unavailable while loading.
Loading...
No action necessary. Allow SiriusXM some
time to finish loading.
Audio may mute. Content and controls may
be temporarily unavailable.
SiriusXM Loading...
503
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Audio System
IDENTIFYING THE REAR
PASSENGER AUDIO CONTROLS
E356495
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
E100027
Press the icon on the touchscreen
to access the audio control
features.
SWITCHING THE REAR
PASSENGER AUDIO CONTROLS
ON AND OFF
Press the button on the
touchscreen.
SELECTING THE AUDIO SOURCE
Press the Source button to open the media
source menu.
You can press the Source button multiple
times to change the audio source or scroll
through the media sources.
PLAYING AND PAUSING THE
AUDIO SOURCE
Press the button to pause
playback. Press again to resume
playback.
Note: Not all sources can be paused.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
E356421
Press the buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the volume
for the rear passenger audio.
E356422
SWITCHING SHUFFLE MODE ON
AND OFF
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch shuffle
mode on or off.
Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode.
SWITCHING REPEAT MODE ON
AND OFF
Press the button on the
touchscreen to switch repeat mode
on or off.
Note: Not all sources have repeat mode.
CHANGING THE RADIO STATION
In radio mode, select a frequency
band and press and release either
button. The system stops at the
first station it finds in that direction.
504
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Rear Passenger Audio Controls
CENTER DISPLAY OVERVIEW
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For your safety, features that are not critical
while driving are not available when the
vehicle is moving at or above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: Illustrations are provided for
conceptual understanding only and may
appear differently on your vehicle.
E398194
Home screen.A
Controls. See Controls (page 506).B
Apps. See Apps (page 506).C
Instrument panel display. See
Customizing the Instrument Panel
Display (page 507).
D
Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
See Switching Android Auto™ On
and Off (page 516). See Switching
Apple CarPlay On and Off (page
516).
E
Status bar. See Status Bar (page
505).
F
Climate control. See Climate
Control (page 138).
G
E366956
If you see this icon, press it for
more information.
E405501
If you see this icon, press it to open
the settings menu for the app or
feature.
E398203
If you see this icon, press it to
search within that app or feature.
STATUS BAR
The following icons can appear in the status
bar.
Notification Center
E394894
Press to view notifications.
E394895
Unread notifications available.
Press to view notifications.
Device Signal
E394899
Device signal strength.
505
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Center Display
E394901
R
Device signal roaming.
E394900
Device signal not available.
Vehicle Signal
E335292
Data unavailable or disabled.
Wi-Fi connected.
E394893
Wi-Fi not connected.
E394896
Wi-Fi connected, internet
unavailable.
Vehicle signal strength.
Vehicle signal roaming.
E394897
Vehicle signal not available.
Privacy
Vehicle location sharing on.
E394608
Microphone active.
APPS
E394609
Press to see a list of apps. To open
an app, select the app.
You can download additional apps on your
vehicle through Google Play. To download
additional apps, make sure your vehicle is in
park (P), connected to the internet and
signed in to an active personal Google
Account.
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to grant
certain permissions. You can review and
change the permissions at any time when
your vehicle is not moving. We recommend
that you check the app provider's terms and
conditions and privacy policy before using
their app. Make sure that you have an active
account for apps that you want to use
through the system. Some apps work with
no setup. Others require you to configure
personal settings and enable data
connectivity before you can use them.
Customizing the Apps Screen
1. Press and hold an app.
2. Drag the app to a new location.
CONTROLS
E394611
Press to open the controls screen
where you can turn common
features off and on.
Customizing the Controls Screen
1. Press and hold a control tile.
2. Drag the control tile to a new location.
506
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Center Display
CUSTOMIZING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL DISPLAY
E398204
Press to change the layout for the
instrument panel display screen.
E402727
If you see this icon on an item,
press it to see more actions for that
item.
Adding, Removing, or Reordering Items
• To add an item to the instrument panel
display screen, drag it into one of the
spots at the top of the screen.
• To remove an item, drag it down from the
spot at the top of the screen.
• To reorder items, drag an item from one
spot to another.
Switching On the Calm Screen
The calm screen changes the instrument
panel display screen to a simplified view.
1. At the top of the screen, turn on the Calm
switch.
SETTINGS
E405451
From the apps menu, press to
open the settings app.
You can change the display language and
other measurement units under the System
menu.
E366956
If you see this icon next to a menu
option, press it for more
information.
E405501
If you see this icon in the top
corner, press it to open the
settings for that app or feature.
Display Settings
From the display menu you can do the
following:
• Switch the calm screen on.
• Manually adjust the screen brightness.
• Set the display mode.
Touchscreen Brightness
To manually adjust the screen brightness,
use the plus or minus buttons.
Note: The display brightness is limited if the
settings of the instrument panel lighting
brightness are set to the highest or lowest
setting.
REBOOTING THE DISPLAYS
If the center display or instrument cluster
screens go blank or appear to not be
functioning correctly, you can reboot it by
following the below procedure.
Press and hold the audio system power
button for 10 seconds.
Contact an authorized dealer if the screens
do not reboot properly.
507
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Center Display
WHAT IS VOICE INTERACTION
Voice Interaction allows you to control
vehicle features using conversational
requests.
SETTING YOUR DEFAULT
ASSISTANT
You can set your default assistant to Google
Assistant or Alexa Built-In.
1. From the settings menu, press Assistant
& voice.
2. Press Digital assistant app.
3. Select the digital assistant you prefer.
ALEXA BUILT-IN
Alexa Built-In allows you to use Alexa in your
vehicle for auto-specific use cases on the
road and gives you access to an
ever-evolving number of skills that help to
make your life more productive, entertaining,
and connected while using your vehicle.
Alexa Built-In Requirements
To use Alexa, all of the following must occur:
• Your vehicle modem is enabled.
• You are signed in to an existing Amazon
account.
• Vehicle connectivity and vehicle data
sharing is enabled.
Note: Support and functionality may vary
based on the country in which your Lincoln
mobile app account is registered.
Signing In to Your Account
1. Open the app menu.
2.
E429021
Press the button and follow the
on-screen prompts to sign in to your
account.
Note: You can also sign in to Alexa via the
settings menu.
Signing Out of Your Account
1.
E405501
From the Alexa screen, press
the button.
2. Press Sign Out.
Using Alexa Built-In
Alexa can be used in three ways:
1. Say Alexa.
Note: Alexa must be set as your default
assistant and the wake word must be
enabled.
2.
E142599
Press the voice interaction
button on the steering wheel and then
say Alexa to invoke Alexa to start
listening.
Note: Alexa must be set as your default
assistant.
3.
E368039
From the Alexa app screen,
press the button.
508
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Voice Interaction
You can use Alexa for the following and
more:
• Entertainment.
• Hands-free calling.
• Traffic and navigation.
• Vehicle controls.
• Smart home device control.
• Weather and news information.
You can adjust the following settings in the
touchscreen:
• Enable or disable the wake word.
• Enable or disable contact list sharing for
connected phones.
• Learn more about what you can do with
Alexa by browsing the things to try.
• Set the default assistant setting.
GOOGLE ASSISTANT
Google Assistant allows you to use your
voice to perform everyday tasks. You can
make calls, get directions, play music, and
control certain functions of your vehicle.
Google, Android, Android Auto, Google Maps
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Google LLC.
Signing In to Your Account
Signing in to Google Assistant can be done
in a number of ways, but the setup wizard
on first boot is the most convenient way.
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
profile settings.
2. Press Accounts.
3. Press Add.
4. Select Google Account under associate
accounts.
Note: You can use Google Assistant without
signing into a Google Account, but signing
in unlocks greater functionality such as smart
home functionality and productivity features.
Signing Out of Your Account
1. From the settings menu, press Driver
profile settings.
2. Press Accounts.
3. Press Remove.
4. Select Google Account under associate
accounts.
Using Google Assistant
Google Assistant can be used in three ways:
1. Say Hey Google.
Note: Google Assistant must be set as your
default assistant and the wake word must
be enabled.
2.
E142599
Press the voice interaction
button on the steering wheel and then
say Hey Google to invoke Google
Assistant to start listening.
Note: Press the voice interaction button
again to interrupt a voice prompt and begin
speaking.
Note: Google Assistant must be set as your
default assistant.
3.
E429825
From the app menu, press the
Google Assistant button.
509
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Voice Interaction
You can use Google Assistant for the
following and more:
• Entertainment.
• Hands-free calling.
• Traffic and navigation.
• Vehicle controls.
• Managing your schedule.
• Looking up answers.
• Smart home device control.
• Weather and news information.
You can adjust the following settings in the
touchscreen:
• Adjust the language of your voice
assistant.
• Enable or disable the wake word.
• Allow personal results in this car.
• Allow suggestions from your voice
assistant.
• Get notifications from your voice
assistant.
• Read and respond to vehicle
notifications.
For additional information and settings about
Google Assistant, scan the code.
E404531
510
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Voice Interaction
PHONE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
CONNECTING YOUR PHONE
1. From the settings menu, press Bluetooth.
2. Press Add device.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
3. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
4. Confirm the number on your cell phone
matches the number on the touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
5. Approve phonebook download request
on your cell phone.
PHONE MENU
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Displays a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to alphabetically
sort your contacts.
Favorites
Displays the list of favorite contacts that are
set up on your phone.
SMS app
Displays the list of text messages to read,
listen to, or respond to.
Phone List
Displays the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Note: Up to 12 devices can be stored.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
511
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
Voice Control
Press the button and say a command to use
the Google Assistant or Siri voice assistant
available on your connected phone to access
supported features.
Note: Some features under the phone menu
may not be available if the feature is not
supported through the phone.
512
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
MAKING AND RECEIVING A
PHONE CALL
Making Calls
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the name of the
contact you want to call. Any
numbers stored for that
contact display along with
any stored contact photos.
Select the number that you
want to call. The system
begins the call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select an entry that you
want to call. The system
begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number from your favorites, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select an entry that you
want to call. The system
begins the call.
Favorites
To call a number that is not stored in your
phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The system
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and
number display on the screen along with the
call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
513
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the button
on the steering
wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Mute
Transfer the phone
call audio to the cell
phone or back to the
touchscreen.
Privacy
This feature allows
you to put the active
call on hold, to either
make another call or
answer an incoming
call.
Hold
514
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
SENDING AND RECEIVING A TEXT MESSAGE
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
515
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
SWITCHING TEXT MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION ON AND OFF
The settings on your device must be enabled
to receive text message notifications on the
center display. Check your device settings
to enable these features.
SWITCHING APPLE CARPLAY ON
AND OFF
The operating system is compatible with
wireless Apple CarPlay on iPhone 6s or later.
Make sure your iPhone has been updated
to the latest version of iOS.
Enabling Wireless Apple CarPlay
1. Pair your device to Bluetooth. See
Connecting Your Phone (page 511).
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Disabling Wireless Apple CarPlay
While Apple CarPlay is connected:
1. From the settings menu, press Bluetooth.
2. Find your device in the list.
3. Press the Apple CarPlay button.
Re-Enabling Wireless Apple CarPlay
1. From the settings menu, press Bluetooth.
2. Select your device from the list.
3. Press the Apple CarPlay button.
SWITCHING ANDROID AUTO™ ON
AND OFF
Enabling Android Auto with USB (If
Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Enabling Android Auto with Wireless
1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®.
2. Follow the instructions on your device
and the touchscreen.
Note: A compatible Android phone and
active data plan are required to use Android
Auto.
Note: Android Auto Wireless is not supported
on certain Android™ devices.
For more information, scan here.
E408032
Disabling Android Auto
While Android Auto is connected:
1. From the settings menu, press Bluetooth.
2. Find your device in the list.
3. Press the Android Auto button.
Re-Enabling Android Auto
1. From the settings menu, press Bluetooth.
516
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
2. Find your device in the list.
3. Press the Android Auto button.
Note: While using Android Auto/Apple
CarPlay, some vehicle data such as speed
and location is shared with your phone. This
data does not identify you. Vehicle
manufacturer is not responsible for the way
this data is handled and may disable
Android Auto/Apple CarPlay at any time.
517
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Phone
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH®
DEVICE
1. From the settings menu, press
Connectivity.
2. Press Phone list.
3. Press Bluetooth.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your device.
1. Select your vehicle on your device.
Note: A number appears on your device and
on the touchscreen.
2. Confirm that the number on your device
matches the number on the touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your device.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ford
Motor Company is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of
their respective owners.
PLAYING MEDIA USING
BLUETOOTH®
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Connect your device.
From the Apps menu, press Bluetooth audio.
Press to play a track. Press again
to pause the track.
Press to skip to the next track.
Press and hold to fast forward
through the track.
Press once to return to the
beginning of a track. Repeatedly
press to return to previous tracks.
Press and hold to fast rewind through the
track.
518
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Bluetooth®
HOW DO PERSONAL PROFILES
WORK
This feature allows you to create multiple
personal profiles enabling users to
personalize the vehicle's settings such as
seats and mirrors, as well as non-positional
settings like radio, navigation and driver
assist. Non-positional settings are saved
when you change a setting while a profile is
active.
ENABLING OR DISABLING
PERSONAL PROFILES
The vehicle does not allow the user to
disable personal profiles.
Note: Personal profiles are disabled
automatically when Valet Mode is entered.
CREATING A PERSONAL PROFILE
1. Switch the vehicle on and leave it in park
(P).
2. From the settings menu, press Profile.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
Note: The guest profile is auto created with
its own memory settings.
Note: You cannot link a personalized name
to a guest profile.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
The driver memory function recalls the
following positions:
• Memory driver seat.
• Memory mirrors.
• Memory steering column.
• Memory adjustable foot pedals.
Saving and recalling a preset position
The driver memory function allows you to
save and recall the desired position of a
profile.
You can only recall a position by choosing
that profile in the profile menu.
You can recall the profile along with its saved
position when the vehicle is in park (P) or
neutral (N) and the vehicle is not moving.
Note: Pressing any position control switches
during a memory position recall cancels a
recall.
Auto Save option
Auto Save detects any memory position
adjustments and saves them to the current
profile.
Auto Save allows you to automatically save
memory positions for the driver seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column and adjustable foot
pedals.
519
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Personal Profiles
LINKING OR UNLINKING A
PERSONAL PROFILE TO A REMOTE
CONTROL
You can save a personal profile, including
saved memory positions, for up to three
remote controls by assigning a remote
control to a profile using the touchscreen.
1. From the settings menu, press Profile.
2. Press Edit.
3. Press ID methods.
4. Press Key fob label.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to link
or unlink a remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
is in range, the memory function moves to
the settings of the first key to initiate a
memory recall.
Note: Each remote can be linked to only one
personal profile.
Note: You cannot link a remote control to a
guest profile.
LINKING OR UNLINKING A
PERSONAL PROFILE TO A DEVICE
You can save a profile, including saved
memory positions, for up to three devices by
assigning a device to a personal profile using
the touchscreen.
1. From the settings menu, press Profile.
2. Press Edit.
3. Press ID methods.
4. Press Phone as a key label.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to link
or unlink a device.
Note: Each device can be linked to only one
personal profile.
Note: You cannot link a device to a guest
profile.
Note: You cannot link a personalized name
to a guest profile.
Locking a personal profile
Profile lock allows you to lock your profile
and prevent others from accessing the
profile.
1. From the settings menu, press Profile.
2. Press Profile settings.
3. Press Security.
4. Press Profile lock.
5. Press to choose your preferable lock
type.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a profile lock.
Note: If all user profiles are passcode
protected, and the passcodes are unknown,
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to
reset the system.
520
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Personal Profiles
CONNECTED NAVIGATION
Google Maps provides the navigation
software on your vehicle. For more
information scan here:
E404531
521
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Navigation
Lincoln Enhance software updates uses
over-the-air technology to deliver the latest
features, software enhancements and quality
improvements to your vehicle.
When Automatic Updates is turned on
updates are downloaded in the background
while you are driving.
Some updates require your vehicle to be
parked. You can set a recurring schedule
when your vehicle is not in use (like
overnight). Scheduled updates usually take
up to 45 minutes and some updates can take
longer than that. Check your center display
screen or the Lincoln Way app for the most
accurate estimated update time.
Software updates are delivered wirelessly
using the vehicle modem or Wi-Fi. To make
sure the most seamless experience. See
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network
(page 488).
Software Update Requirements
The following conditions must be met to
receive scheduled updates:
• The vehicle is parked.
• The ignition is off.
• All doors are closed.
• Your foot is off the brake pedal.
• The parking lamps are off.
• The alarm is not triggered.
• The hazard indicators are off.
• Your 12V battery is charged.
• No emergency calls are in place.
• Your vehicle is not in limp home mode.
Software Update Limitations
Once a scheduled update begins you cannot:
• Cancel the update.
• Drive your vehicle.
• Start the ignition.
• Start your vehicle.
• Use the alarm, central locks or door
tones.
• Use the remote control to lock, unlock or
start your vehicle.
• Use the electronic door locks.
• Fast charge your electric vehicle.
• If connected to a level 1 or 2 charger,
charging pauses until the update is
completed.
Note: If an update is interrupted you will
receive a notification on Lincoln Way app
with instructions to resolve it. If there are no
action steps, contact your authorized dealer.
SOFTWARE UPDATE SETTINGS
To access the Software Updates menu:
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press System.
3. Press Software Updates.
You can do the following in the Software
Updates menu:
• Switch Automatic Updates on and off.
• Schedule and install software updates.
• View software update details.
522
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Software Updates
E366956
Press the button next to a menu
option for more information.
Switching Automatic Updates On and
Off
Your vehicle may come with Automatic
Updates switched on. To make sure your
vehicle always has the latest software, which
could include security or other
enhancements, we do not recommend
switching Automatic Updates off.
Note: Software updates require approval to
download or install with Automatic Updates
switched off.
Scheduling and Installing Software
Updates
Scheduling Software Updates
From the Software Updates menu:
1. Press Schedule Updates.
2. Select the days and time for updates.
The more days that updates are scheduled,
the more frequently your vehicle installs new
updates. We recommend selecting a time
you normally do not need your vehicle, such
as overnight.
Some updates require your vehicle to be
switched off.
Note: The schedule you set is recurring. If
Automatic Updates is on, every time a
scheduled update is available, it installs on
this schedule unless you change it. You are
notified on your touchscreen and connected
device prior to a scheduled update, with an
option to reschedule it.
Installing Software Updates
Using the Notification Center
1. Press a Software Update indicator on
your touchscreen when it appears.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Using the Touchscreen
From the Software Updates menu:
1. Press Update Details.
2. Press Update Now.
Viewing Software Update Details
From the Software Updates menu, press
Update Details.
SOFTWARE UPDATE INDICATORS
E327787
Vehicle software update reminder,
schedule required, confirmation of
default schedule required, or
consent required.
E327788
Vehicle software update canceled,
update not successful, or
precondition not met.
E353218
Vehicle software update
successful.
523
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle Software Updates
PERFORMING A SYSTEM RESET
To perform a reset:
1. Press Settings from the Apps menu.
2. Press System.
3. Press Reset options.
4. Select the reset you prefer.
5. Follow the prompts on screen to
complete the reset.
E366956
There are multiple resets available,
press the button next to each for
more information.
Perform a factory reset whenever there is a
transfer of vehicle ownership to prevent the
loss of personal data. Performing a factory
reset allows you to remove all personal
information and restore the modem and
center display to their factory defaults.
In the modem, this deletes all the authorized
users and removes access to the connected
vehicle. In the system this deletes all data
imported from mobile devices connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth® including the
addresses manually entered into the
navigation system.
Note: If you are the first owner, your modem
comes in a partially activated state.
Note: If you are not the first owner, it comes
in either a fully activated, partially activated
or deactivated state.
524
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Vehicle System Reset
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit the online
store website:
Web Address (United States)
https://accessories.lincoln.com/
Web Address (Canada)
www.lincolncanada.com
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Lincoln Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Lincoln Original
Accessory through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Lincoln Licensed Accessories
The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Lincoln
Licensed Accessories, and does not design
or test these accessories to Lincoln
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer. See your
warranty guide for more information.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that have radio
transmitters, for example two-way radios,
telephones and theft alarms. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) and
Canadian Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulations and
should only be installed by an authorized
dealer.
525
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
526
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Accessories
WHAT IS LINCOLN PROTECT
Protect yourself from the rising cost of
vehicle repairs with the Lincoln Protect
extended service plan.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans
(United States Only)
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It is
the extended service plan backed by Lincoln,
and provides more protection beyond the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
When you visit your Lincoln Dealer, insist on
genuine Lincoln Protect extended service
plans.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Protect
extended service plan. With Lincoln Protect,
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four mechanical Lincoln Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it
is probably easier to list what is not
covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Lincoln dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
First Day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we will give you a rental vehicle to
use for the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and field service actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
527
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln Protect
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. This should give
you and your potential buyer a little more
peace of mind.
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
The Lincoln Protect extended service plan
also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc - if equipped.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment - if
equipped.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved with
no credit check or hassles. To learn more,
call our Lincoln Protect extended service
plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Lincoln Protect (Canada Only)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Protect extended
service plan. The Lincoln Protect extended
service plan is the only service contract
backed by Lincoln, Limited. Depending on
the plan you purchase, the Lincoln Protect
extended service plan provides benefits such
as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
528
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln Protect
There are several Lincoln Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each
plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase a Lincoln Protect
extended service plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.LincolnCanada.com
to find the Lincoln Protect extended service
plan that is right for you.
529
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Lincoln Protect
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you use
your vehicle. By using several important
factors in its calculations, the monitor helps
reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and
reduces environmental waste at the same
time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the instrument cluster display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection - recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level - vehicles with dipstick. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
530
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Inspect cabin air filter if equipped, service as required.
Inspect engine air filter, service as required.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor (page 427).
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every three years.
1
Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time for the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
531
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
For severe service, replace the spark plugs.
Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km)
For severe service, change the transfer case fluid.
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
2
Change the automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km)
Change the front axle fluid - Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Change the transfer case fluid - Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Change the engine coolant.
3
Every 200,000 mi (320,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 5,000 mi (8,000 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance
for the interval.
2
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every 5 years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
532
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the
schedule:
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
The transfer case, front and rear axles in your
vehicle do not require scheduled
maintenance. They are more likely to require
a fluid change if the vehicle has experienced
extended periods of extreme or severe duty
cycle driving. Changing or checking the
transfer case, front and/or rear axle lubricant
is not necessary unless the unit has been
submerged in water, shows signs of leakage.
Contact your authorized dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the oil change interval is 3,000 mi
(5,000 km). If the available API SM or SN oils
are not available, then the oil change interval
is 2,000 mi (3,200 km)
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
What Are Considered Severe Driving
Conditions
A vehicle that is driven for short trips of less
than 5–10 mi (8–16 km), driving in
temperatures well below or above average,
driving in any dusty conditions, idling more
than recommended such as in traffic, and
driving with a heavy load or while towing a
load are considered severe driving
conditions. If the vehicle is driven in any of
these conditions, follow the severe service
maintenance items listed in the scheduled
maintenance chart.
533
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals
serve two purposes: first is to maintain the
reliability of your vehicle and the second is
to keep the cost of owning your vehicle
down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result
in vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Our Genuine Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock our parts and our
authorized branded remanufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts, they
may not meet our specifications and could
affect emissions compliance.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, a message appears
in the instrument cluster display at the proper
oil change interval. This interval may be up
to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid
vehicles could exceed 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
When the oil change message appears in
the instrument cluster display, it is time for
an oil change. Make sure you perform the
oil change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure to reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Resetting the
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor (page 427).
534
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
If your instrument cluster display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six
months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your
last oil change. Never exceed one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change
intervals.
You can drive your vehicle in such a way that
may lead to higher oil consumption including
extended time at high engine speeds, high
loads, engine braking, hard cornering
maneuvers, track and off-road usage. Under
these conditions, oil consumption of
approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter
per 800 km) is possible. Check the engine
oil level at every refueling and adjust to
maintain proper levels to avoid engine
damage.
You can also drive your vehicle in such a way
that dilutes and increases the level of oil by
frequent short trips that do not allow the
engine to get to operating temperature,
extended idling and low speed driving for
long periods of time.
It is important to rely upon your dealership
to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
We strongly recommend only using our
genuine or our authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of your
vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult
your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. Have discolored
fluids that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination checked
immediately.
Make sure to change the vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using our
approved flushing chemical.
Scheduled Maintenance Service
Intervals
For your scheduled maintenance service
intervals, visit https://www.ford.com/support/
maintenance-schedule.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections.
535
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
The engine oil level.
Function of all interior and the exterior lights.
The tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
The windshield washer fluid level.
Check Every Six Months
The battery connections. Clean if necessary.
The body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
The cooling system fluid level and the coolant system strength.
The door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
The hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
The parking brake for proper operation.
The seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt for operation.
The washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
536
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
It is important to have the systems on your
vehicle regularly checked. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt or belts
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalfshaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2
If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
537
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
Severe Driving Conditions
A vehicle that is driven for short trips of less
than 5–10 mi (8–16 km) miles, driving in
temperatures greatly below or above
average, driving in any dusty conditions,
idling more than recommended such as in
traffic, and driving with a heavy load or while
towing a load are considered severe driving
conditions. If you drive your vehicle in any
of these conditions, follow the severe service
maintenance items listed in the scheduled
maintenance chart.
538
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Scheduled Maintenance
ROLLOVER WARNING
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
AUTO LINE PROGRAM - UNITED
STATES OF AMERICA
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator considers the testimony provided
and makes a decision after the hearing.
539
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within 40 days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information that follows, call or write to
request a program application. You will be
asked for your name and address, general
information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that needs to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
reviews the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National
Programs, Inc.
1676 International Drive, Suite 550
McLean, VA 22102
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
For additional information, refer to the Better
Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
THE MEDIATION AND
ARBITRATION PROGRAM -
CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
540
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN
THE UNITED STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN
CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
541
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://tc.canada.ca/recallsWebsite (English)
http://tc.canada.ca/rappelsWebsite (French)
1-800-333-0510Phone
Lincoln of Canada Contact Information
www.LincolnCanada.comWebsite
1-800-387-9333Phone
RADIO FREQUENCY CERTIFICATION LABELS
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
2F5TRAptivSRR5 BLIS Corner Radar (RRU2)
542
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E380327
H-28070
Brazil
E375123
15375-23-12270
China
CMIIT ID: 2023LJ10407
Djibouti
AGREE PAR LE MCPT (REPUBLIQUE DE
DJIBOUTI)
Numéro d'agrément:
040/DDTIC/2024
Date d'agrément:
16/04/2024
Europe Union EU
E310043
543
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Ghana
NCA APPROVED: 7E6-M0-XDF-TME
Indonesia
E436612
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA - 2F5TR.
Mauritania
AGREE PAR L'ANE MAURITANIE
Numéro d'agrément:
1222/ARE/2023
Date d'agrément:
06/02/2023
Mexico
IFT: ROAP2F23-27117
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d'agrément:
MR00036523ANRT2023
Date d'agrément:
30/01/23
544
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2022-04-I-0255
South Africa
E436613
South Korea
E339675
R-C-1Ap-2F5TR
Taiwan
E373549
CCAI23LP0640T2
545
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E418703
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: L2C2F5TR
IC: 3432A-2F5TR
546
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E357468
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
F5TRAptivSRR5 BLIS Corner Radar
547
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E338548
Brazil
E387284
China
CMIIT ID: 2022LP14250
Djibouti
E367134
Europe Union EU
E310043
Ghana
E344037
548
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Indonesia
E436588
Jamaica
E344038
Mauritania
E367135
Mexico
IFETEL: RCPAPF520-0480
Morocco
E368150
549
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2020-10-I-0753
Singapore
E339940
South Africa
E369016
South Korea
E338319
R-C-1Ap-F5TR
550
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Taiwan
E356894
Thailand
E392562
Ukraine
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E418704
551
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: L2CF5TR
IC: 3432A-F5TR
E427204
552
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Vietnam
E278262
BODY CONTROL MODULE
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
M3NA2C738448ContinentalGen 1 Body Control Module
553
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E340512
Djibouti
E344539
Ghana
E340513
Jamaica
E340514
Mauritania
E340515
Morocco
E344540
554
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Pakistan
E337974
Paraguay
E339812
2018-08-I-000410
2013-08-I-0158
South Africa
E344541
South Korea
E339675
2013-07-03
555
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Syria
E344542
Ukraine
E269682
United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
FCC ID: M3NA2C738448
IC: 7812A-A2C738448
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Vietnam
E278262
Zambia
E344538
556
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
CRUISE CONTROL MODULE
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
F3TRAptivMRR3 Medium Range Radar
Argentina
E338549
Brazil
E388865
Djibouti
E356903
557
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
EAC Marking - Russia, Belarus,
Kazakhstan
E253816
Europe Union EU
E310043
Ghana
E344040
Independent State Of Samoa
E365127
Indonesia
E436589
Israel
E388866
558
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Jamaica
E344041
Malaysia
E339836
HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E356900
Mexico
IFT: RCPAPF320-0479
Moldova
E337971
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d'agrément:
MR00030034ANRT2021
Date d'agrément: 16/09/2021
559
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Pakistan
E359721
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2020-10-I-0752
Sierra Leone
E382724
TAN: 2021-002-0028
Singapore
E339940
South Africa
E388867
560
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
South Korea
E339675
R-C-1Ap-F3TR
Taiwan
E356901
Thailand
E392562
Ukraine
E269682
561
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Unites Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E418705
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: L2CF3TR
IC: 3432A-F3TR
562
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E427204
563
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Zambia
E356902
OPERATING SYSTEM
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
SG5PHXFordPDC
564
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA – SG5PHX
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2023-06-I-0457
South Korea
E339675
R-C-FDM-SG5PHX
565
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E420902
United States and Canada
FCC ID: KMH SG5PHX
IC: 1422A SG5PHX
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with ISED Canada
license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'ISDE Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage;
2. L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
566
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This
equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This device and its antenna
must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter. This equipment should be
installed and operated with a normally
maintained separation distance of at least
20cm between the radiator and your body.
PASSIVE KEY
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
A3C054342ContinentalMotion Sense Passive Key
567
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E380327
H-25996
Ghana
NCA APPROVED: SRO-1M-7E4-107
Israel
E400028
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d'agrément:
MR00027379ANRT2021
Date d'agrément: 10/02/2021
Paraguay
E339812
568
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
NR: 2020-09-I-0618
Serbia
E364764
Sierra Leone
E382724
TAN: 2021-002-0049
Singapore
Complies with IMDA Standards
Dealer License Number:
DA 00461
South Korea
E339675
R-C-TAL-A3C054342
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
TRA REGISTERED No:
ER81340/20
DEALER No:
DA88113/20
569
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Kingdom
E362840
PASSIVE KEY
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
A3C108397ContinentalPassive Key Transmitter
570
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E428291
E428292
E428290
571
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Brazil
E375123
03184-23-06546
Israel
E392456
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA – M3N-A3C108397
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2022-03-I-0162
Serbia
E392454
Singapore
Complies with IMDA Standards
Dealer License Number:
DA 00461
572
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
South Africa
E39245 5
E392455
Taiwan
E373549
CCAB22LP1030T3
Thailand
E392562
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E427005
573
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: M3N-A3C108397
IC ID: 7812A-A3C108397
E427204
574
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
FO2-RX433UDAAptivRadio Transceiver Module (RTM)
Democratic Republic of Congo
Agréé par l'ARPTC
N° d'homologation:
HER - 0151/Septembre/2022
Date d'homologation:
22/09/2022
Djibouti
AGREE PAR LE MCPT (REPUBLIQUE DE
DJIBOUTI)
Numéro d'agrément:
033/DDTIC/2020
Date d'agrément:
07/06/2020
Europe Union EU
E310043
575
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Ghana
NCA PRODUCT IDENTIFIERS: SRO-1M-7E4-
108
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA – FO2-RX433UDA
Independent State of Samoa
E365127
Israel
E409153
E431812
Malaysia
E339836
HIDF16000009
Mauritania
AGREE PAR L'ANE MAURITANIE
Numéro d'agrément:
0803/ARE/2020
Date d'agrément:
03/06/2020
576
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Mexico
E364908
IFT: RCPAPFO21-0004
Moldova
E337971
Morocco
E340648
Pakistan
E342392
Serbia
23
E414466
South Africa
E340649
577
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Taiwan
E373549
CCAB22LP1370T1
Thailand
E409232
Ukraine
E269682
United Kingdom
E362840
578
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E417982
Zambia
E340646
579
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
FNV3-B6-NAFordTelematics Control Unit
FNV3-B6-ROW
FNV3-B6-C
FNV3-B6-C-V2X
Argentina
E423363
C-29802
China
CMIIT ID: 2023CJ1792
CMIIT ID: 2023CJ15969
CMIIT ID: 2023CJ1792
CMIIT ID: 2024CJ0557
European Union EU
E310043
580
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Malaysia
E269697
HIDF16000009
Mexico
E364908
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2023-01-I-0047
Serbia
E412106
581
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
South Africa
E412107
South Korea
E339675
R-C-FDM-FNV3B6ROW
Taiwan
E373549
CCAH235G0042T9
We recommend that the distance between
the antenna of the telematics control unit
and the user be greater than 14 in (35 cm)
when using the telematics control unit.
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E432914
582
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: KMH-14H317-NA1
IC: 1422A-14H317NA1
E427204
583
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Vietnam
E278262
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM SENSORS
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
BG2BP4Schrader/SensataBurnell TPM Sensor
584
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E380327
CNC ID: H-28035
Brazil
E375123
13309-22-08001
European Union EU
E310043
The RED 2014/53/EU (replacing R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC on 13 June 2016) explicitly states that instructions for intentional radiators include
reference to "(a) frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates; and (b) maximum radio-frequency power transmitted in the
frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates," in addition to carrying over the general operational instruction and Declaration
of Conformity inclusion requirements from the R&TTE Directive.
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type BG2BP4 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text
of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://www.schradertpms.com/en-gb/downloads
585
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
f=433.92MHz
P<10mW (e.i.r.p)
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland United Kingdom.
Israel
E396859
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA - BG2BP4.
Malaysia
E339836
HIDF16000009
Mexico
IFT: RLVSCBG22-2502
Moldova
E337971
586
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d'agrément:
MR00034968ANRT2022
Date d'agrément: 21/12/2022
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2022-05-I-0000331
Serbia
E392454
Singapore
Complies with IMDA Standards
DA 00461
South Africa
E396860
587
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
South Korea
E339675
MSIP-R-C-SRD-BG2BP4
Taiwan
E373549
CCAB22LP0730T0
Thailand
E392562
Ukraine
E269682
588
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Unites Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E426553
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: MRXBG2BP4
IC: 2546A-BG2BP4
589
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E427204
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM SENSORS
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
FP4Schrader/Sensata434 Faraday Gen 6 TPMS Sensor
590
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E338009
China
E338011
Democratic Republic of Congo
Agréé par l'ARPTC
N° d'homologation: HIR-0099/09/2016
Date d'homologation: 15/09/2016
Djibouti
E338012
European Union (EU)
E310043
591
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
The RED 2014/53/EU (replacing R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC on 13 June 2016) explicitly states that instructions for intentional radiators include
reference to "(a) frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates; and (b) maximum radio-frequency power transmitted in the
frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates," in addition to carrying over the general operational instruction and Declaration
of Conformity inclusion requirements from the R&TTE Directive.
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type FP4 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of
the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://www.schradertpms.com/en-gb/downloads
f=433.92MHz
P<10mW (e.i.r.p)
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland United Kingdom.
Ghana
E338016
592
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Independent State of Samoa
E365127
Israel
E382725
Jamaica
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA - FP4.
Mauritania
E337970
Moldova
E337971
Nigeria
E337972
593
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Oman
E337973
Pakistan
E337974
Paraguay
E338018
Serbia
E338019
Sierra Leone
E382724
TAN: 2016-002-0035
South Korea
E338023
594
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Ukraine
E269682
Unites Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E426554
595
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada
FCC ID: MRXFP4
IC: 2546A-FP4
E427204
596
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGING MODULE
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
WCFDM00N2AALG/BH EVSWireless Charger (WCM)
South Korea
E339675
R-R-abh-WCFDM00N2A1
Taiwan
E373549
CCAB21LP050CT7
597
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E421397
United States and Canada
FCC ID: 2A6WXWCFDM00N2A
IC: 28559-WCFDM00N2A
598
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E357468
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGING MODULE
Type DesignationSupplierDevice
WCFDM00N2A1LG/BH EVSWireless Charger (WCM)
WCFDM00N2A3
WCFDM00N2A5
599
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Argentina
E368925
E368926
E368927
Brazil
E367123
Democratic Republic of Congo
Agréé par l'ARPTC
N° d'homologation: HER-062/Avril/2023
Date d'homologation: 28/4/2023
European Union
E310043
600
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Ghana
E364756
Indonesia
E375961
E375962
E375963
Israel
E370175
E387620
601
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E387621
Jamaica
E364757
Malaysia
E269697
HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E364761
602
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E364762
E364763
Moldova
E337971
Morocco
E364758
E364759
E364760
603
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Paraguay
E339812
NR: 2021-04-I-0202
NR: 2021-04-I-0203
NR: 2021-04-I-0204
Russia
E253816
Serbia
E364764
Sierra Leone
E371606
Singapore
E339940
South Africa
E364768
604
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
South Korea
E339675
R-R-LGE-WCFDM00N2A1
Taiwan
E373549
CCAB21LP050AT3
E373549
CCAB21LP0500T1
E373549
CCAB21LP050BT5
E390486
605
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Ukraine
E269682
United Kingdom
E362840
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E417828
606
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
E417830
E417829
607
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
United States and Canada
FCC ID: BEJWCFDM00N2A IC: 2703H-WCFDM00N2A
E357468
608
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Vietnam
E278262
Zambia
E364773
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or
exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development
we validate that these parts deliver the
intended level of protection as a whole
system. A great way to know for sure you
are getting this level of protection is to use
genuine Ford replacement collision parts.
609
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty.
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts.
For additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
FEDERAL HIGHWAY
ADMINISTRATION REGULATION
Regulations such as those issued by the
Federal Highway Administration or issued
pursuant to the Occupational Safety and
Health Act (OSHA), and state and local laws
and regulations may require additional
equipment for the way you intend to use your
vehicle. It is the responsibility of the
registered owner to determine the
applicability of such laws and regulations to
your intended use for the vehicle, and to
arrange for the installation of required
equipment. The dealer has information
about the availability of equipment which can
be ordered for your vehicle.
610
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
EMISSION LAW - UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal floor.
Failure to follow these instructions may
result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. Similar
federal or provincial laws may apply in
Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle
modification without first determining
applicable laws.
E67028
Tampering with emissions control
systems including related sensors
or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system
can result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by any
person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive exhaust
smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
611
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic
conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter
that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct
the concern, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
preceding statements concerning prohibited
tampering acts and maintenance, and the
noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide,
are applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
The following warranties may apply to your
vehicle:
• New vehicle limited warranties.
• Emissions warranties, if applicable. (Note:
Fully-electric vehicles are not eligible for
emissions warranties.)
• Other warranties, if applicable.
Detailed warranty information specific to your
vehicle can be found in the Warranty Guide
at www.owner.lincoln.com.
The following California Warranty Statement,
required by California regulations, applies to
vehicles certified to California emissions
standards and registered in a state that
requires California emissions warranty. If
applicable, additional California Emissions
Warranties can be found in the Warranty
Guide at www.owner.lincoln.com.
612
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL
WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND
OBLIGATIONS
The California Air Resources Board and Ford
Motor Company are pleased to explain the
emission control system warranty on your
(year) vehicle. In California, new motor
vehicles must be designated, built and
equipped to meet the State's stringent
anti-smog standards. Ford Motor Company
must warrant the emission control system on
your vehicle for the periods of time listed
below provided there has been no abuse,
neglect or improper maintenance of your
vehicle.
Your emission control system may include
parts such as the carburetor or fuel-injection
system, the ignition system, catalytic
converter and engine computer. Also
included may be hoses, belts, connectors
and other emission-related assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, Ford
Motor Company will repair your vehicle at
no cost to you including diagnosis, parts and
labor.
MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
COVERAGE:
(For 1990 and subsequent model passenger
cars, light-duty trucks, and medium-duty
vehicles.)
- For 3 years or 50,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If your vehicle fails a Smog Check
inspection, all necessary repairs and
adjustments will be made by Ford Motor
Company to ensure that your emission
control system PERFORMANCE WARRANTY.
2) If any emission-related part on your vehicle
is defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your short-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
- For 7 years or 70,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If an emission-related part listed in this
warranty booklet specially noted with
coverage for 7 years or 70,000 miles is
defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your long-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
OWNER'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES:
- As the vehicle owner, you are responsible
for the performance of the required
maintenance listed in your owner's manual.
Ford Motor Company recommends that you
retain all receipts covering maintenance on
your vehicle, but Ford Motor Company
cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of
receipts or for your failure to ensure the
performance of all scheduled maintenance.
- You are responsible for presenting your
vehicle to a Ford or Lincoln dealer as soon
as a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable amount
of time, not to exceed 30 days.
613
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
- As the vehicle owner, you should also be
aware that Ford Motor Company may deny
you warranty coverage if your vehicle or a
part has failed due to abuse, neglect,
improper maintenance or unapproved
modifications.
If you have any questions regarding your
warranty rights and responsibilities, you
should contact Lincoln Concierge at
1-800-521-4140 or the California Air Resource
Board at 4001 Iowa Avenue, Riverside, CA
92507.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Your vehicle comes with a New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. The express warranties of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty are in
substitution for and exclude all other
liabilities of any kind whether arising under
statute, in tort, by implication of law or
otherwise including, to the full extent as may
be allowed by law, liability for any other
representations respecting the vehicle,
statutory warranties or implied warranties or
conditions as to its merchantability or fitness.
Download a free electronic copy or order
one free printed copy of the most up-to-date
Warranty Guide by visiting the Owner
Manuals section of owner.lincoln.com (United
States).
For Canada, visit
lincolncanada.com/warranty.
For Limo/Livery/Hearse vehicles: View and
download your Warranty Guide by visiting
the Warranty Information section of the Fleet
website, fleet.ford.com/limo (United States
only).
614
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Customer Information
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the front or rear
seatbacks, or in areas that may come into
contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle, such as, cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters,
must keep to the parameters in the following
illustrations and table. We do not provide
any other special provisions or conditions
for installations or use.
615
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Appendices
Car
E239120
616
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Appendices
Van
E239122
617
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Appendices
Truck
E239121
Antenna PositionsMaximum Output Power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
618
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum Output Power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
619
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Appendices
620
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
1
12V Battery.....................................................436
12V Battery Precautions...................................436
Battery Management System
Limitations........................................................437
Changing the 12V Battery................................438
How Does the Battery Management System
Work...................................................................437
Recycling and Disposing of the 12V
Battery..............................................................439
Resetting the Battery Sensor..........................439
What Is the Battery Management
System..............................................................437
12V Battery – Troubleshooting.................439
12V Battery – Information Messages............440
12V Battery – Warning Lamps.........................439
3
360 Degree Camera...................................259
360 Degree Camera Settings..........................261
360 Degree Camera Guide Lines...........260
360 Degree Camera Limitations.............260
360 Degree Camera Precautions............259
360 Degree Camera Settings....................261
Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and
Off.......................................................................261
Switching the 360 Degree Camera
View..................................................................262
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................219
9
911 Assist...........................................................69
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................138
About This Publication...................................19
ABS
See: Brakes..........................................................228
Accessing the Passive Key Backup
Position.........................................................195
Accessing the Trip Computer....................136
Accessories...................................................525
Adaptive Cruise Control.............................264
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting..............................................281
Lane Centering....................................................273
Lane Centering – Troubleshooting................276
Predictive Speed Assist....................................278
Predictive Speed Assist –
Troubleshooting..............................................281
Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic
Cancellation................................................268
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators..........273
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations.......265
Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions.................................................264
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting..........................................281
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages..........................................................281
Adaptive Front Lighting................................121
How Does Adaptive Front Lighting Work......121
Adjustable Pedals.........................................107
Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors....................129
Adjusting the Headlamps............................441
Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting
Brightness.....................................................123
Adjusting the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller Mode.........................................364
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Divider..........................................................346
Adjusting the Luggage Compartment Load
Floor..............................................................345
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................107
Adjusting the Seatbelt Height.....................54
621
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Adjusting the Seatbelts During
Pregnancy......................................................53
Adjusting the Sound Settings...................495
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................105
Adjusting the Volume..................................495
Aid Mode.........................................................301
How Does Aid Mode Work...............................301
What Is Aid Mode................................................301
Airbag Precautions..........................................61
Airbags..............................................................59
Front Passenger Sensing System....................63
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................138
Air Conditioning System Refrigerant........143
Alert and Aid Mode.....................................302
How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work............302
What Is Alert and Aid Mode............................302
Alert Mode......................................................301
How Does Alert Mode Work............................301
What Is Alert Mode.............................................301
Alexa Built-In.................................................508
AM/FM Radio.................................................496
AM/FM Radio Limitations.................................496
Selecting an AM/FM Radio Station................496
Ambient Lighting...........................................124
Adjusting Ambient Lighting..............................124
Switching Ambient Lighting On and Off........124
Anti-Lock Braking System..........................228
Anti-Lock Braking System Limitations..........228
Anti-Theft Alarm System...............................98
Arming the Anti-Theft Alarm System...............98
Disarming the Anti-Theft Alarm System..........98
How Does the Anti-Theft Alarm System
Work.....................................................................98
What Is the Anti-Theft Alarm System...............98
What Is the Perimeter Alarm..............................98
Appendices.....................................................615
Applying the Electric Parking Brake........232
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency..................................................232
Approach Detection
See: Switching Welcome Lighting On and
Off........................................................................117
Apps................................................................506
Audio System................................................494
AM/FM Radio.......................................................496
Audio System – Troubleshooting..................500
Digital Radio........................................................496
Satellite Radio.....................................................498
Audio System Precautions.........................494
Audio System – Troubleshooting............500
Audio System – Information Messages.......500
Auto Air Refresh.............................................147
Auto Air Refresh Hints........................................148
Auto Air Refresh Indicators...............................147
Automatically Refreshing the Interior Air......148
Checking the Interior Air Quality.....................147
How Does Auto Air Refresh Work...................147
Manually Refreshing the Interior Air...............148
What Is Auto Air Refresh....................................147
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror....................130
What Is the Auto-Dimming Exterior
Mirror..................................................................130
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror.....................128
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Limitations........................................................128
What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior
Mirror..................................................................128
Auto Hold.......................................................240
Auto Hold Indicators.....................................241
Autolamps........................................................115
Autolamp Settings................................................116
What Are Autolamps...........................................115
Autolock.............................................................81
Autolock Requirements........................................81
Switching Autolock On and Off..........................81
What Is Autolock....................................................81
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake.............................................233
Automatic Crash Shutoff............................403
Automatic Crash Shutoff Precautions...........403
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle.................................403
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff...................403
622
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Automatic Emergency Braking.................330
Switching Automatic Emergency Braking On
and Off..............................................................330
What Is Automatic Emergency Braking........330
Automatic Engine Stop................................194
How Does Automatic Engine Stop
Work...................................................................195
Overriding Automatic Engine Stop.................195
Switching Automatic Engine Stop On and
Off.......................................................................195
What Is Automatic Engine Stop.......................194
Automatic High Beam Control....................118
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators..........................................................120
Automatic High Beam Control
Limitations........................................................120
Automatic High Beam Control
Precautions........................................................119
Automatic High Beam Control
Requirements....................................................119
How Does Automatic High Beam Control
Work....................................................................118
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control...............................................................120
Switching Automatic High Beam Control On
and Off...............................................................120
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting...........................................121
Automatic High Beam Control – Information
Messages...........................................................121
Automatic Locking Mode.............................52
Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode...........53
Engaging Automatic Locking Mode.................53
What Is Automatic Locking Mode....................52
When to Use Automatic Locking Mode..........52
Automatic Return to Park (P)......................215
Automatic Transmission Audible
Warnings.......................................................217
Automatic Transmission..............................212
Automatic Transmission Positions..................212
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity and
Specification.................................................217
Automatic Transmission Positions............212
Automatic Transmission Position
Indicators..........................................................213
Automatic Transmission Precautions.............212
Drive (D).................................................................213
Manual (M).............................................................213
Neutral (N).............................................................213
Park (P)...................................................................212
Reverse (R)............................................................213
Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear........................212
Auto Mode.......................................................141
Auto Mode Indicators..........................................141
Switching Auto Mode On and Off....................141
Auto-Start-Stop.............................................200
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting.................201
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators.........................200
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions.....................200
Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting..........201
Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................202
Auto-Start-Stop – Information
Messages..........................................................201
Auto Tow/Haul...............................................357
How Does Auto Tow/Haul Work.....................357
Autounlock........................................................81
Autounlock Requirements...................................81
Switching Autounlock On and Off.....................81
What Is Autounlock...............................................81
Autowipers......................................................108
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Rain
Sensor...............................................................109
Autowipers Settings...........................................108
What Are Autowipers.........................................108
B
Blind Spot Assist...........................................303
Blind Spot Assist Limitations...........................304
How Does Blind Spot Assist Work.................303
What Is Blind Spot Assist..................................303
623
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Blind Spot Assist with Trailer
Coverage.....................................................304
Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Coverage
Indicators.........................................................306
Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Coverage
Limitations.......................................................305
How Does Blind Spot Assist with Trailer
Coverage Work..............................................304
What Is Blind Spot Assist with Trailer
Coverage.........................................................304
Blind Spot Information System..................310
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting..............................................314
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage..........................................................312
Blind Spot Information System
Indicators......................................................313
Blind Spot Information System
Limitations....................................................310
Blind Spot Information System
Precautions..................................................310
Blind Spot Information System
Requirements...............................................311
Blind Spot Information System –
Troubleshooting..........................................314
Blind Spot Information System – Information
Messages..........................................................314
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage......................................................312
Blind Spot Information System With Trailer
Coverage Limitations.....................................312
Selecting a Trailer................................................313
Setting a Trailer Length......................................312
What Is Blind Spot Information System with
Trailer Coverage..............................................312
BlueCruise Alerts..........................................287
BlueCruise Automatic Cancellation.........287
BlueCruise Indicators..................................288
BlueCruise Limitations................................286
BlueCruise Precautions..............................284
BlueCruise Requirements..........................285
BlueCruise Settings.....................................286
BlueCruise – Troubleshooting..................292
BlueCruise – Information Messages.............292
Bluetooth®.......................................................518
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............423
Booster Seats..................................................46
Brake Fluid Specification...........................229
Brake Over Accelerator..............................228
Brake Precautions........................................228
Brakes.............................................................228
Anti-Lock Braking System................................228
Brakes – Troubleshooting................................230
Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................230
Brakes – Frequently Asked Questions..........231
Brakes – Warning Lamps.................................230
Breaking-In.....................................................394
C
Calculating Payload......................................341
Calculating the Load Limit...........................341
Canceling the Set Speed...........................270
Catalytic Converter.......................................210
Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting..........211
Catalytic Converter Precautions...............210
Catalytic Converter –
Troubleshooting...........................................211
Catalytic Converter – Warning Lamps............211
Center Console.............................................190
Opening the Center Console...........................190
Center Display..............................................505
Center Display Overview...........................505
Changing a Flat Tire....................................479
Changing a Road Wheel.............................479
Changing the Fuel Filter.............................436
Changing the Radio Station......................504
Changing the Remote Control Battery......73
Charging a Device........................................184
Charging a Wireless Device.......................189
Checking the Brake Fluid..........................228
624
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Checking the Seatbelts.................................56
Checking the Tire Pressures.....................466
Checking the Wiper Blades........................109
Children and Airbags.....................................63
Child Restraint Anchor Points......................38
Locating the Child Restraint Lower Anchor
Points...................................................................38
Locating the Child Restraint Top Tether
Anchor Points....................................................39
What Are the Child Restraint Anchor
Points...................................................................38
Child Restraints...............................................39
Child Restraint Position Information.................39
Child Restraints Recommendation....................41
Child Safety......................................................37
Child Restraint Anchor Points............................38
Child Restraints.....................................................39
Installing Child Restraints...................................42
Child Safety Locks..........................................49
Child Safety Precautions...............................37
Cleaning Products........................................446
Cleaning the Exterior...................................447
Cleaning Camera Lenses and Sensors........448
Cleaning Headlamps and Rear Lamps..........447
Cleaning Stripes or Graphics..........................448
Cleaning the Engine Compartment...............448
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions.................447
Cleaning the Underbody..................................449
Cleaning Wheels................................................448
Cleaning Windows and Wiper Blades...........447
Cleaning the Interior....................................449
Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats..................450
Cleaning Displays and Screens......................449
Cleaning Fabric...................................................449
Cleaning Glass Roof Tracks..............................451
Cleaning Leather................................................450
Cleaning Plastic..................................................449
Cleaning Seatbelts..............................................451
Cleaning the Instrument Panel.......................449
Cleaning Vinyl.....................................................450
Climate Control..............................................138
Auto Mode..............................................................141
Climate Control Hints...................................142
Connected Navigation.................................521
Connected Vehicle......................................488
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting.........489
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................488
Connected Vehicle Data...............................30
Connected Vehicle Limitations.................488
Connected Vehicle Requirements...........488
Connected Vehicle Settings......................489
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting.........................................489
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................489
Connecting a Bluetooth® Device..............518
Connecting a Trailer....................................350
Connecting a Trailer –
Troubleshooting.............................................352
Hitches..................................................................348
Connecting a Trailer Precautions.............348
Connecting a Trailer –
Troubleshooting.........................................352
Connecting a Trailer – Information
Messages.........................................................352
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network........................................................488
Connecting Lincoln Way to the Modem.......488
Enabling and Disabling the Modem..............488
What Is the Modem............................................488
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network........................................................488
Connecting Your Phone...............................511
Contacting Us...................................................17
Controls..........................................................506
Coolant.............................................................431
Adding Coolant....................................................431
Changing the Coolant.......................................433
Checking the Coolant Level.............................431
Coolant – Information Messages...................435
Coolant – Warning Lamps................................435
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification....................................................434
625
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Managing the Coolant Temperature.............433
Crash and Breakdown Information..........398
Automatic Crash Shutoff..................................403
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................406
Jump Starting the Vehicle................................400
Post-Crash Alert System...................................402
Recovery Towing................................................404
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........67
Creating a Personal Profile.........................519
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................320
Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting...........324
Cross Traffic Alert Indicators.....................323
Cross Traffic Alert Limitations...................322
Cross Traffic Alert Precautions.................320
Cross Traffic Alert –
Troubleshooting.........................................324
Cross Traffic Alert – Information
Messages.........................................................324
Customer Information.................................539
Radio Frequency Certification Labels...........542
Customizing the Instrument Panel
Display..........................................................507
D
Data Privacy.....................................................27
Department of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades...........................................454
Digital Radio..................................................496
Digital Radio Indicators.....................................497
Digital Radio Limitations...................................497
How Does Digital Radio Work.........................496
Switching Digital Radio Reception On and
Off......................................................................497
What Is Digital Radio.........................................496
Digital Scent...................................................149
Dinghy Tow
See: Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle......408
Directing the Flow of Air.............................140
Disposing of Airbags.....................................68
Doors and Locks Audible Warnings..........82
Doors and Locks.............................................80
Autolock...................................................................81
Autounlock..............................................................81
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting...............82
Mislock......................................................................81
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle................................................................80
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle................................................................80
Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.........82
Doors and Locks – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................83
Doors and Locks – Information
Messages...........................................................82
Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps.................82
Drive Belt Routing Overview.....................436
Drive Mode Control.....................................294
Drive Mode Control – Troubleshooting.......296
Drive Modes........................................................294
Drive Mode Control –
Troubleshooting.........................................296
Drive Mode Control – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................298
Drive Mode Control – Information
Messages.........................................................297
Drive Mode Control – Warning Lamps.........296
Drive Modes..................................................294
Conserve..............................................................294
Deep Conditions................................................295
Excite.....................................................................295
Normal...................................................................295
Normal 4A............................................................295
Slippery.................................................................296
Slow Climb...........................................................296
Driver Alert.....................................................337
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting.......................338
Driver Alert Limitations...............................338
Driver Alert Precautions..............................337
Driver Alert – Troubleshooting.................338
Driver Alert – Information Messages............338
Driving Economically...................................394
Driving Hints..................................................394
Driving in Cold Weather.............................394
626
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Driving In Sand.............................................396
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain...........395
Driving Through Mud and Water..............395
Driving Through Shallow Water...............396
Drowsiness Monitor
See: Driver Alert..................................................337
E
Easy Entry and Exit.........................................89
Electric Parking Brake Audible
Warning........................................................233
Electric Parking Brake.................................232
Electric Parking Brake –
Troubleshooting.............................................233
Electric Parking Brake –
Troubleshooting.........................................233
Electric Parking Brake – Information
Messages.........................................................234
Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Lamps................................................................233
Electric Power Steering..............................248
Electric Power Steering Precautions.............248
How Does Electric Power Steering
Work..................................................................248
Electromagnetic Compatibility...................615
Emergency Call Limitations..........................70
Emergency Call Requirements...................69
Emergency Call System Data.......................31
Emergency Towing.......................................410
Emission Law - United States of
America..........................................................611
Enabling or Disabling Personal
Profiles..........................................................519
Engine Air Filter............................................430
Changing the Engine Air Filter........................430
Engine Block Heater....................................192
Engine Block Heater Precautions...................192
How Does the Engine Block Heater
Work...................................................................193
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................193
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.......135
Engine Oil.......................................................426
Adding Engine Oil..............................................426
Checking the Engine Oil Level.......................426
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification..........427
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview.........................426
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor................................427
Resetting the Intelligent Oil Life
Monitor..............................................................427
Engine Specifications..................................444
Environment.....................................................32
Evasive Steering Assist...............................330
Evasive Steering Assist Limitations...............330
Switching Evasive Steering Assist On and
Off......................................................................330
What Is Evasive Steering Assist......................330
Event Data........................................................29
Exit Warning....................................................316
Exit Warning – Troubleshooting......................318
Exit Warning Indicators................................317
Exit Warning Limitations...............................317
Exit Warning Precautions............................316
Exit Warning – Troubleshooting................318
Exit Warning – Information Messages...........318
Expanse Display
See: Customizing the Instrument Panel
Display..............................................................507
Export Unique Options................................612
Exterior Bulbs................................................443
Exterior Bulb Specification Chart...................443
Exterior Lamps................................................116
Exterior Lamps On Audible Warning...............118
Switching the Daytime Running Lamps On
and Off................................................................116
Switching the Rear Floodlamps On and
Off........................................................................117
Switching Welcome Lighting On and Off.......117
Using the Turn Signal Lamps............................116
Exterior Lighting Control..............................114
Exterior Lighting..............................................114
Adaptive Front Lighting......................................121
Autolamps..............................................................115
Automatic High Beam Control..........................118
627
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Automatic High Beam Control –
Troubleshooting...............................................121
Exterior Lamps......................................................116
Headlamps.............................................................114
Headlamps – Troubleshooting.........................115
Exterior Mirrors..............................................129
Auto-Dimming Exterior Mirror..........................130
Exterior Overview...........................................35
F
Fail-Safe Cooling..........................................406
Driving When Fail-Safe Mode Is
Activated..........................................................406
Fail-Safe Cooling Indicators.............................407
How Does Fail-Safe Cooling Work................406
What Is Fail-Safe Cooling.................................406
Fastening and Unfastening the
Seatbelts.........................................................51
Federal Highway Administration
Regulation....................................................610
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Flat Tire.................................479
Flat Tow
See: Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle......408
Floor Mats.......................................................397
Folding the Exterior Mirrors........................129
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................107
Forward Collision Warning........................329
Adjusting the Sensitivity of Forward Collision
Warning............................................................329
What is Forward Collision Warning................329
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................219
Four-Wheel Drive Modes..................................221
Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting............224
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators.....................222
Four-Wheel Drive Limitations...................220
Four-Wheel Drive Modes............................221
Four-Wheel Drive Auto.....................................222
Four-Wheel Drive High.....................................222
Four-Wheel Drive Low......................................222
Two-Wheel Drive High.......................................221
Four-Wheel Drive Precautions...................219
Four-Wheel Drive –
Troubleshooting.........................................224
Four-Wheel Drive – Information
Messages.........................................................224
Four-Wheel Drive – Warning Lamps.............224
Four Wheels Down Tow
See: Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle......408
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification...............................................226
Front Axle.......................................................226
Front Parking Aid..........................................253
Front Parking Aid Audible Warnings.............253
Front Parking Aid Limitations..........................253
Locating the Front Parking Aid Sensors.......253
What is the Front Parking Aid.........................253
Front Passenger Sensing System..............63
Front Passenger Sensing System
Indicators............................................................66
Front Passenger Sensing System
Precautions........................................................65
How Does the Front Passenger Sensing
System Work......................................................63
What Is the Front Passenger Sensing
System.................................................................63
Front Seat Precautions................................153
Front Seats......................................................153
Heated Seats........................................................158
Massage Seats.....................................................158
Power Seats..........................................................154
Ventilated Seats...................................................159
Fuel and Refueling.......................................203
Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting.........209
Fuel Quality..........................................................204
Refueling..............................................................206
Running Out of Fuel..........................................205
Fuel and Refueling Precautions...............203
628
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Fuel and Refueling –
Troubleshooting........................................209
Fuel and Refueling – Information
Messages........................................................209
Fuel and Refueling – Warning Lamps...........209
Fuel Gauge.....................................................135
Fuel Gauge Limitations......................................135
Locating the Fuel Filler Door............................135
What Is Distance to Empty................................135
What Is the Fuel Gauge.....................................135
What Is the Low Fuel Reminder.......................135
Fuel Quality....................................................204
Selecting the Correct Fuel...............................204
Fuel Tank Capacity......................................208
Fuse Precautions............................................411
Fuses.................................................................411
Fuses – Troubleshooting.................................422
Interior Fuse Box..................................................417
Under Hood Fuse Box........................................411
Fuses – Troubleshooting...........................422
Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions..........422
G
Garage Door Opener...................................178
Garage Door Opener Introduction...........178
Garage Door Opener Precautions and
Frequencies.................................................178
General Maintenance Information...........534
Glass Roof Bounce-Back.............................132
Overriding Glass Roof Bounce-Back..............133
What Is Glass Roof Bounce-Back....................132
Glass Roof........................................................131
Glass Roof Bounce-Back...................................132
Global Opening and Closing......................126
Switching Global Closing On and Off............126
Switching Global Opening On and Off..........126
Using Global Closing..........................................126
Using Global Opening.......................................126
What Is Global Opening and Closing.............126
Glossary of Tire Terminology....................460
Glove Compartment.....................................190
Opening the Glove Compartment..................190
Google Assistant..........................................509
H
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps........................441
Headlamps.......................................................114
Adjusting the Level of the Headlamps...........114
Headlamp Indicators...........................................115
Switching Headlamp Exit Delay On and
Off........................................................................114
Using the High Beam Headlamps....................114
Headlamps – Troubleshooting...................115
Headlamps – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................115
Heated Seats..................................................158
Heated Seat Precautions..................................158
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off.......159
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................138
Hill Descent Control....................................246
Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting.......247
Hill Descent Control Indicator...................247
Hill Descent Control Precautions.............246
Hill Descent Control –
Troubleshooting.........................................247
Hill Descent Control – Information
Messages.........................................................247
Hill Start Assist..............................................239
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.................239
Hill Start Assist Precautions.......................239
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting..........239
Hill Start Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................239
Hitches............................................................348
Hooking Up a Trailer Using a
Weight-Distributing Hitch.............................349
Installing a Hitch.................................................348
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............423
629
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Horn..................................................................106
How Does 911 Assist Work...........................69
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go Work.....................................264
How Does Auto Hold Work.......................240
How Does Blind Spot Information System
Work...............................................................310
How Does BlueCruise Work......................283
How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work.........320
How Does Drive Mode Control
Work..............................................................294
How Does Driver Alert Work.....................337
How Does Easy Entry and Exit Work.........89
How Does Exit Warning Work....................316
How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work..........219
How Does Hill Descent Control
Work..............................................................246
How Does Hill Start Assist Work..............239
How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work......325
How Does Reverse Brake Assist
Work..............................................................235
How Does Speed Sign Recognition
Work..............................................................333
How Does Stability Control Work.............243
How Does the 360 Degree Camera
Work..............................................................259
How Does the Lane Keeping System
Work..............................................................299
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work................................................................58
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert System
Work...............................................................175
How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work........60
How Does Traction Control Work............242
How Does Trailer Backup Assistance
Work..............................................................372
How Does Trailer Hitching Assistance
Work..............................................................368
How Does Trailer Reverse Guidance
Work..............................................................385
How Does Trailer Sway Control
Work..............................................................367
How Do Personal Profiles Work................519
How Do the Front Airbags Work................59
How Do the Side Airbags Work..................59
I
Icon Glossary
See: Symbols Glossary.........................................21
Icons
See: Symbols Glossary.........................................21
Identifying Fuse Types................................422
Identifying the Climate Control Unit.........138
Identifying the Rear Passenger Audio
Controls........................................................504
Identifying the Rear Passenger Climate
Control Unit..................................................145
Inflating the Tires..........................................466
Information on the Tire Sidewall..............455
In-Lane Repositioning..................................291
How Does In-Lane Repositioning Work........291
In-Lane Repositioning Indicators.....................291
Switching In-Lane Repositioning On and
Off.......................................................................291
Inspecting the Tire for Damage................467
Inspecting the Tire for Wear......................467
Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems...........471
Installing and Removing the Luggage
Compartment Cargo Net.........................344
Installing Child Restraints.............................42
Combining the Seatbelt and Lower Anchors
for Attaching Child Restraints.......................45
Installing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat......................................................................45
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children...............................................................44
Using Seatbelts.....................................................42
Using Tether Straps..............................................45
Instrument Cluster.........................................134
Fuel Gauge............................................................135
Instrument Cluster Overview......................134
630
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller..........362
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting.............................................365
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
Precautions.................................................362
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Troubleshooting.........................................365
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Frequently Asked Questions......................366
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller –
Information Messages..................................365
Interior Air Quality.........................................147
Auto Air Refresh...................................................147
Interior Air Quality – Troubleshooting...........150
Interior Air Quality –
Troubleshooting..........................................150
Interior Air Quality – Information
Messages.........................................................150
Interior Bulbs.................................................443
Interior Bulb Specification Chart.....................443
Interior Fuse Box............................................417
Accessing the Interior Fuse Box......................417
Identifying the Fuses in the Interior Fuse
Box......................................................................418
Locating the Interior Fuse Box.........................417
Interior Lamp Function.................................123
Switching the Interior Lamp Function On and
Off.......................................................................123
What Is the Interior Lamp Function.................123
Interior Lighting..............................................123
Ambient Lighting.................................................124
Interior Lamp Function.......................................123
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting................124
Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting..........124
Interior Lighting – Frequently Asked
Questions..........................................................124
Interior Mirror.................................................128
Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror...........................128
Interior Mirror Precautions..........................128
Interior Overview............................................33
Introduction.......................................................19
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................400
Jump Starting Precautions...............................400
Jump Starting the Vehicle.................................401
Preparing the Vehicle.........................................401
K
Keyless Entry....................................................84
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting......................85
Keyless Entry Keypad....................................86
Keyless Entry Keypad –
Troubleshooting................................................88
Keyless Entry Keypad Limitations..............86
Keyless Entry Keypad Master Access
Code................................................................86
Keyless Entry Keypad Personal Access
Codes..............................................................87
Keyless Entry Keypad –
Troubleshooting...........................................88
Keyless Entry Keypad – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................88
Keyless Entry Limitations..............................84
Keyless Entry Settings...................................84
Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting................85
Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................85
Keys and Remote Controls Audible
Warnings.........................................................75
Keys and Remote Controls............................71
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting................................................75
Keys and Remote Controls –
Troubleshooting...........................................75
Keys and Remote Controls – Information
Messages...........................................................75
L
Lane Centering.............................................273
How Does Lane Centering Work....................273
631
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Lane Centering Alerts.......................................275
Lane Centering Automatic Cancellation......275
Lane Centering Indicators................................276
Lane Centering Limitations..............................274
Lane Centering Manual Cancellation............276
Lane Centering Precautions............................273
Lane Centering Requirements........................274
Switching Lane Centering On and Off..........275
Lane Centering – Troubleshooting..........276
Lane Centering – Information
Messages.........................................................276
Lane Change Assist.....................................289
How Does Lane Change Assist Work...........289
Lane Change Assist Cancellation..................290
Lane Change Assist Limitations.....................289
Switching Lane Change Assist On and
Off......................................................................289
Lane Change Assist –
Troubleshooting........................................290
Lane Change Assist – Information
Messages........................................................290
Lane Keeping System Indicators.............302
Lane Keeping System.................................299
Aid Mode...............................................................301
Alert and Aid Mode............................................302
Alert Mode............................................................301
Blind Spot Assist.................................................303
Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Coverage.......304
Lane Keeping System –
Troubleshooting.............................................308
Lane Keeping System Limitations...........300
Lane Keeping System Precautions.........299
Lane Keeping System Settings..................301
Lane Keeping System –
Troubleshooting.........................................308
Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................309
Lane Keeping System – Information
Messages.........................................................308
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft....................................................356
Liftgate Settings..............................................95
Lincoln BlueCruise.......................................283
BlueCruise – Troubleshooting........................292
In-Lane Repositioning........................................291
Lane Change Assist...........................................289
Lane Change Assist – Troubleshooting.......290
Lincoln Protect..............................................527
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Device.......................................................520
Linking or Unlinking a Personal Profile to
a Remote Control......................................520
Load Carrying................................................339
Roof Rack..............................................................342
Load Carrying Precautions........................339
Loading Your Trailer.....................................355
Locating the 360 Degree Cameras........260
Locating the Blind Spot Information System
Sensors..........................................................311
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir.........228
Locating the Cross Traffic Alert
Sensors........................................................322
Locating the Exit Warning Sensors...........318
Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel.................204
Locating the Keyless Entry Keypad...........86
Locating the Power Outlets........................185
Locating the Pre-Collision Assist
Sensors........................................................329
Locating the Rear View Camera..............256
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels...................................340
Locating the Tire label................................454
Locating the USB Ports................................183
Locating the Wireless Accessory
Charger.........................................................188
Locating Your Vehicle....................................72
Locking the Rear Passenger Audio
Controls........................................................495
Locking the Rear Passenger Climate
Controls..........................................................141
Locking the Rear Window Controls..........127
632
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Luggage Compartment Anchor
Points............................................................347
Luggage Compartment Anchor Point
Precautions......................................................347
Luggage Compartment...............................344
Luggage Compartment Anchor Points.........347
Luggage Compartment Precautions.......344
M
Maintenance..................................................423
12V Battery...........................................................436
12V Battery – Troubleshooting.......................439
Coolant...................................................................431
Engine Air Filter..................................................430
Engine Oil.............................................................426
Exterior Bulbs......................................................443
Interior Bulbs........................................................443
Maintenance Precautions..........................423
Making and Receiving a Phone Call........513
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake.............................................................232
Manually Shifting Gears...............................213
Manual Seats...................................................161
Accessing the Third Row Seats.......................165
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................162
Adjusting the Seat Backrest.............................163
Folding the Seat Backrest.................................164
Head Restraint Components.............................161
Installing the Head Restraint............................162
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................163
Removing the Head Restraint..........................162
Unfolding the Seats............................................164
Massage Seats...............................................158
Adjusting the Massage Seat Settings............158
Massage Seat Limitations.................................158
Media Control Buttons................................494
Mislock................................................................81
Mislock Limitations................................................81
Switching Mislock On and Off............................81
What Is Mislock.......................................................81
Mobile Communications Equipment........610
Mobile Device Data........................................30
Moonroof
See: Glass Roof.....................................................131
Motorcraft Parts............................................445
N
Navigation.......................................................521
Neutral Towing
See: Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle......408
Neutral Tow
See: Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle......408
O
Opening and Closing the Glass Roof........131
Opening and Closing the Hood...............423
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..............92
Opening and Closing the Splitgate...........90
Opening and Closing the Sunshade.........131
Opening and Closing the Tailgate.............95
Opening and Closing the Windows.........125
Opening the Open on Approach
Splitgate.........................................................92
Open on Approach Settings........................92
Operating the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle............................................................80
Opening the Doors From Inside Your
Vehicle................................................................80
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Central Locking.................................................80
Operating the Doors From Outside Your
Vehicle............................................................80
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Key Blade...........................................................80
Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the
Remote Control................................................80
OTA
See: Software Update Settings......................522
See: Vehicle Software Updates......................522
633
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Overhead Storage........................................190
Opening the Overhead Storage
Compartment...................................................190
Overriding Reverse Brake Assist.............236
Overriding the Set Speed..........................272
Over the air
See: Software Update Settings......................522
Over-the-air
See: Software Update Settings......................522
See: Vehicle Software Updates......................522
See: Vehicle Software Updates......................522
P
Panorama Roof
See: Glass Roof.....................................................131
Panoramic Display
See: Customizing the Instrument Panel
Display..............................................................507
Panoramic Roof
See: Glass Roof.....................................................131
Parking Aid Indicators.................................254
Parking Aid Precautions..............................251
Parking Aids....................................................251
Front Parking Aid................................................253
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting.....................255
Rear Parking Aid.................................................252
Parking Aids – Troubleshooting...............255
Parking Aids – Information Messages..........255
Passive Anti-Theft System............................98
How Does the Passive Anti-Theft System
Work.....................................................................98
What Is the Passive Anti-Theft System...........98
Perchlorate....................................................609
Performing a System Reset.......................524
Personal Profiles............................................519
Personal Safety System Components.......58
Personal Safety System™..............................58
Phone as a Key Limitations..........................76
Phone as a Key................................................76
Phone as a Key – Troubleshooting..................78
Phone as a Key – Troubleshooting............78
Phone as a Key – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................78
Phone Menu....................................................511
Phone................................................................511
Phone Precautions.........................................511
Playing and Pausing the Audio
Source..........................................................504
Playing Media Using Bluetooth®...............518
Playing Media Using the USB Port...........183
Post-Collision Braking.................................403
Post-Crash Alert System............................402
How Does the Post-Crash Alert System
Work..................................................................402
Post-Crash Alert System Limitations.............402
Switching the Post-Crash Alert System
Off......................................................................403
What Is the Post-Crash Alert System............402
Power Outlet Indicators...............................186
Power Outlet Limitations.............................185
Power Outlet..................................................185
Power Outlet Precautions...........................185
Power Running Board Precautions...........101
Power Running Board Settings..................101
Power Running Boards.................................101
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting..............................................102
Power Running Boards –
Troubleshooting..........................................102
Power Running Boards – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................102
Power Seats....................................................154
Accessing the Third Row Seats........................171
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................154
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.........................158
Adjusting the Seat Backrest.............................156
Adjusting the Seat Cushion..............................156
Adjusting the Seat Height.................................157
Folding the Seat Backrest.................................169
Head Restraint Components............................154
Installing the Head Restraint............................156
634
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................156
Removing the Head Restraint..........................155
Unfolding the Seat Backrest..............................171
Power-Up
See: Software Update Settings......................522
See: Vehicle Software Updates......................522
Pre-Collision Assist Limitations.................327
Pre-Collision Assist Precautions...............325
Pre-Collision Assist......................................325
Automatic Emergency Braking.......................330
Evasive Steering Assist.....................................330
Forward Collision Warning...............................329
Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting..........331
Pre-Collision Assist –
Troubleshooting..........................................331
Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................332
Pre-Collision Assist – Information
Messages..........................................................331
Pre-Collision Assist – Warning Lamps...........331
Predictive Speed Assist..............................278
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance...............279
How Does Predictive Speed Assist
Work..................................................................278
Predictive Speed Assist Alerts........................279
Predictive Speed Assist Indicators................279
Predictive Speed Assist Limitations..............279
Predictive Speed Assist Precautions............278
Switching Predictive Speed Assist Mode On
and Off..............................................................279
Predictive Speed Assist –
Troubleshooting..........................................281
Predictive Speed Assist – Information
Messages..........................................................281
Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage.........452
Programming the Garage Door
Opener..........................................................179
Programming the Remote Control.............74
Programming Your Phone.............................76
Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front
Passenger Seats..........................................62
Protecting the Environment.........................32
Puncture
See: Changing a Flat Tire.................................479
Push Button Ignition Switch.........................191
R
Radio Frequency Certification
Labels...........................................................542
Blind Spot Information System Sensors.......542
Body Control Module........................................553
Cruise Control Module......................................557
Operating System..............................................564
Passive Key..........................................................567
Radio Transceiver Module...............................575
Telematics Control Unit....................................580
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Sensors.............................................................584
Wireless Accessory Charging Module..........597
Rear Auto Mode.............................................146
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off.........146
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification...............................................227
Rear Axle........................................................227
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Warnings........................................................177
Rear Occupant Alert System
Indicators......................................................176
Rear Occupant Alert System
Limitations....................................................175
Rear Occupant Alert System
Precautions..................................................175
Rear Occupant Alert System......................175
Rear Occupant Alert System
Settings.........................................................176
Rear Parking Aid...........................................252
Locating the Rear Parking Aid Sensors........252
Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings..............252
Rear Parking Aid Limitations...........................252
What is the Rear Parking Aid..........................252
Rear Passenger Audio Controls...............504
635
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Rear Passenger Climate Control
Indicators......................................................146
Rear Passenger Climate Control...............145
Rear Auto Mode...................................................146
Rear Seats........................................................161
Heated Seats........................................................173
Manual Seats.........................................................161
Massage Seats.....................................................172
Power Seats..........................................................166
Ventilated Seats...................................................174
Rear View Camera Guide Lines................257
Rear View Camera Precautions...............256
Rear View Camera.......................................256
Rear View Camera Settings.............................257
Rear View Camera Settings.......................257
Switching Rear View Camera Delay On and
Off......................................................................258
Switching the Rear View Camera View........258
Zooming the Rear View Camera In and
Out.....................................................................257
Rebooting the Displays...............................507
Recovery Towing..........................................404
Accessing the Front Towing Point.................404
Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle........408
Refueling........................................................206
Refueling System Overview............................206
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................206
Rejuvenate.......................................................151
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Charge..........................................................233
Remote Control Limitations...........................71
Remote Start...................................................137
Remote Start Settings...................................137
Removing the Key Blade...............................72
Removing Your Vehicle From
Storage.........................................................453
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................451
Replacement Parts
Recommendation......................................609
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................74
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter.....................147
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades.............110
Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades..............110
Reporting Safety Defects in Canada........541
Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States.............................................................541
Resetting the Stopping Position................105
Resetting the Trip Computer......................136
Resetting Tire Pressure Monitoring
System..........................................................475
Restarting the Engine.................................200
Resuming the Set Speed............................270
Reverse Brake Assist Indicators...............236
Reverse Brake Assist Precautions...........235
Reverse Brake Assist..................................235
Reverse Brake Assist –
Troubleshooting.............................................237
Reverse Brake Assist –
Troubleshooting.........................................237
Reverse Brake Assist – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................238
Reverse Brake Assist – Information
Messages.........................................................237
Reverse Wipe.................................................109
Reverse Wipe Settings......................................109
What Is Reverse Wipe........................................109
Roadside Assistance...................................398
Rollover Warning..........................................539
Roof Rack.......................................................342
Roof Rack Load Capacities..............................343
Roof Rack Precautions......................................342
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................394
Running Out of Fuel....................................205
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container.........................................................205
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................205
636
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
S
Satellite Radio...............................................498
Locating the Satellite Radio Identification
Number.............................................................498
Satellite Radio Limitations................................498
Satellite Radio Settings.....................................499
Selecting a Channel..........................................498
What Is Satellite Radio......................................498
Scheduled Maintenance............................530
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................56
Seatbelt Precautions.....................................50
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................54
How Does the Seatbelt Reminder Work.........54
Seatbelt Reminder Audible Warnings.............55
Seatbelt Reminder Indicators............................54
Switching the Seatbelt Reminder On and
Off.........................................................................55
Seatbelts...........................................................50
Automatic Locking Mode....................................52
Seatbelt Reminder................................................54
Sensitive Locking Mode......................................52
SecuriCode
See: Keyless Entry Keypad.................................86
Security.............................................................98
Anti-Theft Alarm System.....................................98
Passive Anti-Theft System..................................98
Security – Troubleshooting................................99
Security – Troubleshooting..........................99
Security – Frequently Asked Questions.......100
Security – Information Messages.....................99
Selecting a Drive Mode..............................294
Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode........221
Selecting the Audio Source.......................494
Sending and Receiving a Text
Message.......................................................515
Sensitive Locking Mode................................52
How Does Sensitive Locking Mode
Work.....................................................................52
What is Sensitive Locking Mode.......................52
Service Data.....................................................28
Setting a Memory Preset............................495
Settings Data...................................................29
Settings...........................................................507
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Gap................................................................269
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed...........................................................268
Setting the Blower Motor Speed...............139
Setting the Clock and Date.......................495
Setting the Hill Descent Speed................246
Setting the Temperature..............................139
Setting Up a Vehicle Hotspot...................492
Setting Up the Trailer Backup Assistance
for a Conventional Trailer........................373
Applying the Trailer Reversing Aid
Sticker...............................................................374
Calibrating the System......................................374
Configuring the Trailer.......................................373
Setting Up Trailer Reverse Guidance for a
Conventional Trailer..................................385
Applying the Trailer Reverse Aid
Sticker...............................................................386
Calibrating the System......................................387
Configuring the Trailer......................................385
Setting Your Default Assistant..................508
Shifting Your Immobile Vehicle Out of Park
(P)....................................................................216
Sitting in the Correct Position....................153
Software Update Indicators.......................523
Software Update Settings..........................522
Software Update
See: Software Update Settings......................522
See: Vehicle Software Updates......................522
Sounding the Panic Alarm............................72
Speedometer.................................................135
Speed Sign Recognition Indicators.........334
Speed Sign Recognition Limitations.......333
Speed Sign Recognition
Precautions.................................................333
Speed Sign Recognition Settings............334
637
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Speed Sign Recognition.............................333
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting.............................................335
Speed Sign Recognition –
Troubleshooting.........................................335
Speed Sign Recognition – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................336
Speed Sign Recognition – Information
Messages.........................................................335
Splitgate Settings...........................................92
Splitgate............................................................90
Splitgate – Troubleshooting..............................96
Splitgate – Troubleshooting........................96
Splitgate – Frequently Asked Questions........97
Splitgate – Information Messages...................96
Splitgate – Warning Lamps................................96
Stability Control Indicator...........................245
Stability Control.............................................243
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Precautions...................................................191
Starting and Stopping the Engine..............191
Automatic Engine Stop......................................194
Engine Block Heater..........................................192
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting..............................................196
Starting the Engine.............................................192
Stopping the Engine...........................................194
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Troubleshooting..........................................196
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Frequently
Asked Questions............................................198
Starting and Stopping the Engine –
Information Messages...................................197
Starting and Stopping the Engine – Warning
Lamps................................................................196
Starting the Engine.......................................192
Restarting the Engine After Stopping It.........192
Starting a Gasoline Engine...............................192
Status Bar.......................................................505
Steering..........................................................248
Electric Power Steering....................................248
Steering – Troubleshooting.............................249
Steering – Troubleshooting.......................249
Steering – Frequently Asked
Questions........................................................250
Steering – Information Messages..................249
Steering – Warning Lamps..............................249
Steering Wheel..............................................104
Stopping the Engine...................................200
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................194
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................194
Storage............................................................190
Center Console....................................................190
Glove Compartment...........................................190
Overhead Storage..............................................190
Storing Your Vehicle....................................452
Sunroof
See: Glass Roof.....................................................131
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and
Off..................................................................267
Switching Air Conditioning On and
Off...................................................................138
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On and
Off...................................................................123
Switching Android Auto™ On and Off......516
Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off.......516
Switching Auto Hold On and Off.............240
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and
Off..................................................................200
Switching Blind Spot Information System
On and Off.....................................................311
Switching BlueCruise On and Off............286
Switching Climate Control On and
Off...................................................................138
Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and
Off..................................................................322
Switching Defrost On and Off....................138
Switching Driver Alert On and Off...........338
Switching Easy Entry and Exit On and
Off....................................................................89
Switching Exit Warning On and Off..........318
638
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control........................................273
Switching Hill Descent Control On and
Off..................................................................246
Switching Maximum Cooling On and
Off...................................................................139
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off...................................................................138
Switching Parking Aid On and Off...........252
Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and
Off..................................................................328
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off...................................................................138
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off.......504
Switching Reverse Brake Assist On and
Off..................................................................236
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off.......504
Switching Stability Control On and
Off..................................................................244
Switching Text Message Notification On
and Off..........................................................516
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off..................................................................494
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and
Off...................................................................123
Switching the Hazard Flashers On and
Off..................................................................399
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and
Off...................................................................139
Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off...........................................................139
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On
and Off - Vehicles With: Heated Steering
Wheel............................................................106
Switching the Lane Keeping System
Mode..............................................................301
Switching the Lane Keeping System On
and Off.........................................................300
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and
Off...................................................................123
Switching the Rear Passenger Audio
Controls On and Off.................................504
Switching the Rear Passenger Climate
Controls On and Off...................................145
Switching the Rear Window Wiper On and
Off...................................................................109
Switching Traction Control On and
Off..................................................................242
Switching Trailer Backup Assistance On
and Off..........................................................375
Switching Trailer Hitching Assistance On
and Off..........................................................370
Switching Trailer Reverse Guidance On
and Off..........................................................388
Switching Trailer Sway Control On and
Off..................................................................367
Symbols Glossary............................................21
Symbols Used On Your Instrument
Cluster.............................................................23
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle....................21
System Update
See: Software Update Settings......................522
See: Vehicle Software Updates......................522
T
Tachometer.....................................................135
Temporary Neutral Mode............................214
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Program - United States of
America........................................................539
The Mediation and Arbitration Program -
Canada.........................................................540
Tire Care.........................................................466
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Limitations....................................................475
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Overview......................................................473
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Precautions..................................................474
639
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............473
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting.............................................476
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Troubleshooting.........................................476
Tire Pressure Monitoring System –
Information Messages..................................478
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Warning
Lamps................................................................476
Tire Replacement Requirements...............461
Tire Rotation....................................................471
Towing a Trailer Limitations.......................355
Towing a Trailer Precautions.....................354
Towing a Trailer.............................................354
Auto Tow/Haul.....................................................357
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting...............360
Towing Weights and Dimensions...................358
Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting.........360
Towing a Trailer – Information
Messages.........................................................360
Towing Weights and Dimensions.............358
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle................................359
Recommended Towing Weights.....................358
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight...............................................................359
Towing Your Vehicle Precautions............408
Towing Your Vehicle....................................408
Towing Your Vehicle –
Troubleshooting..............................................410
Towing Your Vehicle –
Troubleshooting..........................................410
Towing Your Vehicle – Information
Messages..........................................................410
Traction Control Indicator..........................242
Traction Control............................................242
Traction Control – Troubleshooting...............242
Traction Control – Troubleshooting........242
Traction Control – Warning Lamps................242
Trailer Backup Assistance
Precautions..................................................372
Trailer Backup Assistance..........................372
Setting Up the Trailer Backup Assistance for
a Conventional Trailer...................................373
Trailer Backup Assistance –
Troubleshooting.............................................379
Trailer Backup Assistance –
Troubleshooting.........................................379
Trailer Backup Assistance – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................382
Trailer Backup Assistance – Information
Messages.........................................................379
Trailer Brake Precautions...........................354
Trailer Hitching Assistance
Indicators......................................................371
Trailer Hitching Assistance
Limitations...................................................369
Trailer Hitching Assistance
Precautions.................................................368
Trailer Hitching Assistance........................368
Trailer Lighting Check..................................351
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Precautions.................................................385
Trailer Reverse Guidance...........................385
Setting Up Trailer Reverse Guidance for a
Conventional Trailer......................................385
Trailer Reverse Guidance –
Troubleshooting.............................................390
Trailer Reverse Guidance –
Troubleshooting.........................................390
Trailer Reverse Guidance – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................392
Trailer Reverse Guidance – Information
Messages.........................................................390
Trailer Sway Control Precautions.............367
Trailer Sway Control.....................................367
Trailer Towing Hints.....................................355
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and
Specification...............................................223
Transporting the Vehicle............................405
Trip Computer................................................136
640
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
U
Under Hood Fuse Box..................................411
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box.............411
Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood Fuse
Box......................................................................412
Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box................411
Under Hood Overview................................424
USB Ports........................................................183
Using Auto Hold...........................................240
Using Keyless Entry........................................84
Using Progressive Range Selection.........217
Using Rejuvenate...........................................151
Using Remote Start.......................................137
Using Snow Chains......................................463
Using the Backup Start Passcode..............77
Using the Controls on the Steering
Wheel.............................................................104
Using the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller.....................................................362
Using the Keyless Entry Keypad.................88
Using the Memory Function.......................519
Using the Remote Control.............................71
Using the Trailer Backup Assistance
Controller.....................................................376
Using the Trailer Backup Assistance
Views.............................................................377
Using the Valet Mode....................................76
Using This Publication...................................20
Using Trailer Hitching Assistance............370
Using Trailer Reverse Guidance
Views............................................................388
V
Vehicle Care..................................................446
Cleaning the Exterior.........................................447
Cleaning the Interior..........................................449
Vehicle Hotspot Settings............................492
Vehicle Hotspot – Troubleshooting.........493
Vehicle Hotspot – Frequently Asked
Questions.........................................................493
Vehicle Hotspot............................................492
Vehicle Hotspot – Troubleshooting...............493
Vehicle Identification Number...................487
Locating the Vehicle Identification
Number.............................................................487
Vehicle Identification Number
Overview..........................................................487
Vehicle Identification...................................487
Vehicle Identification Number.........................487
Vehicle Software Updates.........................522
Vehicle Specifications.................................444
Vehicle System Reset.................................524
Ventilated Seats............................................159
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................159
Ventilated Seat Precautions.............................159
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................138
Venting the Glass Roof................................132
Viewing the Tire Pressures........................475
Visual Search...................................................33
Voice Interaction..........................................508
W
Warranty Information....................................612
Washers.............................................................111
Adding Washer Fluid...........................................112
Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off.......111
Using the Rear Window Washer........................111
Using the Windshield Washer............................111
Washer Fluid Specification................................112
Washer Precautions..............................................111
Washers
See: Wipers and Washers.................................108
Waxing Your Vehicle.....................................451
What Is 911 Assist............................................69
What Is a Connected Vehicle....................488
What Is Auto-Start-Stop..............................200
641
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
What Is Blind Spot Information
System...........................................................310
What Is BlueCruise.......................................283
What Is Cross Traffic Alert..........................320
What Is Drive Mode Control......................294
What Is Driver Alert......................................337
What is Exit Warning.....................................316
What Is Hill Descent Control.....................246
What Is Hill Start Assist...............................239
What Is Keyless Entry.....................................84
What Is Lincoln Protect...............................527
What Is Phone as a Key.................................76
What Is Pre-Collision Assist.......................325
What Is Reverse Brake Assist...................235
What Is Speed Sign Recognition..............333
What Is the 360 Degree Camera.............259
What Is the Cabin Air Filter.........................147
What Is the Catalytic Converter................210
What Is the Electric Parking Brake..........232
What Is the Gross Axle Weight
Rating............................................................340
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating............................................................340
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating............................................................340
What Is the Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller.....................................................362
What Is the Keyless Entry Keypad..............86
What Is the Lane Keeping System...........299
What Is the Personal Safety System..........58
What Is the Power Outlet............................185
What is the Rear Occupant Alert
System...........................................................175
What Is the Rear View Camera.................256
What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System..........................................................473
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger.........................................................188
What Is Traction Control.............................242
What is Trailer Backup Assistance...........372
What Is Trailer Hitching Assistance.........368
What Is Trailer Reverse Guidance............385
What is Voice Interaction...........................508
Wheel and Tire Information.......................454
Wheel Nuts....................................................485
Wi Fi
See: Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network............................................................488
Window Bounce-Back.................................126
Overriding Window Bounce-Back...................127
What Is Window Bounce-Back........................126
Windows..........................................................125
Global Opening and Closing............................126
Window Bounce-Back........................................126
Wipers and Washers –
Troubleshooting...........................................113
Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked
Questions...........................................................113
Wipers and Washers – Warning Lamps..........113
Wipers and Washers....................................108
Autowipers............................................................108
Reverse Wipe.......................................................109
Washers...................................................................111
Wipers....................................................................108
Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting........113
Wipers..............................................................108
Switching Windshield Wipers On and
Off.......................................................................108
Wiper Precautions...............................................108
Wireless Accessory Charger
Precautions..................................................188
Wireless Accessory Charger......................188
642
Navigator (TBE) Canada/Mexico/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202406, DOM
Index
, Edition date: 202406
